Loading...
Agenda 05/14/2019 Item #16E 2 (ITB #19-7564 Data & Telecommunications Wiring Services)05/14/2019 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Recommendation to award ITB No. 19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek Communications of South Florida, Inc. OBJECTIVE: To ensure the effective and efficient installation and maintenance of Collier County voice and data cabling infrastructure. CONSIDERATIONS: Data and cabling services are required to maintain the County’s voice and data network. As a result, the Information Technology division periodically requests bids for voice and data cabling and related services. Staff presented the last bid awarded to the Board in November 2014. On January 29, 2019, the Procurement Services Division released notices of Invitation to Bid No. 19 - 7564 to 11,825 vendors for Data and Telecommunication Wiring Services. Interested vendors downloaded eight-two (82) bid packages, and the County received one bid by the March 1, 2019 deadline. This was previously advertised and cancelled due to missing licensing criteria in the scope. The request to have one of the following: Electrician, Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Certified Specialty Contractor were added to the new solicitation as well as the Registered Communications Distribution Designer. These contractor licenses are required to perform this type of work and obtain the necessary permits. Staff recommends awarding to the sole responsive and responsible bidder, Aztek Communications of South Florida, Inc., the incumbent. The bid schedule has been reviewed and, given our quality standards and required manufacturers, all the pricing has been determined to be reasonable and within market standards. In addition, the pricing provided for the CAT6 network cable drop, which is the primary use of this contract, is lower than the current agreement. The existing contract price for CAT 6 inside wiring is $145.00 and the new bid is $139.00. The Division has elected to include all additional services provided in the Bid Tabulation. Company Name City County State Bid Amount Responsive/Responsible Aztek Communications of South Florida Inc. Fort Myers Lee FL $139.00 YES/YES Because only one bid was obtained, the services will be re-solicited in 12 months to determine if another vendor can be identified. The award is for three (3) years with two (2) one (1) year renewal options. Prices shall remain fi rm for the initial term of the agreement in an amount not-to-exceed $250,000 each fiscal year. This contract will replace the existing Agreement No. 14-6253, “Communications Services.” The County has the right to terminate the contract with 30 days notice. FISCAL IMPACT: Funds are budgeted in individual division and project budgets. The historical spend for these services over the past five years is approximately $500,000. LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS: This item is approved as to form and legality and requires majority vote for Board approval. -SRT GROWTH MANAGEMENT IMPACT: There is no Growth Management Impact associated with this action. RECOMMENDATION: To award ITB No. 19-7564 to Aztek Communications of South Florida, Inc. and authorize the Chairman to execute the agreement. 16.E.2 Packet Pg. 1532 05/14/2019 Prepared By: Brian Spooner, Network Operations Manager - Information Technology Division. ATTACHMENT(S) 1. 19-7564 Solicitation (PDF) 2. 19-7564 Bid Tabulation (PDF) 3. 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (PDF) 4. 19-7564 Aztek_InsuranceAuto (PDF) 5. [Linked] TIA-568-C.2 Cabling Standard (PDF) 6. 19-7564 Aztek_Insurance 3-28-19 (PDF) 7. IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (DOCX) 8. 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (PDF) 9. 19-7564 NORA (PDF) 16.E.2 Packet Pg. 1533 05/14/2019 COLLIER COUNTY Board of County Commissioners Item Number: 16.E.2 Doc ID: 8477 Item Summary: Recommendation to award ITB No. 19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek Communications of South Florida, Inc. Meeting Date: 05/14/2019 Prepared by: Title: – Information Technology Name: Brian Spooner 03/28/2019 2:38 PM Submitted by: Title: Division Director - Information Tech – Information Technology Name: Mike Berrios 03/28/2019 2:38 PM Approved By: Review: Information Technology Mike Berrios Additional Reviewer Completed 04/19/2019 2:55 PM Procurement Services Swainson Hall Additional Reviewer Completed 04/19/2019 3:20 PM Procurement Services Opal Vann Level 1 Purchasing Gatekeeper Completed 04/19/2019 4:05 PM Procurement Services Viviana Giarimoustas Additional Reviewer Completed 04/22/2019 8:16 AM Administrative Services Department Paula Brethauer Level 1 Division Reviewer Completed 04/24/2019 8:31 AM Procurement Services Ted Coyman Additional Reviewer Completed 04/24/2019 5:39 PM Administrative Services Department Len Price Level 2 Division Administrator Review Completed 04/29/2019 3:17 PM County Attorney's Office Scott Teach Level 2 Attorney Review Completed 05/01/2019 11:43 AM Office of Management and Budget Valerie Fleming Level 3 OMB Gatekeeper Review Completed 05/01/2019 4:57 PM County Attorney's Office Jeffrey A. Klatzkow Level 3 County Attorney's Office Review Completed 05/02/2019 9:09 AM Office of Management and Budget Laura Wells Additional Reviewer Completed 05/02/2019 9:51 AM County Manager's Office Nick Casalanguida Level 4 County Manager Review Completed 05/06/2019 12:55 PM Board of County Commissioners MaryJo Brock Meeting Pending 05/14/2019 9:00 AM 16.E.2 Packet Pg. 1534 COLLIER COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) FOR Data and Telecommunication Wiring Services SOLICITATION NO.: 19-7564 VIVIANA GIARIMOUSTAS, PROCUREMENT STRATEGIST PROCUREMENT SERVICES DIVISION 3295 TAMIAMI TRAIL EAST, BLDG C-2 NAPLES, FLORIDA 34112 TELEPHONE: (239) 252-8375 Viviana.Giarimoustas@colliercountyfl.gov (Email) This solicitation document is prepared in a Microsoft Word format. Any alterations to this document made by the Consultant may be grounds for rejection of proposal, cancellation of any subsequent award, or any other legal remedies available to the Collier County Government. 16.E.2.a Packet Pg. 1535 Attachment: 19-7564 Solicitation (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek SOLICITATION PUBLIC NOTICE INVITATION TO BID (ITB) NUMBER: 19-7564 PROJECT TITLE: Data and Telecommunication Wiring Services DUE DATE: Friday, March 1, 2019 10:00 AM EST PLACE OF BID OPENING: PROCUREMENT SERVICES DIVISION 3295 TAMIAMI TRAIL EAST, BLDG C-2 NAPLES, FL 34112 All proposals shall be submitted online via the Collier County Procurement Services Division Online Bidding System: https://www.bidsync.com/bidsync-cas/ INTRODUCTION As requested by the Information Technology Division (hereinafter, the “Division or Department”), the Collier County Board of County Commissioners Procurement Services Division (hereinafter, “County”) has issued this Invitation to Bid (hereinafter, “ITB”) with the intent of obtaining bid submittals from interested and qualified vendors in accordance with the terms, conditions and specifications stated or attached. The vendor, at a minimum, must achieve the requirements of the Specifications or Scope of Work stated. The results of this solicitation may be used by other County departments once awarded according to the Board of County Commissioners Procurement Ordinance. Collier County desires to enter into a contractual relationship with one or more vendor(s) capable of providing various data and telecommunication wiring and related services to the County. These services enhance and supplement communications services currently provided by County staff. Historically, County departments have spent approximately $100,000 on average in the past three years; however, this may not be indicative of future buying patterns. BACKGROUND The County has a 2,000+ PC based computer WAN network and IP Phone system with approximately one hundred twenty (120) locations throughout Naples utilizing Cisco networking and an Avaya PBX (S8800) and a number of key systems with approximately two thousand five hundred (2,500) extensions. The majority of the phones and the PBX are located on three (3) major campuses in Naples but there are approximately eighty (80) additional locations with smaller numbers of telephones throughout the County, including Everglades City, Marco Island and Immokalee. TERM OF CONTRACT The contract term, if an award(s) is/are made is intended to be for three (3) years with two (2) one (1) year renewals. Prices shall remain firm for the initial term of this contract. Surcharges will not be accepted in conjunction with this contract, and such charges should be incorporated into the pricing structure. The County Manager, or designee, may, at his discretion, extend the Agreement under all of the terms and conditions contained in this Agreement for up to one hundred eighty (180) days. The County Manager, or designee, shall give the Contractor written notice of the County's intention to extend the Agreement term not less than ten (10) days prior to the end of the Agreement term then in effect. All goods are FOB destination and must be suitably packed and prepared to secure the lowest transportation rates and to comply with all carrier regulations. Risk of loss of any goods sold hereunder shall transfer to the COUNTY at the time and place of delivery; provided that risk of loss prior to actual receipt of the goods by the COUNTY nonetheless remain with VENDOR. AWARD CRITERIA ITB award criteria are as follows:  The County’s Procurement Services Division reserves the right to clarify a vendor’s submittal prior to the award of the 16.E.2.a Packet Pg. 1536 Attachment: 19-7564 Solicitation (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek solicitation.  It is the intent of Collier County to award to the lowest, responsive and responsible vendor(s) that represents the best value to the County.  For the purposes of determining the winning bidder, the County will select the vendor with the lowest price as outlined below: • Lowest total base bid  Collier County reserves the right to select one, or more than one suppliers, award on a line item basis, establish a pool for quoting, or other options that represents the best value to the County; however, it is the intent to: • Award to a Primary and Secondary  The County reserves the right to issue a formal contract, standard County Purchase Order, or utilize the County Purchasing Card for the award of this solicitation.  The primary vendor is expected to respond within one business day if the primary does not respond the County will contact the secondary vendor.  The County requires that the vendor submit three (3) completed reference forms from clients during the last five (5) years whose projects are of a similar nature to this solicitation as a part of their proposal. DETAILED SCOPE OF WORK General Requirements • All work must comply with the IT Construction Standards which are attached to this bid. • Vendor shall have a minimum of one (1) of the applicable licenses below: o Electrician o Alarm I o Alarm II o Certified Specialty Contractor • Prices shall be all inclusive including travel time. No separate travel charges shall apply. • Equivalent manufacturers may be used. Collier County IT Department (CCIT) will determine equivalency. • All cable needs to be continuous run. No splices without County permission. • Must have an Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) on staff. Certification shall be provided with bid. • Vendor is responsible for pulling all permits and shall be paid at cost. • Regular hours are from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Monday to Friday. After hours will be considered anything outside of that. After hours and holiday surcharge shall be time and a half. • A response time of one business day is expected for requests made. If an urgent request is made a response time is expected of no more than 4 hours and shall be compensated at time and a half. • Vendor is responsible for costs of repair for any damage or breakage caused during installations. Quality of repair work must meet County approval. • Vendor is responsible for costs associated with any rework required to meet County standards. As well as removal and disposal of all old cables. • CAT 6 cabling must meet or exceed (American National Standards Institute/Telecommunication Industry Association) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 standards. Cabling must be manufactured by Berktek, Belden, Superior Essex, Mohawk, General Cable or an approved alternative. Services Required • Inside CAT 6 wiring per run. Price provided shall include but not limited to: o Labor o Cable (must conform to Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) standards) o Hangers o Jack- Brands shall be Ortronics, Belden, Hubbel or approved alternative. o Outlet box and plate (surface mount boxes are unacceptable unless prior permission is given). o Installations in modular furniture to be done using furniture cable raceways and plates. o All cabling must be installed and tested in accordance with BICSI standards. Test results to be provided in written or electronic form (electronic results must be in a format Collier County can read without requiring the purchase of software). • 25, 50, 100, 200 pair telephone cabling. Price per foot to include: o Conduit (orange HDPE underground and metallic in building). o Wall penetrations o Pull boxes o Amphenol connectors o Gas fuse lightning protection 16.E.2.a Packet Pg. 1537 Attachment: 19-7564 Solicitation (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek o Termination to 24 port patch panels with integral Amphenol connectors o All cabling must be installed and tested in accordance with BICSI standards. Test results to be provided in written or electronic form (electronic results must be in a format Collier County can read without requiring the purchase of software) • Additional services (hourly per person) o Telephone install o Computer install o Printer install o Telecommunication troubleshooting o Wireless Access Point mounting/install • Rack/Wall Mount Cabinet Install. Price to include: o Includes labor o Grounding • Data Racks shall be Legrand, Ortronics, Hoffman, Great Lakes, Chatsworth, Hubbel or approved alternative brand. o Free-standing network cabinet with door locks – 42U o Free-standing network cabinet with door locks – 26U o Wall-mount network cabinet with door locks – 26U o Wall-mount network cabinet with door locks – 12U o Industrial/Non-vented wall mount network cabinet with door locks – 9U o Industrial/Non-vented wall mount network cabinet with door locks – 16U o Industrial/Non-vented wall mount network cabinet with door locks – 24U • Ladder Rack Install per foot. Price to include: o Materials o Labor o Mounting hardware • 24 port rack mount patch panel (Ortronics or approved alternative brand) (include installation cost) • EMT Conduit per foot. Price to include: o Materials o Labor o Mounting hardware • Percentage markup for materials shall be strictly cost plus 10%. • Subcontractors will not be accepted for this solicitation, without prior authorization from the Project Manager. If authorized, a 15% mark-up will be allowed. • Services or additional hardware may be added/removed via change order or amendment as needed. Additional services will be based upon the hourly rates established in the contract. VENDOR CHECKLIST ***Vendor should check off each of the following items as the necessary action is completed (please see, Form 2: Vendor Check List): The Solicitation Submittal has been signed. The Solicitation Pricing Document (Bid Schedule/Quote Schedule/Proposal Pricing/etc.) has been completed and attached. All applicable forms have been signed and included, along with licenses to complete the requirements of the project. Any addenda have been signed and included. Affidavit for Claiming Status as a Local Business, if applicable. Division of Corporations - Florida Department of State – http://dos.myflorida.com/sunbiz/ (If work performed in the State). E-Verify/Immigration Affidavit (Memorandum of Understanding). 16.E.2.a Packet Pg. 1538 Attachment: 19-7564 Solicitation (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek Project Manager: Brian Spooner Procurement: Viviana Giarimoustas Witness: Kris Lopez Bid Tabulation #19-7564 Data and Telecommunication Wiring Services Notifications Sent: 11,825 Downloaded: 82 Submissions: 1 No Bids: 1 Item Number Description Quantity Unit of measure Price 1 Inside Category 6 Wiring 1 Run 139.00$ 139.00$ 2 25 Pair Telephone Cabling 1 Foot 2.00$ 3 50 Pair Telephone Cabling 1 Foot 3.00$ 4 100 Pair Telephone Cabling 1 Foot 4.00$ 5 200 Pair Telephone Cabling 1 Foot 5.00$ 6 Telephone Install 1 Hourly 75.00$ 7 Computer Install 1 Hourly 75.00$ 8 Printer Install 1 Hourly 75.00$ 9 Telecommunication Troubleshooting 1 Hourly 75.00$ 10 Wireless Access Point Install/Mount 1 Hourly 75.00$ 11 Rack Install 1 Hourly 75.00$ 12 Wall Mount Cabinet Install 1 Hourly 75.00$ 13 Free-standing network cabinet with door locks – 42U 1 Each 2,611.69$ 14 Free-standing network cabinet with door locks – 26U 1 Each 2,244.34$ 15 Wall-mount network cabinet with door locks – 26U 1 Each 870.89$ 16 Wall-mount network cabinet with door locks – 12U 1 Each 653.87$ 17 Industrial/Non-vented wall mount network cabinet with door locks – 9U 1 Each 1,144.37$ 18 Industrial/Non-vented wall mount network cabinet with door locks – 16U 1 Each 1,389.26$ 19 Industrial/Non-vented wall mount network cabinet with door locks – 24U 1 Each 1,846.05$ 20 Ladder Rack 1 Foot 18.00$ 21 24 port rack mount patch panel and installation 1 Each 275.00$ 22 EMT Conduit 1 Foot 7.00$ YES/NO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Provide all inclusive pricing. Collier County reserves the right to remove items from the bid list, in the event such items are not available from all vendors. This action facilitates a fair comparison of bids. After hours, urgent response, and holiday hours shall be billed at time and a half. Any mark up shall be strictly at 10%. No subcontractors shall be permitted unless authorized by the Project Manager; if so then a mark-up of 15% is allowed. Total Base Bid Additional Services: Description Form 2: Vendor Check List Aztek Communications of South Florida Inc. Form 3: Conflict of Interest Affidavit E-Verify Insurance and Bonding Requirements Form 7: Vendor Submittal – Local Vendor Preference Affidavit Form 6: Vendor Substitute W – 9 Form 5: Immigration Affidavit Certification Form 4: Vendor Declaration Statement 1 of 1 16.E.2.b Packet Pg. 1539 Attachment: 19-7564 Bid Tabulation (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and COLLIER COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) FOR Data and Telecommunication Wiring Services SOLICITATION NO.: 19-7564 Presented by 5701 Country Lakes Dr Ste 10 Fort Myers, FL 33905 P: 239-659-0017 · F: 239-659-0018 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1540 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1541 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1542 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1543 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1544 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1545 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1546 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1547 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1548 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1549 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1550 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1551 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1552 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1553 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1554 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1555 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek Solicitation: Reference Questionnaire for: (Nanre of Conrpanr,' Requesting Rel'erence Inlrrrmationi (Name of Individuais Requesting Reference Information) uame: Ketr{ E{,r:o"&s (Evaluator completin g rei-erence questionnaire) Ernart:(EVlN. EDW,4?-DA Companv: ATo 5 (Evaluator' s Compan,v cornp I etin g ref-erence) Refercnce Questionnaire Collicr Count-r'has implemc'nted a process tltat collccts rel-erc'nce rnfilrnration r)n llrnts and rheir key personnel to be usedintheselec-tionolfirrrrstopcrtbrmthisproject. TheNanreoltheCompanl listedinthesubjectabovehaslisted )ou as a client for rvhich thev have previousl_r, perlbrmecl u.'orlt. Please complete the surver.. Please rate each criteria to thc best of 1'our knorvledge on a scale of 1 to 10. uith 10 representing thai r'ou \\ere ver\.satisiled (and r.r,ould hire the t-irmrindiv'iduai again) and 1 represenling that ),ou \\erc verv unsatisfled (and wouid rrever hire the lirurrindivcliual a-tain). IfloLtdonothalesufficicrrtkno*ledgeofpast6rcrlbnranceinaparticulararea. Ieaveitblankandthe ilenrgr tilrrn rvill be scorcd "0." Proj ect Description: (aN SgE.t t1r:tilN_&;g2ffifitq Complerion Dare:/r-/{-26/3 Project Budget: **rU"Project Number of Days: -*b-Ay S_ __ Item Citeria Score t Abilitt'tr) lranase the project costs (rrinirlize change orders to scope)./o 2 ALrilitl to maintain project schedule (cornplctu on-time or early), /o QLralltl of * ork. /o -1 Qualitv of consultative advice providc-d on tlre pro.jecr. lo 5 Prolbssionalism and abiliiv to manage per.sonnel. t6 6 Proiect adntinistration (ct-rmp.rlc'terl docurrents" trnal jnvoice- tlnui p.oAuct tr.,r***r invoiccs: manuals or uoing fcrnr,ard docunrcntation. etc.) /0 7 ;\t rlitv to verballr,commr.rnicate and docr.rment inforniation ctearlr,,na succirc.Jt /o 8 Abiltitl tc) nranase rjsks and unexpected project circumstances. /o 9 Abilitl to lbllou conrract docuurents. policies. procedures. rulcs. regulaticns. ctc. t0 l0 Overall comfort ievel u,ith hiring the cor.npany in tlie tr.rture (cusr,:,tre. satist'afit,rnl lo I O-I-AI- SCORE OF ALL ITENIS /00 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1556 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1557 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek JONATHAN ZACHEM, SECRETARYRICK SCOTT, GOVERNORSTATE OF FLORIDADEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATIONELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS LICENSING BOARDTHE SPECIALTY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR HEREIN IS CERTIFIED UNDER THEPROVISIONS OF CHAPTER 489, FLORIDA STATUTESLEEDS, MICHAEL LOUISDo not alter this document in any form.AZTEK COMMUNICATIONS OF SOUTH FLORIDA INCLICENSE NUMBER: ES12000386EXPIRATION DATE: AUGUST 31, 2020This is your license. It is unlawful for anyone other than the licensee to use this document.5701 COUNTRY LAKES DR.STE. 10FT. MYERS FL 33905Always verify licenses online at MyFloridaLicense.com16.E.2.cPacket Pg. 1558Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 2019 Florida Annual Resale Certificate for Sales Tax This Certificate Expires on December 31, 2019 DR-13 R. 10/18 Business Name and Location Address Certificate Number By extending this certificate or the certificate number to a selling dealer to make eligible purchases of taxable property or services exempt from sales tax and discretionary sales surtax, the person or business named above certifies that the taxable property or services purchased or rented will be resold or re-rented for one or more of the following purposes: • Resale as tangible personal property. • Re-rental as tangible personal property. • Resale of services. • Re-rental as commercial real property. • Incorporation into tangible personal property being repaired. • Re-rental as transient rental property. • Incorporation as a material, ingredient, or component part of tangible personal property that is being produced for sale by manufacturing, compounding, or processing. Your Florida Annual Resale Certificate for Sales Tax (Annual Resale Certificate) allows you or your representatives to buy or rent property or services tax exempt when the property or service is resold or re-rented. You may not use your Annual Resale Certificate to make tax-exempt purchases or rentals of property or services that will be used by your business or for personal purposes. Florida law provides for criminal and civil penalties for fraudulent use of an Annual Resale Certificate. As a seller, you must document each tax-exempt sale for resale using one of three methods. You can use a different method each time you make a tax-exempt sale for resale. 1. Obtain a copy (paper or electronic) of your customer’s current Annual Resale Certificate. 2. For each sale, obtain a transaction authorization number using your customer’s Annual Resale Certificate number. 3. Each calendar year, obtain annual vendor authorization numbers for your regular customers using their Annual Resale Certificate numbers. Online: Visit floridarevenue.com/taxes/certificates Phone: 877-357-3725 and enter your customer’s Annual Resale Certificate number Mobile App: Available for iPhone, iPad, Android devices, and Windows phones. AZTEK COMMUNICATIONS OF SOUTH FLORIDA IN AZTEK COMMUNICATIONS 5701 COUNTRY LAKES DR STE 10 FORT MYERS, FL 33905-5590 46-8017021639-3 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1559 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1560 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek Communicat) 2/28/2019 Detail by FEI/EIN Number http://search.sunbiz.org/Inquiry/CorporationSearch/SearchResultDetail?inquirytype=FeiNumber&directionType=Initial&searchNameOrder=593594601…1/3 Department of State / Division of Corporations / Search Records / Detail By Document Number / Document Number FEI/EIN Number Date Filed State Status Last Event Event Date Filed Event Effective Date Detail by FEI/EIN Number Florida Profit Corporation AZTEK COMMUNICATIONS OF SOUTH FLORIDA, INC. Filing Information P99000074134 59-3594601 08/13/1999 FL ACTIVE AMENDMENT 01/14/2010 NONE Principal Address 5701 COUNTRY LAKES DR. SUITE 10 FT. MYERS, FL 33905 Changed: 05/31/2016 Mailing Address 5701 COUNTRY LAKES DR. SUITE 10 FT. MYERS, FL 33905 Changed: 05/31/2016 Registered Agent Name & Address GOEDE, JOHN CESQ C/O LAW OFFICE OF JOHN C GOEDE, P.A. 8950 Fontana del Sol Way Suite 100 NAPLES, FL 34109 Name Changed: 06/21/2007 Address Changed: 03/09/2015 Officer/Director Detail Name & Address Title PD D IVISION OF C ORPORATIONSFlorida Department of State 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1561 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 2/28/2019 Detail by FEI/EIN Number http://search.sunbiz.org/Inquiry/CorporationSearch/SearchResultDetail?inquirytype=FeiNumber&directionType=Initial&searchNameOrder=593594601…2/3 Leeds, Michael L 5701 COUNTRY LAKES DR. SUITE 10 FT. MYERS, FL 33905 Title VP, Treasurer RENOSIS, JOHN L 5701 COUNTRY LAKES DR. SUITE 10 FT. MYERS, FL 33905 Title Secretary Coyne, Scott 5701 COUNTRY LAKES DR. SUITE 10 FT. MYERS, FL 33905 Annual Reports Report Year Filed Date 2017 01/16/2017 2018 01/12/2018 2019 01/28/2019 Document Images 01/28/2019 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/12/2018 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/16/2017 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 03/08/2016 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 03/09/2015 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/23/2014 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/17/2013 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/11/2012 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/15/2011 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/19/2010 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/14/2010 -- Amendment View image in PDF format 04/16/2009 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/30/2008 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 06/21/2007 -- Amendment View image in PDF format 06/07/2007 -- Amendment View image in PDF format 06/07/2007 -- Merger View image in PDF format 05/30/2007 -- Reg. Agent Change View image in PDF format 01/16/2007 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/25/2006 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 12/23/2005 -- Name Change View image in PDF format 01/27/2005 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/20/2004 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/21/2003 REINSTATEMENT Vi i i PDF f t 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1562 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 2/28/2019 Detail by FEI/EIN Number http://search.sunbiz.org/Inquiry/CorporationSearch/SearchResultDetail?inquirytype=FeiNumber&directionType=Initial&searchNameOrder=593594601…3/3 01/21/2003 -- REINSTATEMENT View image in PDF format 01/29/2001 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 08/02/2000 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 08/13/1999 -- Domestic Profit View image in PDF format Florida Department of State, Division of Corporations 16.E.2.c Packet Pg. 1563 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Proposal (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek 16.E.2.d Packet Pg. 1564 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek_InsuranceAuto (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURER F : INSURER E : INSURER D : INSURER C : INSURER B : INSURER A : NAIC # NAME:CONTACT (A/C, No):FAX E-MAILADDRESS: PRODUCER (A/C, No, Ext):PHONE INSURED REVISION NUMBER:CERTIFICATE NUMBER:COVERAGES IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. OTHER: (Per accident) (Ea accident) $ $ N / A SUBR WVD ADDL INSD THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. $ $ $ $PROPERTY DAMAGE BODILY INJURY (Per accident) BODILY INJURY (Per person) COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT AUTOS ONLY AUTOSAUTOS ONLY NON-OWNED SCHEDULEDOWNED ANY AUTO AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y / N WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below If yes, describe under ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE $ $ $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT EROTH-STATUTEPER LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY)POLICY EXP(MM/DD/YYYY)POLICY EFFPOLICY NUMBERTYPE OF INSURANCELTRINSR DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) EXCESS LIAB UMBRELLA LIAB $EACH OCCURRENCE $AGGREGATE $ OCCUR CLAIMS-MADE DED RETENTION $ $PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $GENERAL AGGREGATE $PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $MED EXP (Any one person) $EACH OCCURRENCE DAMAGE TO RENTED $PREMISES (Ea occurrence) COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY PRO-JECT LOC CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) CANCELLATION AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25 (2016/03) © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. CERTIFICATE HOLDER The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD HIRED AUTOS ONLY 3/27/2019 Arthur J.Gallagher Risk Management Services,Inc. 12660 World Plaza Lane Bldg 73 Fort Myers FL 33907 Janet Johnson 239-418-2111 239-936-8288 janet_johnson@ajg.com FCCI Insurance Company 10178 AZTEK-1 Aztek Communications of South FL 5701 Country Lakes Dr.,Ste 10 Fort Myers FL 33905 1287919484 A X 1,000,000 X 100,000 5,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 X Y GL 0015662-6 7/15/2018 7/15/2019 2,000,000 A X X 1,000,000UMB100015592-02 7/15/2018 7/15/2019 1,000,000 X 10,000 A X Y 001-WC17A-70911 7/15/2018 7/15/2019 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 COMMUNICATION WIRING RE:Contract:#19-7564 Collier County Board of County Commissioners are listed as Additional Insured with respects to General Liability.Coverage is primary and non-contributory. Collier County Board of County Commissioners 3295 Tamiami Trail East Naples FL 34112 16.E.2.f Packet Pg. 1565 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek_Insurance 3-28-19 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 1 of 34 Collier County Information Technology Construction Standards Version 5.00 2/24/2014 Revision History Date Initials Change 09/30/201 SC Updating fonts and table of contents 12/21/09 JD Document Updated 9/17/2007 INJ Document updated 08/5/2008 INJ Document Updated Section G-5 Cabinet connections 02/14/2014 MMF Combined Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards. 5/17/2017 MMF Updated racks, No copper out door runs Audience: General (vendors, other department Project Managers) Purpose: Outline IT’s requirements for new construction and remodels Prerequisites: None 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1566 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 2 of 34 Table of Contents Vertical Construction Standards 1. Site Design ....................................................................................................................... 4 2. Communication Rooms .................................................................................................... 4 3. MDF ................................................................................................................................. 7 4. Site MDF .......................................................................................................................... 7 5. Computer Rooms ............................................................................................................. 7 6. Cabling ............................................................................................................................. 8 7. Category 6 UTP Cable ..................................................................................................... 8 8. Single Mode Fiber Optics ................................................................................................. 9 9. Work Station Wiring .......................................................................................................... 9 10. Installation ........................................................................................................................ 9 11. Penetrations Through Fire Rated Structural Components .............................................. 11 12. Communications Room Termination ............................................................................... 12 13. Cable Bend Radius ........................................................................................................ 12 14. Cable Slack .................................................................................................................... 13 15. General Labeling Requirements ..................................................................................... 13 16. Riser and Backbone Labeling Requirements .................................................................. 14 17. Cable Testing ................................................................................................................. 14 18. Workmanship ................................................................................................................. 15 19. Walk-Thru....................................................................................................................... 15 20. Documentation ............................................................................................................... 16 21. Warranty ........................................................................................................................ 16 22. Payment of Services ...................................................................................................... 17 23. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 17 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1567 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 3 of 34 Fiber Construction Standard 24. Individual Proposals ....................................................................................................... 18 25. Panning and Design ....................................................................................................... 18 26. Walkthroughs and Reviews ............................................................................................ 18 27. Cable Diagrams.............................................................................................................. 19 28. Other Required Documentation ...................................................................................... 19 29. Utility Coordination ......................................................................................................... 19 30. Fiber Optic Cable ........................................................................................................... 20 31. Fiber Optic Cable Splicing .............................................................................................. 23 32. Fiber Optic Cable Materials ............................................................................................ 24 33. Fiber Optic Termination .................................................................................................. 25 34. Method of Measurement ................................................................................................. 26 35. Fiber Optic Communication Cable Tests ........................................................................ 26 36. Conduit ........................................................................................................................... 27 37 Conduit Installations by Trench or Directional Bore ........................................................ 28 38. Conduit Installation into Existing Pull Boxes ................................................................... 29 39. Removal of Existing Pull Box and Installing of New Pull Box .......................................... 30 40. Pull and Junction Boxes ................................................................................................. 30 41. Communications Pull Box ............................................................................................... 31 42. Method of Measurement ................................................................................................. 32 43. Fiber Optic Cable Markers .............................................................................................. 32 44. Equipment Warranty ....................................................................................................... 33 45. Service Maintenance Contract ........................................................................................ 33 46. Payment of Services ...................................................................................................... 33 47. Applicable Standards ..................................................................................................... 34 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1568 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 4 of 34 1. Site Design a. Entrance Conduit i. Single Building Sites - Building will have two sets of two inch conduit from the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) to the right of way. Each set will follow a different physical path. b. Multi Building Sites i. One building will be designated as the Site MDF and the entrance conduit will be installed as described above. ii. Intra Building Connectivity - All Building MDF’s will be connected to the Site MDF with two, two inch conduits. iii. Conduit between Communications Rooms - Each Communications Room will be connected to the building MDF with two, two inch conduit. c. Physical Security i. Card Key - All buildings will have at least one exterior door equipped with Card Access Locks (see Facilities Management for details.) where available. 2. Communication Rooms a. Exclusive Use - All Communications Rooms are for the sole use of CCIT. No other building facility equipment will be housed in any Communications Room including, but not limited to, fire alarm systems, monitoring systems, security systems, janitorial services, supply storage, departmental storage, electrical, HVAC, etc. or any other equipment. Exception to these restrictions for low voltage building automation systems will be considered on a case by case basis. b. Room Specifications i. Flooring 1. Size - Minimum of 60 square feet (6’ x 10’) for single rack applications. An additional 2’ of width is required for each additional rack. 2. Floor Surface - Light colored sealed epoxy. Computer Rooms will have site specific floor surface requirements. VCT installation will be completed at least two weeks before the rack installation. 3. Floor loading – Distributed floor loading of 200 lb/ft2 minimum or as required by applicable codes whichever is greater. The concentrated loading in Communications Rooms must be 2000 lb/ft2 over the area supporting the communications equipment. ii. Ceiling Height - Minimum clear height 8 feet above finished floor without obstructions. iii. Doors 1. 36” wide and 80” tall with a 1800 outward swing 2. The door should have no center posts or doorsills. iv. Lighting 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1569 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 5 of 34 1. Specify to have lights mounted at ceiling height with a minimum of 540 lumens measured three feet above the floor. Special consideration will be made regarding the placement of lighting fixtures to avoid equipment racks and loaded cable trays from blocking much of the lighting. 2. CCIT will have final approval over placement of the lights. 3. Illumination shall not be controlled by automatic means only per NFPA 70 Article 110-26-(3)(d). v. Systems Power 1. Power Outlets for Communications Rack to be approved by CCIT. 2. Power Outlets for Communications Rack shall be a quad-receptacle on single dedicated, isolated, non-switched 120Vac 20Amp circuit. vi. Convenience Power - Power outlets placed at six foot intervals in the room for support and test equipment. vii. HVAC 1. Air-conditioned with separate supply and return ducting. 2. Maintain constant temperature of 640 - 750 F with one air change per hour. 3. Relative humidity should be 40-50%. 4. Heat load specifications will be provided after network equipment specifications are finalized. c. Location i. Room shall be located such that no single Category 6 horizontal cable shall exceed a length of 90 meters or 295 feet from patch panel to station jack. This distance allows for a service loop at each end of the station cable, wall traversal distance, and allowing cables to run parallel and perpendicular with the joists. Cable pathways run parallel and perpendicular to the building walls. Running cables diagonally through the building or “as-the-crow-flies” will not be accepted. ii. Minimum of one Communication Room per floor. iii. Communications Rooms in multi-story building should be vertically congruent, located near the middle of each floor and within 90 meters of each other and all work area outlets. If they cannot be stacked install a minimum of four 4” conduits for a pathway between the rooms. iv. Communications Rooms will not be located near, under or in bathrooms, laundry rooms, kitchens, water heaters or janitorial sinks. v. Communications Rooms will not contain chilled water lines, roof drains, or pressurized hydraulic elevator fluid lines. d. UPS i. CCIT uses American Power Conversion (APC) UPS equipment. ii. If generator backup power is available to the building all Communications Rooms will be powered by the generator, a transfer switch must be included to power the UPS. e. Conduit and Sleeves i. A minimum of 4-4” sleeves installed on the inside wall near the ceiling adjacent to the hallway for horizontal pathways. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1570 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 6 of 34 ii. A minimum of 4-4” sleeves installed in the floor and in the ceiling for riser cabling to Communications Rooms that are located on the floors above or below other Communications Rooms. iii. All wall and floor penetrations for Communications Rooms must be made with sleeved cores. iv. A minimum of four 4” cores must be installed in Entrance Facilities, Equipment Rooms, and Telecommunications Closets. v. In rooms or areas that are heavily populated with Work Area Outlets, an additional two 4” cores must be installed. vi. All cores must be lined with sections of 4” EMT. vii. All EMT sleeves must be reamed and have a plastic bushing installed on each end. viii. All sleeves must extend 4” beyond the wall or floor. ix. A section of vertical ladder rack must be installed as a pathway from f loor to ceiling behind areas where cores stack between floors to secure pass- through cables and service loops. x. All cores must be identified and labeled with Building number, floor, and TC “from,” and the Building number, floor, and TC “to”. f. Cable Trays i. A continuous pathway of cable tray placed from all the conduits or sleeves up the wall and along the ceiling around the perimeter of the walls and over all equipment racks and cabinets. ii. The pathway must be strong enough and well secured to support the weight of the cables and any possible splice enclosures. iii. Cable tray, also known as runway or ladder rack, to line the perimeter of the room. iv. A minimum of 12” wide cable tray must be used for the pathway to the racks. g. Communications Racks i. Size - Enclosed 19” by 84” locking racks with holes that comply with the 1.75U TIA/EIA standard. ii. Manufacturer – Hubbell, Ortronics or Chatsworth cabinets are Pre approved for use and should be purchased exclusively. No other cabinets are acceptable. iii. Cable Management - Integral vertical cable management. iv. Patch Panels 1. Type – Category 6, 24 port 568-B patch panels. 2. Standards - EIA/TIA TSB-40 standards 3. Labeling - Labeled with rack number and an alpha character. For example a rack with 2 patch panels would be labeled 1A, 1B, etc. 4. Patch Cable Labeling – Patch cables are to be labeled with the Patch Panel Label and the port number at the end connecting to the device. The end at the patch panel is to be labeled with the name of the device it is connected to and port number. 5. Rack Clearance – 3 feet of clearance is required around all sides of the rack/racks with the exception of sides where network racks are joined. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1571 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 7 of 34 6. All Cabinet to Cabinet connections need to be done with patch panels not free wire v. Rack Layout 1. The patch panels will be installed using the following layout: the first patch panel will be installed at U7 from the top of the rack and each successive patch panel will be installed with 3U space between the patch panels. h. Environmental Monitoring - both temperature and humidity with remote alarming capability. Monitors should be network enabled and capable of forwarding SNMP traps. i. Physical Security i. Card Key - All Communications Rooms will be equipped with Card Access Locks (see Facilities Management for details.) 3. MDF a. Adheres to Specifications of Communications Rooms b. Telecommunications Backboard - AC-grade 3/4" x 4' x 8' sheet plywood, with no voids, covered on all sides with two coats flat black fire retardant paint mounted on rear wall of room. c. Grounding and Bonding - Install a contiguous Intra-building grounding and bonding system in compliance with NEC Article 250 and TIA/EIA-607 using a minimum conductor size of 6 AWG to be located on each Telecommunications Backboard with Ground Bus Bar as directed. 4. Site MDF a. Adheres to Specifications of MDF. i. All cabling from the right of way or other MDFs enter the building in this room. ii. Typically, outdoor cables need to enter the building, terminate onto a grounded device for lightning protection, and cross connect onto terminated indoor cables. iii. There shall be 6 ft between lightning conductors and communications cables and wires per NFPA 70 Article 800-13. iv. All entrance cables that need to transition from outdoor cable to indoor cable must do so within 50’ of entering the building. v. All outdoor inner duct must transition immediately upon entering the building. vi. No direct-buried cable is acceptable. 5. Computer Rooms a. Will function as a Site MDF. b. HVAC Requirements 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1572 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 8 of 34 i. Computer Room will have adequate HVAC equipment to maintain a constant temperature and humidity level throughout the day, evening, and weekend timeframes. ii. Maintain constant temperature of 640 - 750 F with one air change per hour. iii. Relative humidity should be 40-50%. iv. Heat load specifications will be provided after network equipment specifications are finalized. v. The ambient temperature should not change more than 12 degrees in an hour. vi. Each room must not contain any water or drain pipes except to support the HVAC equipment. c. Fire Suppression i. FM200 System or equivalent ii. No sprinklers or sprinkler piping in the room. d. Raised floor with a minimum of 12” clearance. e. Cable tray below raised flooring 6. Cabling a. General i. All cable must be new ii. All cables shall be PVC, Outside Plant, Riser, or Plenum rated as required by specific project specifications or local building code. 7. Category 6 UTP Cable a. Four-pair cables shall consist of four-pair, 24-gauge, UTP. All four-pair Category 6 cables shall conform to TIA/EIA 568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Horizontal Cable Section, Addendum 1-Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling (TIA/EIA-568- B.2-1). b. The Category 6 cabling components shall be electrically backward compatible with existing Category 3, 4 and 5, plus future networks. The components shall be engineered and manufactured to compensate for any Category 3, 4, or 5 component crosstalk and shall provide at least Category 3, 4, or 5 performance in all of the Collier County Government’s existing installed base of voice/data/video. c. Cables shall be capable of supporting the applications such as: i. Analog and digital voice ii. Analog Baseband Video/Audio (up to 77 channels, 550 MHz) iii. 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps Ethernet with and without in-line power iv. 155 Mbps ATM v. 622 Mbps ATM vi. 270 Mbps Digital Video d. No copper cable can be run out doors, must use fiber for all out door runs, please see Fiber requirements 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1573 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 9 of 34 8. Single Mode Fiber Optics a. See Fiber Optic Cable: #30.a b. See Fiber Optic Cable Splicing and Fiber optic Terminations: #31-32 9. Work Station Wiring a. Terminations - All pairs shall be terminated. b. Outlet Boxes - Each Communications outlet box will be a single gang, steel outlet box equipped with a mud ring securely mounted at planned locations. c. Faceplates - Each outlet box will be equipped with a four position white modular faceplates with blank inserts for all unused positions securely mounted at planned locations. d. Electrical - One duplex electrical outlet will be located on the same wall as the data outlet and be within three feet of the outlet. e. Furniture i. Blocking Outlets - If furniture will be blocking an outlet secondary labeling for the outlet will be placed in line with the outlet above the level of the furniture. ii. Modular Furniture - Where modular furniture is being installed all Data Outlets will be installed in the raceways integral to the furniture. f. Jacks - Communications jacks for all Category 6 cable will be ANSI / TIA / EIA – 568– B RJ-45 Category 6 compliant Ortronics or equivalent. g. Labeling - Each Jack will be labeled with the Communications room number, rack number, patch panel designator and finally the patch panel port number. i. All faceplates must have printed, adhesive labels. Hand written labels are not acceptable. 10. Installation a. General i. All cabling shall be installed according to specifications given in TIA/EIA 568- B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, General Requirements, Cabling Installation Requirement Section (TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Section 10). ii. Conduit will be schedule 40 PVC. iii. Each horizontal cable shall be installed in a "home-run" configuration. No "daisy chained" conduit or cables shall be allowed. iv. At no time shall pulling tension exceed 25 lbs. on horizontal cables. v. Traditional nylon synch style Tie Wraps shall not be used to bundle cables. Only Velcro Tie Wraps are acceptable to bundle cables. vi. No Intra-building telecommunications cable shall be run adjacent and parallel to power cabling. A minimum of 5" distance is required from any fluorescent lighting fixture or power line up to 2kVA and 24" from any power line over 5kVA. Similarly, cable should be routed and terminated as far as possible from sources of EMF, such as ballasts, generators, fans, motor control units, 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1574 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 10 of 34 vii. No copper cable can be run out doors, must use fiber for all out door runs, please see Fiber requirements viii. motors, etc. Cable shall have no physical defects such as cuts, tears or bulges in the outer jacket. Cables with defects shall be replaced. ix. Cables jackets that are chaffed or burned exposing internal conductor insulation or have any bare copper shall be replaced. x. Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength requirements of the cable during handling and installation. xi. All cable routes to be approved by the BCCIT prior to installation of the cabling. xii. Contractor shall provide the County with detailed diagrams for all cable runs detailing exact locations of cable for review and approval by the BCCIT after coordination with other contractors, architects, and general contractor. Documentation will include at a minimum: 1. Cable lengths between terminations, amplifiers, splitters, patch panels, and equipment; 2. Exact routing of cable; 3. Frequency rating, location and identification of amplifiers, splitters, and patch panels; 4. Bonding and grounding methods and locations; 5. Location and description of all associated equipment. xiii. Cable Trays - All wiring will be run in overhead cable tray systems. 1. The Cable Tray system shall be an open steel mesh tray system designed for ease of access. 2. The Cable Tray system shall be “UL Classified” as suitable for use as an electrical conductor for grounding and bonding. 3. Where physical considerations preclude the use of cable trays other Cable Support Devices may be substituted. Acceptable Cable Support Devices include “J Hooks” and Cable Slings that are Category 6 compliant. a. These Cable Support Devices shall be hung securely by either “all-thread” material, or ceiling grid hanger wires dedicated only to hanging the Cable Support Devices on and not ones holding ceiling grid. b. The Cable Support Devices may also be secured to walls above ceilings. c. If "J" hooks are used, avoid placing any pressure or creating stress points on the cable. Maximum spacing between "J" hooks shall not exceed five feet. b. Cable Routing i. All horizontal cables, regardless of media type, shall not exceed 90 m (295 ft) from the telecommunications outlets in the work area to the Communications Room. ii. The combined length of jumpers, or patch cords and equipment cables in the telecommunications room/closet and the work area should not exceed 10m (33 ft). 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1575 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 11 of 34 iii. Four horizontal cables shall be routed to each work area unless otherwise specified and as shown on project drawings. iv. Horizontal pathways shall be installed or selected such that the minimum bend radius of horizontal cables is kept within manufacturer specifications both during and after installation. v. Telecommunications pathways, spaces and metallic cables, which run parallel with electric power or lighting, which is less than or equal to 480 Vrms, shall be installed with a minimum clearance of 12 inches. vi. Horizontal pathways should avoid being parallel to sources electromagnetic interference whenever possible. Crossing perpendicular is preferred. vii. The installation of telecommunications cabling shall maintain a minimum clearance of 3 m (10 ft) from power cables in excess of 480 Vrms. viii. For voice or data applications, 4-pair UTP or fiber optic cables shall be run using a star topology from the telecommunications room/closet serving that zone to every individual information outlet ix. Each run of UTP cable shall not contain splices. x. In the communications room/closet where cable trays or cable racking are used, the contractor shall provide appropriate means of cable management such as reusable color-coded hook and loop cable managers (ties) to create a neat appearance and practical installation. xi. Continuous conduit runs installed by the General Contractor should not exceed 30.5 m (100 ft) or contain no more than two (2) 90-degree bends without utilizing appropriately sized pull boxes. If a conduit run not meeting the above- mentioned criteria is encountered, contact Project Engineer. Do not proceed with cable installation until Project Engineer provides written notice that the conduit run has been corrected to meet these specifications. xii. The number of horizontal cables placed in a cable pathway shall be limited to a number of cables that will not cause a geometric shape change of the cables and not exceed 60% fill ratio. xiii. Pulling lubricant compound compatible with the cable manufacture’s specification should be used if making long or difficult pulls to reduce cable drag. Other lubricants such as liquid detergent are not acceptable. Lubricant is required on all fiber cable pulls. xiv. Maximum pathway capacity shall not exceed a 60% fill. xv. Fiber optic warning signs should be placed on all inner-duct and conduits containing fiber optic cable. xvi. Horizontal distribution cables shall not be exposed in the work area or other locations with public access. 11. Penetrations Through Fire Rated Structural Components Fire Rated Structural Components penetrated with conduits/sleeves shall be properly Fire Stopped, in compliance with Fire Codes and UL Rated Penetration Systems. All Fire Rated Structural Component penetrations are subject to inspection by the Collier County Government Master Fire Technician and/or the State or County Fire Marshall and any other 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1576 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 12 of 34 inspections required by State and local building codes. All attempts shall be made to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, or water. a. During construction all sleeves must have a fire-stopping pillow installed in it. b. All fire-stopping pillows must be reinstalled daily during cable installation and at no time will sleeves be left unprotected. c. All sleeves must have a fire-stopping caulk applied to the outside circumference of the sleeve on each side of the wall penetration and from the top of a floor penetration. d. Wherever it is not feasible to use a pillow or caulk, use fire-stopping putty. e. All other fire-stopping methods need prior approval by Collier County BCC Department of Facilities Management. f. Fire-stopping methods include mechanical systems, putty, caulk, pillows, intumescent sheets and wrap strips. g. Fire-stopping materials must be prepared and installed using established quality control procedures. h. All products used inside a building shall have the highest UL ratings available and will bear the UL stamp. i. All copper cabling used in plenum areas must be stamped CMP. j. All fiber optic cabling used indoors must be stamped OFNP. k. All plenum rated innerduct used must be stamped “plenum.” l. Plenum-rated innerduct shall be used in all indoor locations except where EMT is used. m. Plenum rated fiber and innerduct must be used indoors to prevent possible future disruptions from later renovations that may add plenum air returns. n. CCIT will make the final decision on whether to purchase the upgrade to the cable. o. All paint used in Building Facility Rooms should contain an intumescent additive. p. All floor mount penetrations for work area outlets will have a fire-stopping device contained within the monument. 12. Communications Room Termination a. Contractor will be responsible for installing all patch panels, horizontal and vertical wire management, fiber optic distribution enclosures and any other items necessary to complete proper installation. b. The Contractor will assemble and place all communication racks associated with the installation of Infrastructure Fiber Optic cable and Computer room horizontal twisted pair outlets. 13. Cable Bend Radius a. Manufacturer’s recommendations for bending radius and pulling strength of the Category 6 and fiber optic cable should be adhered to. b. In spaces with UTP cable terminations, the maximum bend radius for 4-pair cable shall not exceed four times the outside diameter of the cable and ten times for multi-pair cable. This shall be done unless this violates manufacturer specifications. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1577 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 13 of 34 c. During the actual installation, bend radius on 4-pair cable shall not exceed eight times the outside diameter of the cable and ten times for multi-pair cable. This shall be done unless this violates manufacturer specifications. 14. Cable Slack a. In Communications room/closets a minimum of 3-meter (10-ft) service loop should be left for all cable types. This slack must be neatly managed on trays or other support types and does not include length required to route the cable(s) to the proper termination point. b. The amount of fiber cable slack at terminations points should allow the cable to be routed to the termination location with enough additional cable to reach a convenient location for termination. c. Service loops and outlet slack add to the overall horizontal link length. Care is to taken to assure the service loop lengths and horizontal distances, when combined, do not exceed the 100-meter channel length as defined by TIA/EIA-568-B. 15. General Labeling Requirements a. All cables, equipment racks, information outlets (face plates), patch panels, termination equipment, pull boxes and inner-duct will require labels. b. All labeling must meet EIA/TIA 606 standards. c. Labels will be placed in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications. d. All racks and cabinets will be labeled on the top, right corner, both front and rear. e. Where cables are terminated (such as patch panels and information outlets), labels are required to be installed on both sides of the equipment and shall identify each cable that terminates on the equipment. f. All information outlets will be labeled on the top center of the faceplate. g. Only machine printed laminated labels that are mechanically fastened are acceptable for equipment, panel, riser and outlet labeling. h. Horizontal and backbone subsystem cables shall be labeled at each end. Labels will be affixed 2” from each end. Handwritten markings on the cable will not be accepted. Additional labeling is required on cables that pass through locations such as conduit ends, backbone splice points, manholes and pull boxes at the point they pass through these devices. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1578 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 14 of 34 16. Riser and Backbone Labeling Requirements a. Fiber distribution centers should be clearly labeled on the front cover as to the location of the other end. This label should also indicate number of single-mode and multi- mode strands in this unit. b. Backbone labeling and numbering should mirror each end. Risers should be vertical, top down with the same numbering sequence. Backbone cables shall be terminated in the same size fiber distribution center at each end with the single and multi-mode strands in the same positions. 17. Cable Testing a. All information outlet wiring shall be tested from the outlet device to the patch panel. Each wire/pair shall be tested at both ends. b. Testing shall be done utilizing a cable tester meeting EIA/TIA 568 standards; all testing equipment shall be calibrated annually and shall have a dated certificate. c. Printed test results shall be assembled and delivered to the County’s representative. d. Test results for each 4-pair UTP cable must be submitted with identification to match labels on all patch panels and 8-position modular jacks. e. Category 6 Cabling i. All category 6 field-testing shall be performed with an approved, TIA/EIA Level II field tester device. All installed channels shall perform equal to or better than the minimum requirements as specified by the table below. The results of all test and analyses shall be kept on file. ii. All Category 6 channels are qualified for linear transmission performance up to 300 MHz to ensure that high-frequency voltage phase and magnitude contributions do not prove cumulative or adversely affect channel performance. iii. All UTP field testers shall be factory calibrated each calendar year by the field test equipment manufacturer as stipulated by the manuals provided with the field test unit. The calibration certificate shall be provided for review prior to the start of testing. iv. Autotest settings provided in the field tester for testing the installed cabling shall be set to the default parameters. v. Test settings selected from options provided in the field testers shall be compatible with the installed cable under test. vi. Category 6 UTP horizontal and backbone cables, whose length does not exceed 90 m (295 ft) for the basic link, and 100 m (328 ft) for the channel shall be 100 percent tested according to ANSI/TIA/EIA-TSB-67 and ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568-A-5. Test parameters include wire map, length, NEXT loss (pair-to-pair), NEXT loss (power sum), ELFEXT loss (pair-to-pair), ELFEXT loss (power sum), return Loss, attenuation, propagation delay, and delay skew. vii. Category 6 tests should be made with a TIA/EIA Level II tester. f. Fiber Optic Cable Testing 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1579 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 15 of 34 i. See Fiber Optic Communication Cable Tests: #35 18. Workmanship a. All work shall be done in a workman like fashion of the highest standards in the telecommunications industry. b. All equipment and materials are to be installed in a neat and secure manner, while cables are to be properly dressed. c. Provide proper temporary protection of cable during the time between when the cable is pulled and when the final dressing and termination’s are complete. d. Do not leave cable lying on the floor. e. Bundle and/or tie wrap the cables so they are off of the floor until they are ready to be terminated. f. The Contractor is required to be a member of BICSI and have RCDD-certified staff overseeing the work or have work reviewed by an RCDD. g. Where work dictates the extension, attachment, expansion, or augmentation of an existing system(s) or subsystem(s), the vendor will use materials and other necessary components compatible with those systems. h. The building wiring shall be installed in a neat and secure professional manner that provides mechanical integrity for the cabling media and any associated components. The design and installation shall also offer ease of access and suitability for future rearrangements and changes. i. Cable paths above suspended ceilings, mechanical rooms, closets, etc. shall not be blocked or covered in any way that would impede the addition of cable in the future. j. All cables shall be tested by the Contractor to verify that the cables are installed properly, and that there are no kinks, cuts, or other damage to these cables 19. Walk-Thru a. CCIT requires a full walk-through with the cabling contractor project manager to review every Computer Rooms, Site MDF, MDF, IDF, and all manholes, hand-holes, and significant pull-boxes and junction boxes. b. The walk-thru may include a full demonstration of termination and testing on the various media. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1580 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 16 of 34 20. Documentation a. Testing Documentation i. All test results must be submitted in an electronic format, if CCIT does not have a program capable of reading the format, then the contractor must provide the software or all test results must be printed out and placed in a binder. ii. All results must include the cable identification numbers, test date and times, the operator performing the test, the make and model of the testers used. iii. All results must include the setting used to test, and the from-to locations of the cable. iv. Testing documentation is the certification of the cable plant. v. The Warranty period does not begin until the testing documentation is given to CCIT. b. As -Built Documentation i. Fully documented scale drawings of the entire fiber optic and copper distribution system. Documentation shall be provided in both a hard copy binder and a soft copy on CD capable of being viewed and edited in AutoCAD. This will include building and floor layouts with workstation information outlet locations and labeling, distribution frames, cable routes, interconnect locations, intermediate and main distribution frame location, riser locations, and all other information pertinent to the installation. ii. Copies of mylars. iii. All floor plans must document all Workstation Outlet locations and number. iv. All floor plans must document all Computer Rooms, Site MDF, MDF, and IDF locations and numbers. v. All floor plans must document all horizontal pathway locations and numbers. vi. All floor plans must distinguish between UTP and fiber locations. vii. All cross-connects installed by the cabling contractor will be printed out in a spreadsheet or in an automated cable management system. viii. A spreadsheet identifying all faceplate locations by room and identifying the outlet numbers for each faceplate location. 21. Warranty a. All components used in the Category 6 cabling system shall be warranted for a period of 25 years from date of installation against defects in materials and workmanship. b. All components used in the optical fiber-based cabling system shall be warranted for a period of 25 years from date of installation against defects in materials and workmanship. c. All labor and materials shall be covered with a one-year warranty from the date of acceptance of work order. d. The warranty should cover defects in materials and workmanship. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1581 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 17 of 34 e. The contractor must cover any and all of the OEM extended warranties. f. All active equipment manufacturers must be able to replace any defective materials overnight. 22. Payment of Services a. All payment options will not be in conflict with the General Contractor’s contract or applicable County policies, ordinances, State and Federal laws. b. CCIT reserves the right to withhold final payment until receiving all As-Built documentation. c. CCIT may withhold partial final payment until approving documentation and inspection of work. 23. Definitions a. Building Wiring Infrastructure – The horizontal copper wiring between the Communications Room and the wall jack, the vertical fiber optic and/or cooper wiring between Communications Rooms and the fiber optic entrance cable. b. Card Key – Pegasys card key access locks. c. Cipher Locks – push button combination locks d. Computer Room – Room intended to house network equipment and server equipment. e. Entrance Conduit – conduit from a Building/Site MDF to the right of way. f. IDF – Intermediate Distribution Frame g. LAN – The integrated system of building wiring infrastructure and networking equipment that allows computers and telephones to communicate within a building. h. MDF – Main Distribution Frame i. Networking Equipment – The active components necessary to implement an LAN or WAN. This includes routers, switches, media converters and UPS equipment. j. Site MDF – main wiring point for a campus. k. WAN – The interconnection of multiple LANs allowing communications between multiple buildings. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1582 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 18 of 34 Collier County Information Technology Fiber Construction Standards: 24. Individual Proposals - All proposals must include all costs for the completed project to conform to the standards defined herein. Proposals will include: a. Complete breakdown of materials, fees and labor b. Completion timeframe and schedule c. Ground Penetrating Radar locates on all County property d. All engineering and design work required e. All required permits f. All materials and labor g. All required locates h. Installation of all materials including restoration of ground to original condition including topsoil, sand, concrete, or other required materials; and for disposing of surplus materials. i. Comply with all Collier Construction Standards j. All Acceptance Criteria k. Must pass Collier inspections l. Work may not be subcontracted without Collier County Information Technology’s (CCIT) express written permission 25. Planning and Design – The Contractor is responsible for all detailed planning and design. All designs and schedules must be approved by CCIT. This work will include the following: a. All Engineering b. All drawings c. Project schedule 26. Walkthroughs and Reviews a. Contractor will conduct a design review with CCIT and other County staff. b. Contractor will conduct a pre-construction walkthrough with CCIT and other County staff prior to commencing work and to site-validate design c. Contractor will conduct a post-construction walk through with CCIT and other County staff for the purpose of reviewing the workmanship and design conformance of the installation. All defects and workmanship and deviations from design will be noted and corrected by the Contractor, at their expense, prior to payment. d. Contractor will conduct a closeout and lessons learned meeting. All documentation will be submitted at this time and any defects, omissions and errors will be noted. e. ll defects, omissions and errors in documentation will be corrected by the Contractor, at their expense, prior to payment. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1583 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 19 of 34 27. Cable Diagrams - The Contractor shall provide two (2) paper copies of documentation for each fiber optic installation and one (1) digital copy of documentation in one of the following file formats: AutoCAD .dwg/.dxf, or Microsoft Visio .vsd/.vsdx. This documentation shall include: a. Fiber optic splice diagram, indicating buffer tube and strand colors that have been spliced and their cable designations using industry standard color coding scheme (TIA/EIA-598-A), for every location where a splice is enclosed underground; b. Fiber optic termination diagrams, indicating buffer tube and strand colors and type of termination, for every point where a termination has been completed; c. Layout diagram for completed installation to include: i. Cable designation using industry standard color coding scheme (TIA/EIA-598- A) ii. Locations of splice and termination points iii. Buffer tube and strand colors for the run. 28. Other Required Documentation a. Section drawings showing cross section of installation and other utilities in ROW b. GPS Coordinates - data in electronic format suitable for import into ArcGIS. To include: i. 1 meter accuracy ii. Depth readings each time the conduit changes depth iii. Location of pull boxes iv. Location of splice cases v. Linear coordinates every 100 feet or when conduit does not follow a straight path c. GIS Line shape file with NAD83 State Plane Florida East FIPS 0901(feet) d. As-Built Drawings 29. Utility Coordination a. It is anticipated that local road and utility construction projects will be in progress during the life of this Contract. The Contractor shall be required to coordinate his construction operations with those of other contractors doing work for the State, Collier County and City of Naples governments. This coordination includes on-site cooperation and scheduling of work to eliminate or minimize any rework or duplication of effort. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1584 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 20 of 34 b. The Contractor must obtain a Collier County right-of-way permit before beginning any construction activities. No shared permit is to be intended or implied with any other project or agency, and the permit that is issued shall only cover work requested by agencies of the Board of County Commissioners. c. The Contractor must be knowledgeable and adhere to State and Local statutes regarding notification before beginning any underground work, specifically including knowledge of and adherence to the Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Chapter 556, Florida Statutes. 30. Fiber Optic Cable a. Description Fiber 96 or 144 depending on job. i. The Contractor shall furnish and install fiber optic cable as described in the work request and in accordance with the requirements specified herein. ii. All fiber shall be shipped on reels of marked continuous length, and shall be provided from the same manufacturer. iii. No splices shall be permitted within the fiber jacket. iv. No point discontinuities of greater than 0.10 dB shall be permitted. v. After installation, each run of fiber optic cable shall be marked within one foot of each splice and/or termination with the location that the cable goes to. This nomenclature shall be submitted to the agency for approval prior to its use. vi. The nomenclature shall be used on the Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) sweep test results specified separately. vii. The following standards are applicable to this bid item and are hereby incorporated by reference: 1. ORGANIZATION STANDARD APPLICABILITY 2. RUS PE-90 Cable Construction 3. TIA/EIA 598B-01 Color Coding 4. TIA/EIA 472D0000 Fiber Optic Cable 5. TELCORDIA GR-20 Optical Characteristics b. Single-mode Cable i. This cable shall consist of 12, 24, 30, 36, or 48 as described in the work request, arranged in color-coded buffer tubes of six individually color coded fibers except for the 48 fiber cable which shall consist of 12 fibers per buffer. ii. When less than six buffer tubes are required for the number of fibers, polyethylene filler rods shall be used to maintain cable integrity. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1585 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 21 of 34 iii. Each buffer tube shall be filled with a non-hygroscopic gel for protection of the fibers from impact and moisture ingress. iv. Aramid strength members shall be bundled with the buffer tubes and the filler rods and the jacket shall also contain non-hygroscopic gel. v. The entire cable shall conform to RUS Specification PE-90, unless the cable manufacturer’s recommendation is more stringent. vi. The minimum bend radius of the cable shall be 20 times the cable diameter. vii. The maximum tensile strength shall be at least 2700 Newtons (600 pound force) short-term and 601 Newtons (135 pound force) long-term. viii. The exterior of the fiber optic cable jacket shall be manufactured with a color-coded stripe. The purpose of the color coding is for internal control as well as ease of identification after installation. No fiber optic cable shall be accepted that does not conform to the color coding below: 1. Collier County Traffic Operations – GREEN stripe & labeled ‘Collier County BCC Traffic’ every 3 feet. 2. Collier County Information Technology – YELLOW stripe & labeled ‘Collier County BCC IT’ every 3 feet. 3. Collier County Public Utilities – PURPLE stripe & labeled ‘Collier County BCC Public Utilities’ every 3 feet. (we do not do this anymore) ix. The fiber cable shall meet the following optical specifications: 1. Attenuation at 1310 nanometers  0.56dB/mi 2. Attenuation at 1550 nanometers  0.19 dB/mi 3. Point Discontinuity  0.10 dB 4. Core Diameter 8.3 m 5. Cladding Diameter 125.0 1.0 m 6. Core-clad Concentricity 0.8 m 7. Coating Diameter 245 10m 8. Numerical Aperture 0.13 9. Index of Refraction (1310nm) <1.47 10. Index of Refraction (1550nm) <1.47 x. All fiber optic glass shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA-492CAAA, International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Publication 60793-2, and Telcordia GR-20- CORE. xi. The operating, shipping and storage range of the cable shall be -40º F to +158º F. xii. The installation temperature range of the cable shall be -22º F to +158º F. c. Installation 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1586 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 22 of 34 i. All fiber shall be installed in underground conduit. ii. Pulling in place shall be by hand or by an approved mechanical pulling machine. If a mechanical pulling machine is used, it must be equipped with a monitored or recording tension-meter. iii. At no time shall the manufacturer’s recommended maximum pulling tension be exceeded. iv. Where pulling through pull boxes, approved pulleys and sheaves shall be used or the excess cable must be coiled in a figure eight and fed by hand. v. If sheaves are to be used, the cable should never be pulled through a radius less than the manufacturer’s minimum bending radius. vi. Fifty feet of spare fiber shall be looped neatly in all pull boxes. vii. At each termination point, thirty feet of spare fiber shall be looped neatly within the cabinet or in an adjacent pull box. This fiber is for future additions or repairs to the fiber network. d. Building Entrance Point and Inside Fiber Pathways i. A service loop of 50' will be left at every building entrance. ii. At no time shall an Outside Plant rated cable run inside a building unless it is encased in rigid metal conduit (2" EMT unless otherwise specified). e. Fire-Stopping i. All penetrations into fire-walls or core holes between floors must be properly fire-stopped in accordance with the guidelines in BICSI TDM 95 Chapter 20. Fig. 11 and must also conform to any related NEC, Federal, State and local requirements for Fire-stopping. ii. Penetrations into the surface of any Firewall or presumed Firewall should be only slightly larger than the cable or cables that will need to pass through it. This will make Fire-stopping easier and allow the wall to maintain a better overall structural integrity. iii. Proper Fire-stopping should be performed on any hole and/or penetration of a firewall or solid wall. This may include the Contractor installing Mineral Wool in the space between the sheet rock walls and then installing a sheet rock patch on both sides before installing the Fire-Stopping Material. iv. Fire-stop any transitions between floors using or not using conduit or sleeve. v. When using Fire-stopping Putty in a conduit or sleeves between floors a section of Fire-resistant Mineral Wool must be inserted to create the proper base for the putty. Making a form out of cardboard is not acceptable. vi. Fire-stopping pillows are also acceptable to seal an opening that may need to be reentered at a later time. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1587 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 23 of 34 f. Inside Fiber Pathways i. All pathways will consist of inner-duct, conduit or a combination of both. ii. If broken or split, this inner-duct shall be spliced with the proper fittings. iii. Inner-duct and fiber cable ran through Plenum airways will be Plenum rated. iv. Where it enters a junction box or slack box the inner-duct will be connected to the wall mount box with the proper fitting to securely fasten the inner-duct to the enclosure. v. Cables and inner-duct shall be rated according to TIA/EIA and NEC codes for the environment in which they are installed. vi. Support for inner-duct or conduit shall be no greater than 4' intervals. vii. All inner-duct or conduit will have a pull string provided for future use. g. Indoor Pull-points i. Pull points shall be installed or used at intervals not to exceed the manufacturer’s specifications for the cable being placed. ii. No service loops shall be left at indoor pull points. iii. Service loops shall be installed only where a cable leaves a building or is terminated. 31. Fiber Optic Cable Splicing a. General Requirements i. All fibers shall be spliced by the fusion method. ii. The Contractor shall use a fusion splice machine for this purpose. iii. The splice machine shall be equipped with a method for estimating the achieved splice loss. Either the “Local Injection Detection” or “Core Alignment Loss Estimation” system is acceptable. iv. The machine used shall be new from the factory or serviced and certified by the factory or its authorized representative within the previous six months from the commencement of its use on the project. The Contractor shall provide to the agency a letter from the manufacturer or his authorized agency certifying that this requirement is met. v. Splice loss shall not exceed a bi-directional average of 0.10 dB per splice for a complete fiber run or a maximum of 0.15 dB bi-directional average for any single splice at 1310 and 1550 nanometers. vi. At each splice location, fifty feet of fiber shall be coiled (on each side of the splice – one hundred feet in total) to allow for future access to the cable at a distance from the splice point to accommodate a van or tent for the purpose of keeping the splice machine and craft-person out of the weather. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1588 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 24 of 34 vii. When a fiber cable is accessed, only the buffer tube containing the fiber(s) to be accessed shall be opened. viii. Only the actual fiber to be accessed shall be cut. ix. If a fiber end is not to be used at the time, it shall be cut to a length equal to that of the fiber to be used and the spare neatly laid into the splice tray. x. At least one and one-half revolutions of the splice tray of fiber shall be left on each end of fiber after splicing. 32. Fiber Optic Cable Splice Materials a. At each splice point, splice organizer trays shall be provided to contain and protect the bare fibers and splices. b. Splice trays shall be easily attachable and accessible. Splice tray raceways shall include a raceway for excess fiber storage that will accommodate the minimum bend radius of single-mode fiber without causing excessive signal losses due to bending or fiber damage. c. The splice trays shall have a means to affix the buffer tube rigidly in place, and space & guides to allow “race tracking” of the fiber, and guides to locate the splice protectors. d. The splice trays shall be layered above the transition/storage compartment and shall be easily slipped into place on two studs and secured with a hold down strap. Splice trays shall have fixed rigid slots for fiber placement. e. Enclosures shall have provisions for storing fiber splices, non-spliced fiber and buffer tubes. Each tray shall be made of injection-molded plastic and have a hinged clear plastic cover for maximum fiber protection that allows for visible inspection of the fibers. The covers shall have a lock mechanism to hold them in place. f. All splices shall be protected with a heat-shrink sleeve containing a stainless steel strength rod or protective sleeve and housing. Completed splice protectors shall be held in place with RTV silicone or adhesive tape. No more than 12 splices shall be placed in one tray. g. All splice trays to be installed in surface level pull boxes h. Buffer tubes only in the patch panel tray – tray must be able to slide out, without impacting fiber, for patching. i. 100ft of slack at all splice points (50ft of slack from each side; in and out). j. Must be labeled using non-destructive tags with permanent markings. 33. Fiber Optic Cable Termination a. General Requirements 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1589 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 25 of 34 i. All terminations to fiber optic cable shall be made with type SC connectors to single fiber break-out cable. ii. Where access to a trunk fiber or local fiber cable is made, a length of single fiber break-out cable shall be spliced onto the trunk fiber by the method outlined above. iii. Nowhere shall a fiber be terminated directly. iv. Where single fiber break-out cable is used, it shall be marked within six inches of the connector with appropriate nomenclature to identify it. v. All single-mode break-out cable shall be yellow in color. vi. The Contractor shall utilize the color codes and the splice diagrams as described in the work request for the termination of all cables. vii. Termination enclosures should only contain buffer tubes; the tray must be able to slide out, without impacting fiber, for patching. viii. Termination enclosures should also be labeled with each fiber optic strand’s buffer tube and strand colors. ix. All fiber terminations will be installed in patch panels according to the following layout: 1. Terminations and splices need to be completed using industry standard color coding scheme (TIA/EIA-598-A). 2. A machine printed layout card will be attached to each patch panel indicating the layout of the fiber strands within the panel. b. Fiber Optic Connectors i. All SC type connectors shall conform to the NTT-SC and Telcordia 326 Specifications for SC connectors. ii. The connectors shall be applied by the adhesive and polish method. At least two grades of polish film shall be used and the fiber visually inspected after polishing. iii. Any marks on the fiber core or on the cladding within a core diameter from the core shall be cause for rejection and re-termination of the fiber. iv. The fiber strength member shall be affixed to the connector by crimp ring or by epoxy. If a crimp ring is used, it shall be crimped with a ratcheting tool that ensures correct crimp pressure. v. The completed termination shall exhibit a loss of no more than 0.25 dB per mated pair when tested with an OTDR and a standard test cable. This requirement applies equally to field terminations and factory terminated pigtails. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1590 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 26 of 34 34. Method of Measurement a. The unit price per foot of cable furnished and installed shall include furnishing all material, hardware and labor necessary to make a complete and accepted installation as described in the work request. All cable ties, cable clamps and terminal connectors shall be included under this item. b. Payment for fiber optic cable will be based upon the length installed between cable terminations, as determined by the manufacturer’s sequential markings printed on the cable jacket, recorded to the nearest foot. 35. Fiber Optic Communication Cable Tests a. Pre-installation Test i. The Contractor shall test all fiber optic cable prior to installation. ii. Cable delivered to the job site shall be tested on the reels prior to installation. iii. This test shall consist of a single direction sweep of each individual fiber with an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) that has been calibrated for the index of refraction of the fiber to be tested. iv. Verification of the fiber length and attenuation shall be made. v. Attenuation shall not exceed 0.56 dB/mile at 1310nm and 0.19 dB/mile at 1550nm. vi. No discontinuities greater than 0.1 dB over a distance of less than 300 feet shall be allowed. vii. If the cable fails to meet these requirements, the Contractor shall replace the entire reel at no additional cost. viii. Print-outs of the OTDR trace with the identification of the fiber and the attenuation and length noted on the print-out shall be provided. ix. This test may be eliminated at the Contractor’s option if the manufacturer has done these tests at the factory and after the cable is placed on the reel and provides a typical OTDR trace together with a table of all attenuations and lengths of each fiber on a reel. x. If the Contractor elects to forgo this test, it shall in no way relieve him of the obligation to replace any cable that, after installation and testing, proves not to meet the specifications. xi. Cable replacement shall be done at no additional cost to the Collier County. b. Post-installation Test i. After installation, the Contractor shall test all fibers from both ends with an OTDR. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1591 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 27 of 34 ii. Those fibers that are not terminated at the time shall be tested using a bare fiber adapter. iii. A pair of traces for each fiber shall be placed in a notebook and presented to CCIT. iv. A loss table shall be included with each trace showing each splice or termination. v. No active devices shall be connected for this test and all SC connectors shall be capped. vi. The Contractor shall investigate any discontinuities greater than 0.20 dB/300 feet and repair them or replace the cable section at no additional cost to the agency. vii. The required traces shall also be delivered on CD or DVD. All traces must be arranged in logical directories with a printed list of directories and filenames referenced to the fiber location provided. The Contractor shall provide (at no additional compensation) licensed software compatible with Microsoft Windows Operating Systems (latest versions) to allow viewing and printing of the traces. 36. Conduit a. Exterior applications - 2 inch diameter HDPE, orange. All joints are to be glued using appropriate adhesive, using industry standard couplers, or be fused. b. Interior applications – 2 inch EMT. All joints are to use industry standard connectors. c. All unused conduits in outdoor pull boxes will be properly plugged with removable watertight plugs. d. Pull strings will be installed in all conduit for future use. 37. Conduit Installation by Trench or Directional Bore a. All new conduits connecting to existing conduit shall be of the identical size as the existing conduit. b. No reducing couplings or reduction in the inside diameter of conduit shall be permitted. c. Any conduit installed which is new from end to end (i.e. not coupled to an existing conduit), shall be a two-inch conduit. d. Rigid couplings shall be used to join two or more conduits. Adhesive appropriate for and recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit may be used to assure a complete and durable seal at the coupling points. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1592 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 28 of 34 e. At no time shall tape or any other adhesive be used in place of rigid couplings when two or more conduits are joined together. f. At the agency’s request, the contractor shall excavate a window at any point along a conduit trench so that couplings may be inspected. g. All new conduit installed and all existing conduit used under this Contract shall be blown and/or rodded clean to the satisfaction of the contracting agency prior to the installation of any cable or wire in that conduit. h. All underground conduit installed by open trenching and directional bore methods shall be identified by mule tape or a 12-gauge copper wire (tracer wire) installed in the conduit. Wire is preferred. i. The mule tape or wire shall also be installed in all existing conduit used on this project. j. The tape or wire shall be installed for the entire length of conduit(s). k. The tape shall contain a means of being located by a metallic cable detector. l. Identification tape shall also be installed above conduit installed by open trenching. m. Identification tape shall be colored in accordance with American Public Works Association orange for communications and shall be continuously emblazoned with black non-fading ink with the message “CAUTION FIBER OPTIC” in minimum one- inch high block letters. n. One length of identification tape shall be installed for all parallel conduits within one foot of each other; parallel conduits more than one foot apart shall have two or more identification tapes as needed. o. The identification tape shall be continuous from conduit termination point to termination point and shall enter pull boxes with the conduit. For new conduit, the identification tape shall be at a depth of one foot above the installed conduit. p. Sidewalk restoration shall be full width by section for all sidewalks five feet wide or narrower. For sidewalks eight feet or wider, the restoration may be in half -width sections or to the nearest existing seam or joint as approved by the agency’s Engineer. Sidewalks between five and eight feet wide may be replaced to the nearest seam or joint only if existing and approved by the agency’s Engineer. q. Aesthetic sidewalk and/or pavement (brick, brick paver, paver block, colored concrete, granite, slate, etc.) shall be replaced entirely and the Contractor shall match color and texture in accordance with the local municipality’s or owner’s requirements. r. Underground conduit shall generally be installed in non-pavement areas if possible. The Contractor shall install underground conduit in the grass utility strip if such a strip is available. s. Conduit installation across driveways shall be accomplished by directional bore. t. Under no circumstances shall the open trench exceed three feet in width. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1593 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 29 of 34 u. All underground conduit must be installed no less than 24-30 inches below the surface. v. Must meet PUD construction standards and inspections – see Collier County Public Utilities Engineering Standards – section 1.1.2.3 w. Road crossings should be done no closer than 100 feet from an intersection. 38. Conduit Installation into Existing Pull Boxes a. All conduit, required as described in the work request, installed into existing pull boxes shall be installed in accordance with the requirements for conduit installation into new pull boxes. b. The Contractor shall maintain the existing pull box and shall restore the surrounding area to a condition equivalent to that prior to when work began. c. The Contractor shall immediately notify the agency if the Contractor determines that the existing pull box is unacceptable for reuse. d. If the existing pull box needs to be temporarily removed or otherwise disturbed for the new conduit installation, new gravel shall be installed in the base of the reinstalled existing pull box as required for new pull boxes. 39. Removal of Existing Pull Box and Installing of New Pull Box a. Where described in the work request or directed by the agency, the Contractor shall remove existing pull boxes and furnish and install new pull boxes such that the completed installation is in accordance with details specified herein. b. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the pull box cover is flush with the finished grade or sidewalk. An even layer of gravel must be installed in the bottom of all outdoor pull boxes. c. At no time should the Contractor install pull boxes in roadways, driveways, parking areas, ditches or public sidewalk curb ramps. d. For all types of existing pull boxes, the Contractor shall excavate and remove the existing pull box and lid, adjust the pull box footing, adjust conduit terminations, add gravel, furnish and install a new pull box and lid and restore the surrounding grade surface. e. The Contractor shall furnish and install all materials necessary to complete this work. 40. Pull and Junction Boxes a. The fiber optic splice enclosures shall be capable of accommodating splice organizers to facilitate fiber management and shall accept mechanical, single fiber fusion splices. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1594 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 30 of 34 b. The splice enclosure shall provide fiber optic cable penetration end caps on one end, to accommodate at least two trunk fiber optic cables and two branch fiber optic cables. c. Water blocking techniques shall be used to ensure that the enclosure and cable entry locations do not leak when immersed in 19 feet of water for 30 days. d. The enclosure end caps should be factory drilled to the proper diameter to accept and seal the fiber optic cable entry(ies). e. Cable entry locations shall accommodate an assortment of fiber optic cable outer diameters ranging from 0.45 inches to 0.55 inches (+10 percent) without jeopardizing its waterproof characteristics. f. Hinged splice enclosures with stainless steel latching devices shall be utilized. g. All fiber optic splice enclosures shall meet the requirements of Telcordia Technologies GR-711-CORE and shall comply with all applicable NEC requirements. h. Splice enclosures may encounter high water table conditions. Splice enclosures shall be non-filled (no encapsulate), airtight and prevent water intrusion, able to accommodate pressurization, and have the capability to be reentered without requiring specialized tools or equipment. i. Splice enclosures shall also be supplied with all hardware necessary to provide solid mounting to the wall of the pull box in which it is to be housed. j. All enclosures (both underground and aboveground) and associated facilities provided under this Contract shall include a quality assurance / quality control inspection for materials, workmanship and compliance of the product to meet these specifications. k. The Contractor shall provide to the agency an executed Certificate of Compliance from the manufacturer indicating that the splice enclosures meet the requirements included herein. l. All splice enclosures must employ a complete fiber management system consisting of splice trays and a stress relief system. m. Each enclosure shall be designed to accommodate future expansion and contain modular splice organizers / trays capable of handling splices in a neat and distinguishable fashion. n. Splicing capacity for 100 percent expansion shall be provided. o. Trays shall be easily attachable and accessible. p. Tray raceways shall include a raceway for excess fiber storage that accommodates the minimum bend radius of single-mode fiber without causing excessive signal losses due to bending or fiber damage. q. Splice enclosures shall have provisions for storing fiber splices and non-spliced fiber / buffer tubes. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1595 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 31 of 34 41. Communications Pull Box a. Requirements b. Pull boxes used for communications cable shall be, at minimum, sufficient to house the communication cable(s) without bending the cable(s) to less than 20 times the outside diameter(s) or as shown on the Plans (or as described in the work request). c. The minimum allowable inside dimensions for the communications pull box are 24 inches wide by 36 inches long. d. All pull boxes supplied shall have the word “COMMUNICATIONS” integrally cast into the covers. e. All pull boxes in the public right-of-way must be registered on the Florida Department of Transportation’s Qualified Products List (QPL). f. The maximum distance between pull boxes is 1000 feet, or less, if specified by the contracting agency. g. Where underground conduit is covered by a paved roadway or driveway, a pull box is required within 20 feet of each side of the paved area. h. A pull box is required at the apex of any point where underground conduit turns in a 90 degree radius, or where two or more conduits meet at a “T” junction. i. The Contractor shall be responsible for properly sizing each pull box to ensure that all communications cable, including spare cable, is safely stored without violating the recommended bending radius of the communications cable. 42. Method of Measurement - The unit price per communications pull box furnished and installed shall include furnishing all material, hardware and labor necessary to make a complete and accepted installation. 43. Fiber Optic Cable Markers a. Fiber optic cable markers must be supplied by the Contractor. b. Markers are to be placed at all pull boxes. c. Markers are to be made of composite reinforced thermoplastic, and be white and orange in color. d. Markers should be a minimum of 62 inches (1575 mm) long, 3 inches (75 mm) wide, and stamped with ‘CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE’ on the front and back of the marker. e. Installation should be adequate so that marker cannot be pulled out or removed manually. f. The marker should self erect after vehicle impact. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1596 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 32 of 34 g. Install a marker at each point along the fiber optic cable path where a 45-degree or greater change in direction occurs. h. Install markers a maximum of 24 inches (600 mm) lateral displacement from the actual placement of the conduit and fiber optic cabling. i. Install markers no later than 3 days following the installation of conduit to contain fiber optic cables, or of direct buried fiber optic cables. j. Safeguard the conduit and cables during the installation of the markers. k. Remove and replace any conduit or cables that are damaged during marker installation at no additional cost to contract. 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1597 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 33 of 34 44. Equipment Warranty a. Until final acceptance, the Contractor shall be responsible for the function and operation of each component proposed. b. The Contractor’s responsibility includes, but is not limited to, all pickup and delivery of defective, repaired or replacement components. c. Each component that is a vendor-supplied component and is covered wholly or partially by a manufacturer’s warranty shall include the provision that the warranty is subject to transfer to the maintaining agency as named by the Department prior to final acceptance of the Contract. d. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the vendor or manufacturer supplying the component and providing the equipment warranty recognizes the Department’s designee as the original purchaser and owner of the component. 45. Service Maintenance Contract a. The Contractor shall provide a service maintenance contract that completely covers each component installed as shown on the plans (or as part of the work request). b. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the supplier of the service maintenance contract recognizes the Department’s designee as the original purchaser and owner of the component as new. c. The Contractor shall submit to the agency for approval copies of the proposed service maintenance contract prior to the commencement of testing. d. The service maintenance contract shall be provided by the Contractor for a period of one calendar year to begin not more than 15 days prior to final acceptance of the project by the Department. e. The service maintenance contract shall cover all parts, labor and other costs associated with the diagnosis, adjustment, removal, transportation, repair and reinstallation of any component. f. The service maintenance contract shall provide for complete on-site service with a maximum on-site response time of one working day after request for service. g. Payment to the Contractor for the service maintenance contract shall be included in the unit bid price for the units covered by the service maintenance contract and no additional compensation will be provided by the Department. 46. Payment of Services a. See Payment #22 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1598 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Collier County Information Technology Vertical and Fiber Construction Standards 14 February 2014 Page 34 of 34 47. Applicable Standards a. TIA/EIA 455-34 Attenuation b. TIA/EIA 455-107 Return Loss c. TIA/EIA 455-21 Durability d. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568 -- Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling e. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements f. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components g. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 -- Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard h. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A -- Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces i. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) -- The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings j. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607(A) -- Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications k. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 -- Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant l. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A -- Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant m. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758(A) -- Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard n. Install cabling in accordance with the most recent edition of: i. BICSI -- Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual ii. BICSI -- Cabling Installation Manual iii. BICSI -- LAN Design Manual iv. BICSI – Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual v. Federal, state, and local codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances governing the work, are as fully part of the specifications as if herein repeated or hereto attached. If the contractor should note items in the drawings or the specifications, construction of which would be code violations, promptly call them to the attention of the owner's representative in writing. Where the requirements of other sections of the specifications are more stringent than applicable codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances, the specifications shall apply. Approvals: Approved by _________ Approved by _________ Approved by _________ Approved by _________ Approved by _________ 16.E.2.g Packet Pg. 1599 Attachment: IT Construction Standards Vers 5-17-17 (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1600 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1601 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1602 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1603 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1604 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1605 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1606 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1607 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1608 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1609 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1610 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1611 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1612 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1613 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1614 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1615 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1616 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1617 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1618 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.h Packet Pg. 1619 Attachment: 19-7564 Aztek Communication of South Florida_Contract_VendorSigned (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and 16.E.2.iPacket Pg. 1620Attachment: 19-7564 NORA (8477 : Recommendation to award ITB #19-7564 Data and Telecommunications Wiring Services to Aztek     TIA-568-C.2 August 2009 Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards ANSI/TIA-568-C.2-2009 APPROVED: AUGUST 11, 2009 NOTICE TIA Engineering Standards and Publications are designed to serve the public interest through eliminating misunderstandings between manufacturers and purchasers, facilitating interchangeability and improvement of products, and assisting the purchaser in selecting and obtaining with minimum delay the proper product for their particular need. The existence of such Standards and Publications shall not in any respect preclude any member or non-member of TIA from manufacturing or selling products not conforming to such Standards and Publications. Neither shall the existence of such Standards and Publications preclude their voluntary use by Non-TIA members, either domestically or internationally. Standards and Publications are adopted by TIA in accordance with the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) patent policy. By such action, TIA does not assume any liability to any patent owner, nor does it assume any obligation whatever to parties adopting the Standard or Publication. This Standard does not purport to address all safety problems associated with its use or all applicable regulatory requirements. It is the responsibility of the user of this Standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations before its use. (From Standards Proposal No. 3-4426-RV3-B-2, formulated under the cognizance of the TIA TR-42 User Premises Telecommunications Cabling Requirements, TR-42.7 Subcommittee on Telecommunications Copper Cabling Systems.) Published by ©TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION Standards and Technology Department 2500 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22201 U.S.A. PRICE: Please refer to current Catalog of TIA TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION STANDARDS AND ENGINEERING PUBLICATIONS or call IHS, USA and Canada (1-877-413-5187) International (303-397-2896) or search online at http://www.tiaonline.org/standards/catalog/ All rights reserved Printed in U.S.A. NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT This document is copyrighted by the TIA. Reproduction of these documents either in hard copy or soft copy (including posting on the web) is prohibited without copyright permission. For copyright permission to reproduce portions of this document, please contact TIA Standards Department or go to the TIA website (www.tiaonline.org) for details on how to request permission. Details are located at: http://www.tiaonline.org/standards/catalog/info.cfm#copyright OR Telecommunications Industry Association Standards & Technology Department 2500 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 300 Arlington, VA 22201 USA +1(703)907-7700 Organizations may obtain permission to reproduce a limited number of copies by entering into a license agreement. For information, contact: IHS 15 Inverness Way East Englewood, CO 80112-5704 or call U.S.A. and Canada (1-800-525-7052) International (303-790-0600) NOTICE OF DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The document to which this Notice is affixed (the “Document”) has been prepared by one or more Engineering Committees or Formulating Groups of the Telecommunications Industry Association (“TIA”). TIA is not the author of the Document contents, but publishes and claims copyright to the Document pursuant to licenses and permission granted by the authors of the contents. TIA Engineering Committees and Formulating Groups are expected to conduct their affairs in accordance with the TIA Engineering Manual (“Manual”), the current and predecessor versions of which are available at http://www.tiaonline.org/standards/procedures/manuals/TIA’s function is to administer the process, but not the content, of document preparation in accordance with the Manual and, when appropriate, the policies and procedures of the American National Standards Institute (“ANSI”). TIA does not evaluate, test, verify or investigate the information, accuracy, soundness, or credibility of the contents of the Document. In publishing the Document, TIA disclaims any undertaking to perform any duty owed to or for anyone. If the Document is identified or marked as a project number (PN) document, or as a standards proposal (SP) document, persons or parties reading or in any way interested in the Document are cautioned that: (a) the Document is a proposal; (b) there is no assurance that the Document will be approved by any Committee of TIA or any other body in its present or any other form; (c) the Document may be amended, modified or changed in the standards development or any editing process. The use or practice of contents of this Document may involve the use of intellectual property rights (“IPR”), including pending or issued patents, or copyrights, owned by one or more parties. TIA makes no search or investigation for IPR. When IPR consisting of patents and published pending patent applications are claimed and called to TIA’s attention, a statement from the holder thereof is requested, all in accordance with the Manual. TIA takes no position with reference to, and disclaims any obligation to investigate or inquire into, the scope or validity of any claims of IPR. TIA will neither be a party to discussions of any licensing terms or conditions, which are instead left to the parties involved, nor will TIA opine or judge whether proposed licensing terms or conditions are reasonable or non-discriminatory. TIA does not warrant or represent that procedures or practices suggested or provided in the Manual have been complied with as respects the Document or its contents. If the Document contains one or more Normative References to a document published by another organization (“other SSO”) engaged in the formulation, development or publication of standards (whether designated as a standard, specification, recommendation or otherwise), whether such reference consists of mandatory, alternate or optional elements (as defined in the TIA Engineering Manual, 4th edition) then (i) TIA disclaims any duty or obligation to search or investigate the records of any other SSO for IPR or letters of assurance relating to any such Normative Reference; (ii) TIA’s policy of encouragement of voluntary disclosure (see Engineering Manual Section 6.5.1) of Essential Patent(s) and published pending patent applications shall apply; and (iii) Information as to claims of IPR in the records or publications of the other SSO shall not constitute identification to TIA of a claim of Essential Patent(s) or published pending patent applications. TIA does not enforce or monitor compliance with the contents of the Document. TIA does not certify, inspect, test or otherwise investigate products, designs or services or any claims of compliance with the contents of the Document. ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE DISCLAIMED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES CONCERNING THE ACCURACY OF THE CONTENTS, ITS FITNESS OR APPROPRIATENESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, ITS MERCHANTABILITY AND ITS NONINFRINGEMENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY’S INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. TIA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE CONTENTS AND MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES REGARDING THE CONTENT’S COMPLIANCE WITH ANY APPLICABLE STATUTE, RULE OR REGULATION, OR THE SAFETY OR HEALTH EFFECTS OF THE CONTENTS OR ANY PRODUCT OR SERVICE REFERRED TO IN THE DOCUMENT OR PRODUCED OR RENDERED TO COMPLY WITH THE CONTENTS. TIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY AND ALL DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO ANY USE OF THE CONTENTS CONTAINED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY AND ALL INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, LITIGATION, OR THE LIKE), WHETHER BASED UPON BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE FOREGOING NEGATION OF DAMAGES IS A FUNDAMENTAL ELEMENT OF THE USE OF THE CONTENTS HEREOF, AND THESE CONTENTS WOULD NOT BE PUBLISHED BY TIA WITHOUT SUCH LIMITATIONS. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 i Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................................... 1 2 NORMATIVE AND INFORMATIVE REFERENCES ............................................................................... 1 3 DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS, UNITS OF MEASURE ...................................... 3 3.1 General............................................................................................................................................. 3 3.2 Definitions ........................................................................................................................................ 3 3.3 Acronyms and abbreviations ............................................................................................................ 5 3.4 Units of measure .............................................................................................................................. 5 3.5 Variables .......................................................................................................................................... 6 4 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 7 4.1 Backward compatibility and interoperability ..................................................................................... 7 4.2 Recognized categories..................................................................................................................... 7 5 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 8 5.1 Channel mechanical performance ................................................................................................... 8 5.2 Permanent link mechanical performance......................................................................................... 8 5.3 Horizontal cable mechanical performance ....................................................................................... 8 5.3.1 Insulated conductor....................................................................................................................... 8 5.3.2 Pair assembly ............................................................................................................................... 8 5.3.3 Insulated conductor color code ..................................................................................................... 8 5.3.4 Cable diameter .............................................................................................................................. 9 5.3.5 Breaking strength .......................................................................................................................... 9 5.3.6 Cold bend radius ........................................................................................................................... 9 5.3.7 Performance marking ................................................................................................................... 9 5.3.8 Core wrap ..................................................................................................................................... 9 5.3.9 Core shield (screened only) .......................................................................................................... 9 5.3.10 Dielectric strength (screened only) ............................................................................................... 9 5.4 Bundled and hybrid cable mechanical performance ........................................................................ 9 5.5 Cord cable mechanical performance ............................................................................................. 10 5.5.1 General ....................................................................................................................................... 10 5.5.2 Cord cable flex life (screened only) ............................................................................................ 10 5.6 Backbone cable mechanical performance ..................................................................................... 10 5.6.1 Insulated conductor..................................................................................................................... 10 5.6.2 Pair assembly ............................................................................................................................. 10 5.6.3 Insulated conductor color code ................................................................................................... 10 5.6.4 Core assembly ............................................................................................................................ 11 5.6.5 Core shield .................................................................................................................................. 11 5.6.6 Jacket .......................................................................................................................................... 11 5.6.7 Performance marking ................................................................................................................. 11 5.6.8 Dielectric strength (screened only) ............................................................................................. 11 5.6.9 Core shield resistance ................................................................................................................ 11 5.7 Connecting hardware mechanical performance ............................................................................ 11 5.7.1 Environmental compatibility ........................................................................................................ 11 5.7.2 Mounting ..................................................................................................................................... 11 5.7.3 Mechanical termination density .................................................................................................. 12 5.7.4 Design ......................................................................................................................................... 12 5.7.5 Work area telecommunications outlet/connector ........................................................................ 13 5.7.6 Performance marking ................................................................................................................. 14 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 ii 5.7.7 Reliability ..................................................................................................................................... 14 5.7.8 Shield mating interface (screened only) ..................................................................................... 14 5.7.9 Shield continuity (screened only) ................................................................................................ 15 5.8 Cords and jumpers mechanical performance ................................................................................ 15 5.8.1 Insulated conductor..................................................................................................................... 15 5.8.2 Insulated conductor color codes ................................................................................................. 15 6 TRANSMISSION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 16 6.1 General........................................................................................................................................... 16 6.1.1 Return loss .................................................................................................................................. 16 6.1.2 Insertion loss ............................................................................................................................... 16 6.1.3 NEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 16 6.1.4 PSNEXT loss .............................................................................................................................. 16 6.1.5 FEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 16 6.1.6 ACRF .......................................................................................................................................... 17 6.1.7 PSACRF ..................................................................................................................................... 17 6.1.8 TCL ............................................................................................................................................. 17 6.1.9 ELTCTL ....................................................................................................................................... 18 6.1.10 Coupling attenuation ................................................................................................................... 18 6.1.11 Propagation delay ....................................................................................................................... 18 6.1.12 Propagation delay skew .............................................................................................................. 18 6.1.13 PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 19 6.1.14 Average PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................. 19 6.1.15 PSAFEXT loss (connecting hardware only) ............................................................................... 20 6.1.16 PSAACRF ................................................................................................................................... 20 6.1.17 Average PSAACRF..................................................................................................................... 21 6.2 Channel transmission performance ............................................................................................... 22 6.2.1 DC loop resistance...................................................................................................................... 22 6.2.2 DC resistance unbalance ............................................................................................................ 22 6.2.3 Mutual capacitance ..................................................................................................................... 22 6.2.4 Capacitance unbalance: pair-to-ground ..................................................................................... 22 6.2.5 Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) ........................................................ 23 6.2.6 Return loss .................................................................................................................................. 23 6.2.7 Insertion loss ............................................................................................................................... 24 6.2.8 NEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 26 6.2.9 PSNEXT loss .............................................................................................................................. 28 6.2.10 FEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 29 6.2.11 ACRF .......................................................................................................................................... 29 6.2.12 PSFEXT loss ............................................................................................................................... 30 6.2.13 PSACRF ..................................................................................................................................... 30 6.2.14 TCL ............................................................................................................................................. 31 6.2.15 TCTL ........................................................................................................................................... 32 6.2.16 ELTCTL ....................................................................................................................................... 32 6.2.17 Coupling attenuation (screened only) ......................................................................................... 32 6.2.18 Propagation delay ....................................................................................................................... 33 6.2.19 Propagation delay skew .............................................................................................................. 33 6.2.20 ANEXT loss ................................................................................................................................. 33 6.2.21 PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 34 6.2.22 Average PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................. 36 6.2.23 AFEXT loss ................................................................................................................................. 37 6.2.24 PSAFEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 37 6.2.25 PSAACRF ................................................................................................................................... 38 6.2.26 Average PSAACRF..................................................................................................................... 39 6.3 Permanent link transmission performance ..................................................................................... 40 6.3.1 DC loop resistance...................................................................................................................... 40 6.3.2 DC resistance unbalance ............................................................................................................ 40 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 iii 6.3.3 Mutual capacitance ..................................................................................................................... 40 6.3.4 Capacitance unbalance: pair-to-ground ..................................................................................... 40 6.3.5 Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) ........................................................ 40 6.3.6 Return loss .................................................................................................................................. 41 6.3.7 Insertion loss ............................................................................................................................... 42 6.3.8 NEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 44 6.3.9 PSNEXT loss .............................................................................................................................. 46 6.3.10 FEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 47 6.3.11 ACRF .......................................................................................................................................... 48 6.3.12 PSFEXT loss ............................................................................................................................... 49 6.3.13 PSACRF ..................................................................................................................................... 49 6.3.14 TCL ............................................................................................................................................. 50 6.3.15 TCTL ........................................................................................................................................... 50 6.3.16 ELTCTL ....................................................................................................................................... 50 6.3.17 Coupling attenuation (screened only) ......................................................................................... 50 6.3.18 Propagation delay ....................................................................................................................... 50 6.3.19 Propagation delay skew .............................................................................................................. 51 6.3.20 ANEXT loss ................................................................................................................................. 52 6.3.21 PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 52 6.3.22 Average PSANEXT Loss ............................................................................................................ 54 6.3.23 AFEXT loss ................................................................................................................................. 55 6.3.24 PSAFEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 55 6.3.25 PSAACRF ................................................................................................................................... 56 6.3.26 Average PSAACRF loss ............................................................................................................. 57 6.4 Horizontal cable transmission performance ................................................................................... 58 6.4.1 DC resistance ............................................................................................................................. 58 6.4.2 DC resistance unbalance ............................................................................................................ 58 6.4.3 Mutual capacitance ..................................................................................................................... 58 6.4.4 Capacitance unbalance: pair-to-ground ..................................................................................... 58 6.4.5 Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) ........................................................ 58 6.4.6 Return loss .................................................................................................................................. 60 6.4.7 Insertion loss ............................................................................................................................... 61 6.4.8 NEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 63 6.4.9 PSNEXT loss .............................................................................................................................. 64 6.4.10 FEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 65 6.4.11 ACRF .......................................................................................................................................... 65 6.4.12 PSFEXT loss ............................................................................................................................... 66 6.4.13 PSACRF ..................................................................................................................................... 66 6.4.14 TCL ............................................................................................................................................. 67 6.4.15 TCTL ........................................................................................................................................... 68 6.4.16 ELTCTL ....................................................................................................................................... 68 6.4.17 Coupling attenuation (screened only) ......................................................................................... 69 6.4.18 Propagation delay ....................................................................................................................... 70 6.4.19 Propagation delay skew .............................................................................................................. 70 6.4.20 Surface transfer impedance (screened only) .............................................................................. 71 6.4.21 ANEXT loss ................................................................................................................................. 71 6.4.22 PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 71 6.4.23 Average PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................. 72 6.4.24 AFEXT loss ................................................................................................................................. 72 6.4.25 PSAFEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 72 6.4.26 PSAACRF ................................................................................................................................... 72 6.4.27 Average PSAACRF..................................................................................................................... 73 6.5 Bundled and hybrid cable transmission performance .................................................................... 73 6.5.1 PSNEXT loss .............................................................................................................................. 73 6.5.2 PSNEXT loss from internal and external pairs (category 6 cables only) .................................... 73 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 iv 6.6 Cord cable ...................................................................................................................................... 74 6.6.1 DC resistance ............................................................................................................................. 74 6.6.2 Return loss .................................................................................................................................. 74 6.6.3 Insertion loss ............................................................................................................................... 75 6.7 Backbone cable transmission performance ................................................................................... 76 6.7.1 Insertion loss ............................................................................................................................... 76 6.7.2 NEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 76 6.7.3 PSNEXT loss .............................................................................................................................. 78 6.7.4 ACRF .......................................................................................................................................... 79 6.7.5 PSACRF ..................................................................................................................................... 81 6.7.6 Propagation delay ....................................................................................................................... 82 6.7.7 Propagation delay skew .............................................................................................................. 82 6.8 Connecting hardware transmission performance .......................................................................... 83 6.8.1 DC resistance ............................................................................................................................. 83 6.8.2 DC resistance unbalance ............................................................................................................ 84 6.8.3 Mutual capacitance ..................................................................................................................... 84 6.8.4 Capacitance unbalance: pair-to-ground ..................................................................................... 84 6.8.5 Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) ........................................................ 84 6.8.6 Return loss .................................................................................................................................. 85 6.8.7 Insertion loss ............................................................................................................................... 86 6.8.8 NEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 87 6.8.9 PSNEXT loss .............................................................................................................................. 88 6.8.10 FEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 89 6.8.11 ACRF .......................................................................................................................................... 90 6.8.12 PSFEXT loss ............................................................................................................................... 90 6.8.13 PSACRF ..................................................................................................................................... 90 6.8.14 TCL ............................................................................................................................................. 91 6.8.15 TCTL ........................................................................................................................................... 92 6.8.16 ELTCTL ....................................................................................................................................... 92 6.8.17 Coupling attenuation (screened only) ......................................................................................... 93 6.8.18 Propagation delay ....................................................................................................................... 93 6.8.19 Propagation delay skew .............................................................................................................. 93 6.8.20 Shield transfer impedance (screened only) ................................................................................ 93 6.8.21 ANEXT loss ................................................................................................................................. 94 6.8.22 PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 94 6.8.23 Average PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................. 94 6.8.24 AFEXT loss ................................................................................................................................. 94 6.8.25 PSAFEXT loss ............................................................................................................................ 95 6.8.26 PSAACRF ................................................................................................................................... 95 6.8.27 Average PSAACRF..................................................................................................................... 95 6.9 Cords and jumpers transmission performance .............................................................................. 95 6.9.1 Return loss .................................................................................................................................. 96 6.9.2 NEXT loss ................................................................................................................................... 97 Annex A (normative) - Reliability testing of connecting hardware ......................................................... 100 A.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 100 A.2 Solderless connections ................................................................................................................ 100 A.3 Modular plugs and jacks .............................................................................................................. 101 A.4 Other connecting hardware .......................................................................................................... 102 A.5 Informative examples of referenced test schedules .................................................................... 103 A.5.1 General ..................................................................................................................................... 103 A.5.2 Non-accessible IDC, IEC 60352-3 ............................................................................................ 104 A.5.3 Modular plug and jack, IEC 60603-7 series .............................................................................. 105 Annex B (normative) - Measurement requirements ............................................................................... 106 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 v B.1 General test configuration ............................................................................................................ 106 B.2 Balun requirements ...................................................................................................................... 106 B.3 Ground plane requirements ......................................................................................................... 108 B.4 Network analyzer requirements ................................................................................................... 109 B.5 Measurement points and spacing ................................................................................................ 109 B.6 Impedance matching terminations ............................................................................................... 109 B.6.1 Balun terminations .................................................................................................................... 109 B.6.2 Resistor terminations ................................................................................................................ 109 B.6.3 Termination performance at the calibration plane .................................................................... 110 B.7 General calibration plane ............................................................................................................. 110 B.7.1 Calibration references ............................................................................................................... 111 B.7.1.1 100 W reference load measurement procedure .................................................................... 111 B.7.1.2 100 W reference load return loss requirement ....................................................................... 112 B.7.2 Typical test equipment performance parameters ..................................................................... 112 Annex C (normative) - Cabling and component test procedures ........................................................... 113 C.1 Measurement test setup and apparatus ...................................................................................... 113 C.1.1 Interconnections between the device under test (DUT) and the calibration plane ................... 113 C.1.1.1 Impedance matched test leads.............................................................................................. 113 C.1.1.1.1 Individual twisted-pair test leads ........................................................................................ 114 C.1.1.1.2 Test leads as part of cables ............................................................................................... 114 C.1.1.2 Interconnection return loss requirements .............................................................................. 114 C.1.2 Calibration methods .................................................................................................................. 114 C.1.2.1 Two-port calibration of the test system .................................................................................. 114 C.1.2.2 One-port calibration of the test system .................................................................................. 114 C.2 Testing of cabling ......................................................................................................................... 115 C.2.1 Cabling DC resistance .............................................................................................................. 115 C.2.2 Return loss of channels and permanent links ........................................................................... 115 C.2.2.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link return loss ............................................... 115 C.2.2.2 Measurement of channel and permanent link return loss ..................................................... 116 C.2.3 Insertion loss of channels and permanent links ........................................................................ 116 C.2.3.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link insertion loss .......................................... 116 C.2.3.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link insertion loss ...................................................... 116 C.2.3.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link insertion loss ................................................. 117 C.2.4 NEXT loss of channels and permanent links ............................................................................ 117 C.2.4.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link NEXT loss .............................................. 117 C.2.4.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link NEXT loss .......................................................... 117 C.2.4.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link NEXT loss ..................................................... 117 C.2.5 FEXT loss of channels and permanent links ............................................................................ 117 C.2.5.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss ............................................... 117 C.2.5.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss .......................................................... 117 C.2.5.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link FEXT loss ..................................................... 118 C.2.6 Cabling ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss laboratory measurement procedures ........................... 118 C.2.6.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link ANEXT loss ............................................ 118 C.2.6.1.1 Termination of pairs ............................................................................................................ 118 C.2.6.1.2 Cabling construction ........................................................................................................... 118 C.2.6.1.3 Determining number of disturbing components ................................................................. 119 C.2.6.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link ANEXT loss or AFEXT loss ............................... 119 C.2.6.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link ANEXT loss or AFEXT loss .......................... 120 C.2.7 ACRF and FEXT loss of channels and permanent links .......................................................... 121 C.2.7.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss ............................................... 121 C.2.7.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss .......................................................... 121 C.2.7.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link FEXT loss ..................................................... 121 C.2.8 TCL of channels ........................................................................................................................ 122 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 vi C.2.8.1 Test configuration of channel TCL......................................................................................... 122 C.2.8.2 Calibration of channel TCL .................................................................................................... 123 C.2.8.3 Measurement of channel TCL ............................................................................................... 124 C.2.9 TCTL of channels...................................................................................................................... 125 C.2.9.1 Test configuration of channel TCTL ...................................................................................... 125 C.2.9.2 Calibration of channel TCTL .................................................................................................. 125 C.2.9.3 Measurement of channel TCTL ............................................................................................. 126 C.3 Cable test procedures .................................................................................................................. 126 C.3.1 Cable measurement precautions .............................................................................................. 126 C.3.2 Cable measurement configurations .......................................................................................... 126 C.3.2.1 Configuration for insertion loss, FEXT loss, AFEXT loss, and propagation delay measurements of cable ............................................................................................................................. 126 C.3.2.2 Configuration for TCL measurements of cable ...................................................................... 126 C.3.2.3 Configuration for TCTL measurements of cable ................................................................... 126 C.3.3 Calibration of cable measurements .......................................................................................... 127 C.3.4 Return loss of cable .................................................................................................................. 127 C.3.4.1 Test configuration of cable return loss .................................................................................. 127 C.3.4.2 Calibration of cable return loss .............................................................................................. 127 C.3.4.3 Measurement of cable return loss ......................................................................................... 127 C.3.5 Insertion loss of cable ............................................................................................................... 127 C.3.5.1 Test configuration for cable insertion loss ............................................................................. 127 C.3.5.2 Calibration of cable insertion loss .......................................................................................... 127 C.3.5.3 Measurement of cable insertion loss ..................................................................................... 127 C.3.6 NEXT loss of cable ................................................................................................................... 127 C.3.6.1 Test configuration for cable NEXT loss ................................................................................. 127 C.3.6.2 Calibration of cable NEXT loss .............................................................................................. 127 C.3.6.3 Measurement of cable NEXT loss ......................................................................................... 127 C.3.7 ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss of cable ...................................................................................... 127 C.3.7.1 Test configuration for cable ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss ................................................... 128 C.3.7.2 Calibration of cable ANEXT loss ........................................................................................... 128 C.3.7.3 Measurement of cable ANEXT loss ...................................................................................... 128 C.3.7.4 Cable PSAFEXT loss and PSAACRF calculation ................................................................. 128 C.3.8 FEXT loss of cable .................................................................................................................... 128 C.3.8.1 Test configuration of cable FEXT loss ................................................................................... 128 C.3.8.2 Calibration of cable FEXT loss .............................................................................................. 128 C.3.8.3 Measurement of cable FEXT loss ......................................................................................... 129 C.3.9 TCL of cable .............................................................................................................................. 129 C.3.9.1 Test configuration of cable TCL............................................................................................. 129 C.3.9.2 Calibration of cable TCL ........................................................................................................ 129 C.3.9.3 Measurement of cable TCL ................................................................................................... 129 C.3.10 TCTL of cable ........................................................................................................................... 129 C.3.10.1 Test configuration of cable TCTL .......................................................................................... 129 C.3.10.2 Calibration of cable TCTL ...................................................................................................... 129 C.3.10.3 Measurement of cable TCTL ................................................................................................. 129 C.3.11 Propagation delay of cable ....................................................................................................... 129 C.3.11.1 Test configuration of cable propagation delay....................................................................... 129 C.3.11.2 Calibration of cable propagation delay .................................................................................. 129 C.3.11.3 Measurement of cable propagation delay ............................................................................. 129 C.4 Connecting hardware test procedures ......................................................................................... 129 C.4.1 Connecting hardware measurement configurations ................................................................. 130 C.4.1.1 Test plug phase reference plane and calibration planes ....................................................... 131 C.4.1.1.1 Device delay measurements .............................................................................................. 132 C.4.1.1.2 Network analyzer settings for delay measurement ............................................................ 132 C.4.1.1.3 Test plug delay and port extension .................................................................................... 132 C.4.1.1.3.1 Calculation of port extension ....................................................................................... 132 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 vii C.4.1.1.3.2 Plug delay correction ................................................................................................... 133 C.4.1.1.4 Direct fixture delay and port extension ............................................................................... 133 C.4.1.1.5 Alternative delay procedure for a test plug......................................................................... 134 C.4.2 Return loss measurements ....................................................................................................... 134 C.4.3 Insertion loss measurements .................................................................................................... 134 C.4.4 NEXT loss measurements ........................................................................................................ 134 C.4.4.1 Connecting hardware NEXT loss measurement and calculation of plug limit vector responses in the forward direction .............................................................................................................................. 135 C.4.4.2 Connecting hardware NEXT loss measurement and calculation of plug limit vector responses in the reverse direction .............................................................................................................................. 135 C.4.4.3 Determining the plug NEXT loss limit vectors ....................................................................... 136 C.4.4.4 Connecting hardware NEXT loss requirements .................................................................... 137 C.4.5 FEXT loss measurements ........................................................................................................ 137 C.4.6 Connecting Hardware ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss measurements ...................................... 138 C.4.6.1 Measurement outline ............................................................................................................. 138 C.4.6.2 Network analyzer and test fixture settings ............................................................................. 138 C.4.6.3 Measurement floor ................................................................................................................. 138 C.4.6.4 DUT setup for ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss measurement ................................................. 138 C.4.6.5 Region of influence ................................................................................................................ 141 C.4.6.6 PSANEXT loss and PSAFEXT loss calculation .................................................................... 141 C.4.7 TCL measurements .................................................................................................................. 141 C.4.8 TCTL measurements ................................................................................................................ 142 C.4.9 Test plug qualification fixtures .................................................................................................. 142 C.4.9.1 Direct fixture........................................................................................................................... 142 C.4.9.2 Impedance matched balun interface fixtures ......................................................................... 144 C.4.10 Test plug characterization ......................................................................................................... 144 C.4.10.1 Test plug construction ........................................................................................................... 144 C.4.10.2 Test plug qualification ............................................................................................................ 144 C.4.10.2.1 Test plug measurement ...................................................................................................... 144 C.4.10.2.2 Procedure for mating a test plug to the direct fixture ......................................................... 145 C.4.10.3 Test plug NEXT loss requirements ........................................................................................ 146 C.4.10.4 Test plug NEXT loss measurement ....................................................................................... 147 C.4.10.5 Test plug FEXT loss requirements ........................................................................................ 148 C.4.10.6 Test plug FEXT loss measurement ....................................................................................... 149 C.4.10.7 Test plug return loss requirements ........................................................................................ 150 C.4.10.8 Test plug return loss measurement ....................................................................................... 150 C.4.10.8.1 Test plug return loss interconnections and termination ..................................................... 150 C.4.10.8.2 Test plug construction for return loss testing ..................................................................... 150 C.4.10.8.3 Test plug return loss reverse direction qualification procedure.......................................... 151 C.4.10.8.4 Test plug return loss forward direction qualification procedure (with matrix de-embedding)151 C.4.10.8.4.1 Procedure overview ..................................................................................................... 151 C.4.10.8.4.2 Selection of a return loss de-embedding reference jack ............................................. 152 C.4.10.8.4.3 Return loss de-embedding reference jack S-parameters ............................................ 153 C.4.10.8.4.4 Calculation of return loss de-embedding reference jack S-parameters ...................... 154 C.4.10.8.4.5 Determining the return loss of a test plug .................................................................... 157 C.4.11 Category 6A measurement reproducibility ............................................................................... 158 C.4.11.1 NEXT loss measurement reproducibility between laboratories ............................................. 158 C.4.11.2 FEXT loss test plug measurement reproducibility between laboratories .............................. 159 C.4.11.3 Return loss measurement reproducibility between laboratories ........................................... 159 C.5 Modular cord test procedures ...................................................................................................... 160 C.5.1 Network analyzer test configuration .......................................................................................... 160 C.5.2 Test fixturing for modular cords ................................................................................................ 160 C.5.2.1 Modular cord test head NEXT loss ........................................................................................ 161 C.5.2.2 Modular cord test head FEXT loss ........................................................................................ 161 C.5.2.3 Modular cord test head return loss ........................................................................................ 161 C.5.3 Modular cord test procedure ..................................................................................................... 161 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 viii Annex D (normative) - Connecting hardware transfer impedance test method ..................................... 162 D.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 162 D.2 Purpose and scope ...................................................................................................................... 162 D.3 Transfer impedance test method ................................................................................................. 162 D.3.1 General ..................................................................................................................................... 162 D.3.2 Test setup and apparatus ......................................................................................................... 163 D.3.3 Test method .............................................................................................................................. 166 D.3.3.1 Connecting hardware and cable preparation ........................................................................ 166 D.3.3.2 Calibration and measurement ............................................................................................... 166 D.3.4 Transfer impedance measurement consistency tests .............................................................. 167 D.3.4.1 Test orientation summary ...................................................................................................... 167 D.3.4.2 AC and DC resistance correlation ......................................................................................... 167 D.3.4.3 Open shield test ..................................................................................................................... 167 D.3.4.4 Measurement slope verification ............................................................................................. 167 Annex E (informative) - Connecting hardware test fixtures ................................................................... 168 E.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 168 E.2 Additional components for connection to a network analyzer...................................................... 169 E.3 Direct fixture ................................................................................................................................. 171 E.4 PCB based test plug assembly .................................................................................................... 173 E.5 Connecting hardware measurement configuration ...................................................................... 174 E.6 Test fixture calibration .................................................................................................................. 175 E.6.1 Calibration and reference plane location .................................................................................. 179 E.7 Test lead, 100 mm (4 in) twisted-pair return loss measurement on a pyramid............................ 180 E.8 DUT connections using header PCB assemblies ........................................................................ 181 Annex F (informative) - Multiport measurement considerations ........................................................... 182 F.1 Multiport test configuration, general ............................................................................................. 182 F.2 Terminology ................................................................................................................................. 182 F.3 Two port measurement of multiport device .................................................................................. 182 F.4 Common mode termination .......................................................................................................... 182 F.5 Measurement topology................................................................................................................. 183 F.6 Ground plane considerations ....................................................................................................... 184 Annex G (informative) - Cable installation in higher temperature environments ................................... 185 G.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 185 G.2 Insertion loss ................................................................................................................................ 185 G.3 Allowance for cable temperature ................................................................................................. 186 G.4 Installation example ..................................................................................................................... 186 Annex H (informative) - Derivation of propagation delay from insertion loss equation .......................... 187 H.1 Factoring the insertion loss equation ........................................................................................... 187 H.2 Developing the phase delay equation .......................................................................................... 189 Annex I (informative) - Development of channel and component return loss limits .................................. 191 I.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 191 I.2 Assumptions ................................................................................................................................. 192 I.2.1 Assumptions for the transmission matrix for cable ................................................................... 192 I.2.2 Assumptions for the transmission matrix for connectors .......................................................... 193 I.3 Return loss modeling results ........................................................................................................ 194 Annex J (informative) - Modeling configurations .................................................................................... 195 Annex K (informative) - Additional information on channel and permanent link NEXT loss limits ......... 196 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 ix K.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 196 K.2 Reflected FEXT contributions to measured NEXT loss ............................................................... 196 Equipment ................................................................................................................................................. 196 K.3 Guidelines for determining the impact of reflected FEXT effects ................................................ 197 Annex L (informative) - PSAACRF and AFEXT loss normalization ....................................................... 198 L.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 198 L.2 Coupled length ............................................................................................................................. 198 L.3 AFEXT loss normalization ............................................................................................................ 199 Annex M (informative) - Category 5 channel parameters ...................................................................... 201 Annex N (informative) - Bibliography ..................................................................................................... 203 LIST OF TABLES Table 1 - Matrix of backward compatible mated component performance ................................................... 7 Table 2 – Insulated conductor color code for 4-pair horizontal cables ......................................................... 8 Table 3 – Insulated conductor color codes for cord cable and cross-connect jumpers .............................. 15 Table 4 - Channel return loss ...................................................................................................................... 23 Table 5 - Minimum channel return loss ...................................................................................................... 23 Table 6 - Channel insertion loss ................................................................................................................. 25 Table 7 - Maximum channel insertion loss ................................................................................................. 25 Table 8 - Channel NEXT loss...................................................................................................................... 26 Table 9 - Minimum channel NEXT loss ....................................................................................................... 27 Table 10 - Channel PSNEXT loss ............................................................................................................... 28 Table 11 - Minimum channel PSNEXT loss ............................................................................................... 28 Table 12 - Channel ACRF ........................................................................................................................... 29 Table 13 - Minimum channel ACRF ........................................................................................................... 29 Table 14 - Channel PSACRF ...................................................................................................................... 30 Table 15 - Minimum channel PSACRF ...................................................................................................... 30 Table 16 - Channel TCL .............................................................................................................................. 31 Table 17 - Minimum channel TCL .............................................................................................................. 31 Table 18 - Channel ELTCTL ....................................................................................................................... 32 Table 19 - Minimum channel ELTCTL ....................................................................................................... 32 Table 20 - Channel propagation delay ........................................................................................................ 33 Table 21 - Maximum channel propagation delay ....................................................................................... 33 Table 22 - Channel PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................................ 34 Table 23 - Minimum channel PSANEXT loss ............................................................................................ 35 Table 24 - Channel average PSANEXT loss .............................................................................................. 36 Table 25 - Minimum channel average PSANEXT loss .............................................................................. 37 Table 26 - Channel PSAACRF ................................................................................................................... 38 Table 27 - Minimum channel PSAACRF .................................................................................................... 38 Table 28 - Channel average PSAACRF ..................................................................................................... 39 Table 29 - Minimum channel average PSAACRF ..................................................................................... 39 Table 30 – Permanent link return loss ........................................................................................................ 41 Table 31 - Minimum permanent link return loss ......................................................................................... 41 Table 32 – Permanent link insertion loss .................................................................................................... 43 Table 33 - Maximum permanent link insertion loss ................................................................................... 43 Table 34 - Permanent link NEXT loss ......................................................................................................... 44 Table 35 - Minimum permanent link NEXT loss.......................................................................................... 45 Table 36 - Permanent link PSNEXT loss .................................................................................................... 46 Table 37 - Minimum permanent link PSNEXT loss .................................................................................... 47 Table 38 - Permanent link ACRF ................................................................................................................ 48 Table 39 - Minimum permanent link ACRF ................................................................................................ 48 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 x Table 40 - Permanent link PSACRF ........................................................................................................... 49 Table 41 - Minimum permanent link PSACRF ........................................................................................... 49 Table 42 - Permanent link propagation delay ............................................................................................. 50 Table 43 - Maximum permanent link propagation delay ............................................................................ 51 Table 44 – Permanent link PSANEXT loss ................................................................................................. 52 Table 45 - Permanent link PSANEXT loss .................................................................................................. 53 Table 46 - Permanent link average PSANEXT loss ................................................................................... 54 Table 47 - Minimum permanent link average PSANEXT loss ................................................................... 55 Table 48 - Permanent link PSAACRF ......................................................................................................... 56 Table 49 - Minimum permanent link PSAACRF......................................................................................... 56 Table 50 - Permanent link average PSAACRF ........................................................................................... 57 Table 51 - Minimum permanent link average PSAACRF .......................................................................... 57 Table 52 – Horizontal cable structural return loss ...................................................................................... 59 Table 53 - Minimum horizontal cable structural return loss ....................................................................... 59 Table 54 - Horizontal cable return loss ....................................................................................................... 60 Table 55 - Minimum horizontal cable return loss ....................................................................................... 60 Table 56 - Horizontal cable insertion loss, for a length of 100m (328 ft) .................................................... 61 Table 57 - Maximum horizontal cable insertion loss, for a length of 100m (328 ft) ................................... 62 Table 58 - Horizontal cable NEXT loss ....................................................................................................... 63 Table 59 - Minimum horizontal cable NEXT loss ........................................................................................ 63 Table 60 - Horizontal cable PSNEXT loss .................................................................................................. 64 Table 61 - Minimum horizontal cable PSNEXT loss ................................................................................... 64 Table 62 - Horizontal cable ACRF .............................................................................................................. 65 Table 63 - Minimum horizontal cable ACRF ............................................................................................... 65 Table 64 - Horizontal cable PSACRF ......................................................................................................... 66 Table 65 - Minimum horizontal cable PSACRF .......................................................................................... 66 Table 66 - Horizontal cable TCL ................................................................................................................. 67 Table 67 - Minimum horizontal cable TCL .................................................................................................. 67 Table 68 – Horizontal cable ELTCTL .......................................................................................................... 68 Table 69 - Minimum horizontal cable ELTCL .............................................................................................. 68 Table 70 - Horizontal cable coupling attenuation ........................................................................................ 69 Table 71 - Minimum horizontal cable coupling attenuation ........................................................................ 69 Table 72 – Horizontal cable propagation delay .......................................................................................... 70 Table 73 - Maximum horizontal cable propagation delay .......................................................................... 70 Table 74 - Maximum cable surface transfer impedance ............................................................................. 71 Table 75 - Horizontal cable PSANEXT loss ................................................................................................ 71 Table 76 - Minimum horizontal cable PSANEXT loss ................................................................................. 72 Table 77 - Horizontal cable PSAACRF ....................................................................................................... 72 Table 78 - Minimum horizontal cable PSAACRF ........................................................................................ 73 Table 79 - Cord cable return loss ................................................................................................................ 74 Table 80 - Minimum cord cable return loss ................................................................................................ 74 Table 81 - Cord cable insertion loss, for a length of 100m (328 ft) ............................................................. 75 Table 82 - Maximum cord cable insertion loss, for a length of 100m (328 ft) ............................................. 76 Table 83 – Backbone cable NEXT loss ...................................................................................................... 77 Table 84 - Minimum backbone cable NEXT loss ........................................................................................ 77 Table 85 - Backbone cable PSNEXT loss .................................................................................................. 78 Table 86 - Minimum backbone cable PSNEXT loss ................................................................................... 78 Table 87 - Backbone cable ACRF .............................................................................................................. 80 Table 88 - Minimum backbone cable ACRF ............................................................................................... 80 Table 89 - Backbone cable PSACRF .......................................................................................................... 81 Table 90 - Minimum backbone cable PSACRF .......................................................................................... 81 Table 91 – Backbone cable propagation delay ........................................................................................... 82 Table 92 - Maximum backbone cable propagation delay .......................................................................... 82 Table 93 - Connecting hardware return loss ............................................................................................... 85 Table 94 - Minimum connecting hardware return loss ............................................................................... 85 Table 95 – Connecting hardware insertion loss .......................................................................................... 86 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 xi Table 96 - Maximum connecting hardware insertion loss ........................................................................... 86 Table 97 – Connecting hardware NEXT loss .............................................................................................. 87 Table 98 - Minimum connecting hardware NEXT loss ................................................................................ 87 Table 99 – Connecting hardware PSNEXT loss assumptions .................................................................... 88 Table 100 - Connecting hardware FEXT loss ............................................................................................. 89 Table 101 - Minimum connecting hardware FEXT loss .............................................................................. 89 Table 102 – Connecting hardware PSFEXT loss assumptions .................................................................. 90 Table 103 - Connecting hardware TCL ....................................................................................................... 91 Table 104 - Minimum connecting hardware TCL ........................................................................................ 91 Table 105 - Connecting hardware TCTL ..................................................................................................... 92 Table 106 - Minimum connecting hardware TCTL ...................................................................................... 92 Table 107 - Maximum connecting hardware shield transfer impedance .................................................... 93 Table 108 – Connecting hardware PSANEXT loss .................................................................................... 94 Table 109 - Minimum connecting hardware PSANEXT loss ...................................................................... 94 Table 110 – Connecting hardware PSAFEXT loss ..................................................................................... 95 Table 111 - Minimum connecting hardware PSAFEXT loss ....................................................................... 95 Table 112 - Work area, equipment, and patch cord return loss .................................................................. 96 Table 113 - Minimum work area, equipment, and patch cord return loss .................................................. 96 Table 114 - Minimum 2 meter work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss ..................................... 98 Table 115 - Minimum 5 meter work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss ..................................... 99 Table 116 - Minimum 10 meter work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss ................................... 99 Table A.1 – Standards for solderless connections ................................................................................... 100 Table A.2 – Standards for modular plugs and jacks ................................................................................. 101 Table A.3 – Modular plugs and jacks operations matrix ........................................................................... 101 Table A.4 – Standards for other connecting hardware ............................................................................. 102 Table A.5 – Other connecting hardware operations matrix ...................................................................... 103 Table B.1 - Test balun performance characteristics ................................................................................. 106 Table B.2 – Minimum number of measurement points ............................................................................. 109 Table C.1 - Interconnection return loss ..................................................................................................... 114 Table C.2 - Category 6A and 6 test plug NEXT loss limit vectors ............................................................ 136 Table C.3 - Category 5e test plug NEXT loss limit vectors ....................................................................... 137 Table C.4 - Category 6 and 6A connecting hardware NEXT loss requirements for case 1 and case 4 ... 137 Table C.5 - Direct fixture performance ...................................................................................................... 143 Table C.6 - Test plug NEXT loss ranges .................................................................................................. 146 Table C.7 - Test plug FEXT loss ranges ................................................................................................... 148 Table C.8 – Test plug return loss requirements ........................................................................................ 150 Table C.9 - Fluke Networks return loss de-embedding reference jack assembly standard vectors ......... 152 Table C.10 – Category 6A NEXT loss measurement reproducibility between laboratories ..................... 158 Table C.11 – Category 6A FEXT loss measurement reproducibility between laboratories ...................... 159 Table C.12 - Modular cord test head return loss....................................................................................... 161 Table G.1 – Maximum horizontal cable length de-rating factor for different temperatures ...................... 185 Table G.2 – Maximum horizontal cable length de-rating factor for different temperatures ...................... 186 Table M.1 - Category 5 channel parameters ............................................................................................ 201 Table M.2 – Category 5 channel performance at key frequencies ........................................................... 202 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1 - Eight-position modular jack pin/pair assignment (T568A) .......................................................... 13 Figure 2 - Optional eight-position modular jack pin/pair assignment (T568B) ............................................ 13 Figure 3 - Supplemental schematic representation of a channel test configuration ................................... 22 Figure 4 - Supplemental schematic representation of a permanent link test configuration ........................ 40 Figure A.1 - Reference test schedule for non-accessible IDC .................................................................. 104 Figure A.2 - Reference test schedule for modular plugs and jacks .......................................................... 105 Figure B.1 - Differential test fixture interface pattern ................................................................................ 107 Figure B.2 - Example pin and socket dimension ...................................................................................... 107 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 xii Figure B.3 - Measurement configurations for test balun qualification ....................................................... 108 Figure B.4 – Resistor termination networks .............................................................................................. 109 Figure B.5 - Calibration plane ................................................................................................................... 110 Figure C.1 - Laboratory test configuration for return loss ......................................................................... 115 Figure C.2 - Laboratory test configuration for insertion loss, FEXT loss, ACRF, and propagation delay measurements ................................................................................................................................... 116 Figure C.3 - Laboratory test configuration for NEXT loss ......................................................................... 117 Figure C.4 - Example of a “6-around-1” cable arrangement in a channel ................................................ 119 Figure C.5 - Schematic diagram of cabling ANEXT loss measurements ................................................. 120 Figure C.6 - Schematic diagram of cabling AFEXT loss measurements .................................................. 121 Figure C.7 - Laboratory test configuration for TCL ................................................................................... 122 Figure C.8 - Coaxial lead through calibration ............................................................................................ 123 Figure C.9 - Back-to-back balun insertion loss measurement .................................................................. 123 Figure C.10 - Output terminal connection ................................................................................................. 124 Figure C.11 - Outer shield grounding position .......................................................................................... 124 Figure C.12 - Laboratory test configuration for TCTL ............................................................................... 125 Figure C.13 - 6-around-1 cable test configuration .................................................................................... 128 Figure C.14 - Calibration planes, test plug phase reference plane, and port extensions ......................... 131 Figure C.15 - Examples of direct fixture short, open, load, and through artifacts ..................................... 134 Figure C.16 – Connecting hardware ANEXT loss measurement setup ................................................... 139 Figure C.17 - Connecting hardware AFEXT loss measurement setup ..................................................... 140 Figure C.18 - Example connector configurations for alien crosstalk ........................................................ 141 Figure C.19 - Direct fixture mating dimensions, top view ......................................................................... 142 Figure C.20 - Direct fixture mating dimensions, front view ....................................................................... 143 Figure C.21 - Direct fixture mating dimensions, side view ........................................................................ 143 Figure C.22 - Modular plug placed into the plug clamp ............................................................................ 145 Figure C.23 - Guiding the plug into position .............................................................................................. 145 Figure C.24 - Example of a measurement setup for test plug NEXT loss ................................................ 147 Figure C.25 - Example of a measurement setup for test plug FEXT loss ................................................ 149 Figure C.26 - Example of a test plug using a PCB substrate ................................................................... 150 Figure C.27 - Example of suitable return loss de-embedding reference jack assembly .......................... 152 Figure C.28 - Flow chart for return loss de-embedding reference jack S-parameters.............................. 153 Figure C.29 - Representation of a mated connection by two cascaded networks .................................... 154 Figure C.30 - Return loss de-embedding reference plug terminated with LOAD resistors ...................... 155 Figure C.31 - Return loss test plug calibration and phase reference planes ............................................ 155 Figure C.32 - Flow chart of determination of test plug return loss ............................................................ 157 Figure C.33 - Inter-laboratory return loss variability for testing category 6A connecting hardware .......... 159 Figure C.34 - Network analyzer configuration........................................................................................... 160 Figure D.1 - Equivalent circuit diagram for HF sealed case ..................................................................... 162 Figure D.2 - HF sealed case dimensional characteristics ......................................................................... 164 Figure D.3 - HF sealed case covers, fixed and modular ring details ........................................................ 165 Figure E.1 - Test head assembly with baluns attached ............................................................................ 168 Figure E.2 - Test head assembly showing shielding between baluns ..................................................... 169 Figure E.3 - Balun test fixture assembly ................................................................................................... 170 Figure E.4 - Plug direct fixture, DPMF-2 view 1 ........................................................................................ 171 Figure E.5 - Plug direct fixture, DPMF-2 view 2 ........................................................................................ 171 Figure E.6 - Exploded assembly of the direct fixture ................................................................................ 172 Figure E.7 - PCB based plug .................................................................................................................... 173 Figure E.8 - TP6A PCB based plug assembly with adapter ..................................................................... 173 Figure E.9 - An example of a connecting hardware measurement configuration ..................................... 174 Figure E.10 - Test fixture interface ............................................................................................................ 175 Figure E.11 - Open calibration standard applied to test interface............................................................. 176 Figure E.12 - Short calibration standard applied to test interface ............................................................. 176 Figure E.13 - Load calibration standard applied to test interface ............................................................. 177 Figure E.14 - Back-to-back through standard applied to test interface .................................................... 177 Figure E.15 - Test plug attached to the test interface ............................................................................... 178 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 xiii Figure E.16 - Direct fixture mounted to the test head interface ................................................................ 178 Figure E.17 - Calibration reference plane ................................................................................................. 179 Figure E.18 - Through calibration ............................................................................................................. 180 Figure E.19 - Test setup for twisted-pair return loss measurement .......................................................... 181 Figure E.20 - Method to minimize distance between planes .................................................................... 181 Figure F.1 - Preferred topology for NEXT measurement with DM terminations on connecting hardware (may also be used for return loss measurements) ............................................................................ 183 Figure F.2 - Preferred topology for FEXT loss and insertion loss measurement on connecting hardware (NEXT loss test with DMCM termination is similar) ........................................................................... 183 Figure I.1 - Modeling configuration ........................................................................................................... 194 Figure J.1 - Channel configuration ............................................................................................................ 195 Figure J.2 - Permanent link configuration ................................................................................................. 195 Figure K.1 - Principle of reflected FEXT effects adding to NEXT ............................................................. 196 Figure L.1 - Unequal lengths of disturbing and disturbed channels or permanent links ........................... 198 Figure L.2 - AACRF for the coupled permanent link or channel ............................................................... 199 Figure L.3 - AACRF normalized for the length of the disturbed permanent link or channel ..................... 199 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 xiv FOREWORD (This forward is not a part of this Standard.) This Standard was developed by TIA Subcommittee TR-42.7. Approval of this Standard This Standard was approved by TIA Sub-Committee TR-42.7, TIA Engineering Committee TR-42, and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). ANSI/TIA reviews standards every 5 years. At that time, standards are reaffirmed, rescinded, or revised according to the submitted updates. Updates to be included in the next revision should be sent to the committee chair or to ANSI/TIA. Contributing Organizations More than 30 organizations within the telecommunications industry contributed their expertise to the development of this Standard (including manufacturers, consultants, end users, and other organizations). Documents superseded This Standard replaces the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 standard dated March 16, 2001. Since the original publication of ANSI/EIA/TIA-568 in July of 1991, the office environment has undergone a period of rapid change marked by the growth of increasingly powerful personal computers, the access to more sophisticated applications and the need to interconnect different systems. These changes place increased demands on the transmission capacity of balanced twisted-pair cabling. This has led to the development of twisted-pair copper cables and optical fiber cables and associated, corresponding compatible connecting hardware with enhanced transmission characteristics. This Standard incorporates and refines the technical content of: - ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 - ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 - ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-2 - ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-3 - ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-4 - ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-5 - ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-6 - ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-7 - ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-9 - ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-10 - ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-11 This document takes precedence over the technical contents of the aforementioned bulletins, addenda and interim standards. In addition, this Standard incorporates parts of the content of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Specifically, requirements related to permanent link and channel performance of category 3 and category 5e cabling are incorporated in to this Standard. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 xv Significant technical changes from the previous edition · Incorporation of the above mentioned TSBs, Addenda, and Interim Standard. · Definitions have been harmonized across all of TIA’s telecommunications infrastructure standards. · Performance specifications are provided for category 6 and 6A balanced twisted-pair cabling. · Laboratory test measurement methodologies have been consolidated for all categories of cabling and components. · Test fixturing requirements have been consolidated for all categories of cabling and components. · Information on modeling configurations has been added. · Field tester requirements have been removed from this Standard and moved to ANSI/TIA-1152. Relationship to other TIA standards and documents The following are related Standards regarding various aspects of structured cabling that were developed and are maintained by Engineering Committee TIA TR-42. An illustrative diagram TIA-568-C series and other relevant TIA Standards is given in figure i. · Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises (ANSI/TIA-568-C.0); · Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (ANSI/TIA-568-C.1); · Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard (ANSI/TIA-568-C.3); · Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (ANSI/TIA/-569-B); · Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard (ANSI/TIA-570-B); · Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure (ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A); · Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements For Telecommunications (ANSI-J-STD-607-A); · Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers (TIA-942) In addition, the following documents may be useful to the reader: · National Electrical Safety CodeÒ (NESCÒ) (IEEE C 2); · National Electrical CodeÒ (NECÒ ) (NFPA 70) Useful supplements to this Standard include the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, the Customer-owned Outside Plant Methods Manual, and the Cabling Installation Manual. These manuals provide practices and methods by which many of the requirements of this standard are implemented. Other references are provided in Annex N. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 xvi Figure i - Illustrative relationship between the TIA-568-C series and other relevant TIA standards Annexes Annexes A, B, C, and D are normative and considered requirements of this Standard. Annexes E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, and N are informative and are not considered requirements of this Standard. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 xvii Introduction This Standard provides requirements for 100 W category 3, category 5e, category 6, and category 6A (augmented category 6) balanced twisted-pair cabling and components and for the field test procedures used to verify the performance of installed cabling. Purpose This Standard specifies a generic telecommunications cabling system for commercial buildings that will support a multi-product, multi-vendor environment. It also provides information that may be used for the design of telecommunications products for commercial enterprises. The purpose of this Standard is to enable the planning and installation of a structured cabling system for commercial buildings. Installation of cabling systems during building construction or renovation is significantly less expensive and less disruptive than after the building is occupied. This Standard establishes performance and technical criteria for balanced twisted-pair cabling system configurations and their respective components. In order to determine the requirements of a generic cabling system, performance requirements for various telecommunications services were considered. The diversity of services currently available, coupled with the continual addition of new services, means that there may be cases where limitations to desired performance occur. When applying specific applications to these cabling systems, the user is cautioned to consult application standards, regulations, equipment vendors, and system and service suppliers for applicability, limitations, and ancillary requirements. Specification of criteria Two categories of criteria are specified; mandatory and advisory. The mandatory requirements are designated by the word "shall"; advisory requirements are designated by the words "should”, "may", or "desirable" which are used interchangeably in this Standard. Mandatory criteria generally apply to protection, performance, administration and compatibility; they specify the absolute minimum acceptable requirements. Advisory or desirable criteria are presented when their attainment will enhance the general performance of the cabling system in all its contemplated applications. A note in the text, table, or figure is used for emphasis or offering informative suggestions. Metric equivalents of US customary units The majority of the metric dimensions in this Standard are metric with soft conversions to US customary units; e.g., 4 inches (in) is the soft conversion of 100 millimeters (mm). Life of the Standard This Standard is a living document. The criteria contained in this Standard are subject to revisions and updating as warranted by advances in building construction techniques and telecommunications technology. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 1 1 SCOPE This Standard specifies minimum requirements for balanced twisted-pair telecommunications cabling (e.g. channels and permanent links) and components (e.g. cable, connectors, connecting hardware, patch cords, equipment cords, work area cords, and jumpers) that are used up to and including the telecommunications outlet/connector and between buildings in a campus environment. This Standard also specifies field test procedures and applicable laboratory reference measurement procedures for all transmission parameters. 2 NORMATIVE AND INFORMATIVE REFERENCES The following standards contain provisions that, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of this Standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All standards are subject to revision; parties to agreements based upon this Standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards indicated. ANSI and TIA maintain registers of currently valid national standards published by them. ANSI/ICEA S-80-576, Standard for Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With or Without an Overall Shield) for use in Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements, 2002 ANSI/ICEA S-84-608, Telecommunications Cable Filled, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductor, 2007 ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2006, Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With or Without an Overall Shield) for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems Technical Requirements, 2006 ANSI/ICEA S-102-732-2009, Standard for Category 6 and 6A, 100 Ohm Individually Unshielded Twisted Pairs, Indoor Cables (With or Without an Overall Shield) for Use in LAN Communication Wiring Systems Technical Requirements, 2009 ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-10, Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 W Augmented Categiry 6 Cabling, 2008 ANSI/TIA-570-B, Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 2004 ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 2008 ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, 2008 ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure, 2002 ANSI/TIA-1152, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balance Twisted-Pair Cabling, 2009 ASTM D 4565, Standard Test Methods For Physical And Environmental Performance Properties of Insulations And Jackets For Telecommunications Wire And Cable, 1999 ASTM D 4566, Standard Test Methods for Electrical Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable, 2005 IEC 60352-2, Solderless Connections - Part 2: Crimped Connections - General Requirements, Test Methods and Practical Guidance, 2007 IEC 60352-3, Solderless Connections - Part 3: Solderless Accessible Insulation Displacement Connections - General Requirements, Test Methods and Practical Guidance, 1993 IEC 60352-4, Solderless Connections - Part 4: Solderless Non-accessible Insulation Displacement Connections - General Requirements, Test Methods and Practical Guidance, 1994 IEC 60352-5, Solderless Connections - Part 5: Press-in Connections - General Requirements, Test Methods and Practical Guidance, 2008 IEC 60352-6, Solderless Connections - Part 6: Insulation Piercing Connections - General Requirements, Test Methods and Practical Guidance, 1997 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 2 IEC 60352-7, Solderless Connections - Part 7: Spring Clamp Connections - General Requirements, Test Methods and Practical Guidance, 2002 IEC 60352-8, Solderless connections - Part 8: Compression Mount Connections - General Requirements, Test Methods and Practical Guidance, pending publication IEC 60603-7, Connectors for frequencies below 3 MHz for use with printed boards – Part 7: Detail specifications for connectors, 8-way, including fixed and free connectors with common mating features, with assessed quality, 1996 IEC 60603-7-1, Connectors for electronic equipment – Part 7-1: Detail specification for 8-way, shielded, free and fixed connectors with common mating features, with assessed quality, 2002 IEC 60603-7-2, Connectors for electronic equipment – Part 7-2: Detail specification for 8-way, unshielded, free and fixed connectors, for data transmissions with frequencies up to 100 MHz, 2002 IEC 60603-7-3, Connectors for electronic equipment – Part 7-3: Detail specification for 8-way, shielded, free and fixed connectors, for data transmissions with frequencies up to 100 MHz, 2008 IEC 60603-7-4, Connectors for electronic equipment – Part 7-4: Detail specification for 8-way, unshielded, free and fixed connectors, for data transmissions with frequencies up to 250 MHz, 2005 IEC 60603-7-5, Connectors for electronic equipment – Part 7-5: Detail specification for 8-way, shielded, free and fixed connectors, for data transmissions with frequencies up to 250 MHz, pending publication IEC 60603-7-41, Connectors for electronic equipment - Part 7-41: Detail specification for 8-way, unshielded, free and fixed connectors, for data transmission with frequencies up to 500 MHz,2009 IEC 60603-7-51, Connectors for electronic equipment - Part 7-51: Detail specification for 8-way, shielded, free and fixed connectors, for data transmission with frequencies up to 500 MHz, 2009 IEC 61156-1, Multicore and Symmetrical Pair/Quad Cables for Digital Communications – Part 1: Generic Specification, 2007 IEC 62153-4-3, Metallic communication cables test methods – Part 4-3: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Surface transfer impedance – Triaxial method, 2006 IEC 62153-4-5, Metallic communication cables test methods – Part 4-5: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Coupling or screening attenuation – Absorbing Clamp method, 2006 IEC 62153-4-9 Metallic communication cables test methods – Part 4-9: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Coupling of screened balanced cables, triaxial method, 2008 TIA TSB-155, Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of Installed Category 6 Cabling to Support 10GBASE-T, 2007 TIA TSB-184, Guidelines for Supporting Power Delivery over Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling, 2009 UL 444, Communication Cables, 2002 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 3 3 DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS, UNITS OF MEASURE 3.1 General For the purpose of this Standard the following definitions, acronyms, abbreviations and units of measure apply. 3.2 Definitions administration: The method for labeling, identification, documentation and usage needed to implement moves, additions and changes of the telecommunications infrastructure. backbone: A facility (e.g., pathway, cable or conductors) between telecommunications rooms, or floor distribution terminals, the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms within or between buildings. bundled cable: An assembly of two or more cables continuously bound together to form a single unit. cable: An assembly of one or more insulated conductors or optical fibers, within an enveloping sheath. cable run: A length of installed media which may include other components along its path. cable sheath: A covering over the optical fiber or conductor assembly that may include one or more metallic members, strength members, or jackets. cabling: A combination of all cables, jumpers, cords, and connecting hardware. campus: The buildings and grounds having legal contiguous interconnection. centralized cabling: A cabling configuration from the work area to a centralized cross-connect using pull through cables, an interconnect, or splice in the telecommunications room. compression mount connection: A solderless connection between a contact and a contact pad (i.e. a conductive element on a printed board) which is established by a continuous compression force of contact.connecting hardware: A device providing mechanical cable terminations. consolidation point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. coupling attenuation: Coupling attenuation is the ratio, in dB, of the transmitted power in the signal conductors and the maximum radiated peak power, conducted and generated by the excited common mode currents. crimped connection: A solderless connection made by permanently attaching a termination to a conductor by pressure deformation or by reshaping the crimp barrel around the conductor to establish good electrical and mechanical connection. cross-connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection. cross-connection: A connection scheme between cabling runs, subsystems, and equipment using patch cords or jumpers that attach to connecting hardware on each end. equal level far-end crosstalk: A measure of the unwanted signal coupling from a transmitter at the near-end into another pair measured at the far-end, and relative to the received signal level. equal level transverse conversion transfer loss: A calculation, expressed in dB, of the difference between measured TCTL and the differential mode insertion loss of the disturbed pair. equipment cable; cord: A cable or cable assembly used to connect telecommunications equipment to horizontal or backbone cabling. far-end crosstalk loss: A measure of the unwanted signal coupling from a transmitter at the near end into another pair measured at the far end, and relative to the transmitted signal level. horizontal cabling: 1)The cabling between and including the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect. 2) The cabling between and including the building automation system outlet or the first mechanical termination of the horizontal connection point and the horizontal cross-connect. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 4 hybrid cable: An assembly of two or more cables, of the same or different types or categories, covered by one overall sheath. infrastructure (telecommunications): A collection of those telecommunications components, excluding equipment, that together provide the basic support for the distribution of all information within a building or campus. insertion loss: The signal loss resulting from the insertion of a component, or link, or channel, between a transmitter and receiver (often referred to as attenuation). insulation displacement connection: An electrical connection made by inserting an insulated wire into a metallic slot. insulation displacement connection, accessible: An IDC in which it is possible to access test points for carrying out mechanical tests and electrical measurements without de-activation of any design feature intended to establish or maintain the insulation displacement connection. insulation displacement connection, non-accessible: An IDC in which it is not possible to access test points for carrying out mechanical tests and electrical measurements without de-activation of any design feature. insulation displacement contact: See insulation displacement termination. insulation piercing connection: An electrical connection made by piercing an insulated wire with a metallic element. interconnection: A connection scheme that employs connecting hardware for the direct connection of a cable to another cable without a patch cord or jumper. jumper: An assembly of twisted pairs without connectors, used to join telecommunications circuits/links at the cross-connect. keying: The mechanical feature of a connector system that guarantees correct orientation of a connection, or prevents the connection to a jack, or to an optical fiber adapter of the same type intended for another purpose. link: A transmission path between two points, not including terminal equipment, work area cables, and equipment cables. listed: Equipment included in a list published by an organization, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equipment, and whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets appropriate standards or has been tested and found satiable for use in a specified manner. media (telecommunications): Wire, cable, or conductors used for telecommunications. open office: A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or other means instead of by building walls. outlet box (telecommunications): A housing used to hold telecommunications outlet/connectors. outlet cable: A cable placed in a residential unit extending directly between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the distribution device. outlet/connector (telecommunications): The fixed connector in an equipment outlet. outside plant: Telecommunications infrastructure designed for installation exterior to buildings. patch cord: A length of cable with a plug on one or both ends. patch panel: A connecting hardware system that facilitates cable termination and cabling administration using patch cords. power sum equal level far-end crosstalk: A computation of the unwanted signal coupling from multiple transmitters at the near-end into a pair measured at the far-end, and normalized to the received signal level. power sum near-end crosstalk loss: A computation of the unwanted signal coupling from multiple transmitters at the near-end into a pair measured at the near-end. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 5 press-in connection: A solderless connection made by inserting a press-in terminal into a conductive hole of a printed circuit board.pull strength: See pull tension. pull tension: The pulling force that can be applied to a cable. return loss: A ratio expressed in dB of the power of the outgoing signal to the power of the reflected signal. screen: An element of a cable formed by a shield. sheath: See cable sheath. shield: A metallic layer placed around a conductor or group of conductors. spring clamp connection: A solderless connection achieved by clamping a single conductor to a contact or termination by means of a spring. telecommunications: Any transmission, emission, and reception of signs, signals, writings, images, and sounds, that is information of any nature by cable, radio, optical, or other electromagnetic systems. transfer impedance: A measure of shielding performance determined by the ratio of the voltage on the conductors enclosed by a shield to the surface currents on the outside of the shield. transverse conversion transfer loss: A ratio, expressed in dB, of the measured common mode voltage on a pair relative to the differential mode voltage applied at the opposite end of the same pair, or on either end of another pair. work area: A building space where the occupants interact with telecommunications terminal equipment. 3.3 Acronyms and abbreviations ACRF Attenuation to crosstalk ratio, far-end ANSI American National Standards Institute CM Common mode CMR Common mode rejection DM Differential mode DMCM Differential mode plus common mode DUT Device under test EIA Electronic Industries Alliance ELTCTL Equal level transverse conversion transfer loss FEXT Far-end crosstalk F/UTP Foil (surrounding) unscreened twisted-pairs ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IDC Insulation displacement connection IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IPC Insulation piercing connection NEXT Near-end crosstalk OSB Output signal balance PSAACRF Power sum attenuation to alien crosstalk ratio, far-end PSACRF Power sum attenuation to crosstalk ratio, far-end PSANEXT Power sum alien near-end crosstalk PSFEXT Power sum far-end crosstalk PSNEXT Power sum near-end crosstalk SRL Structural return loss TCL Tranverse conversion loss TCTL Transverse conversion transfer loss TIA Telecommunications Industry Association UTP Unshielded twisted-pair 3.4 Units of measure dB decibel °C degree Celsius ºF degrees Fahrenheit ft feet, foot ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 6 g gram in inch kg kilogram kHz kilohertz km kilometer kV kilovolt MHz megahertz m meter mm micron or micrometer mm millimeter mV millivolt nm nanometer N newton W ohm pF picofarad lb pound lbf pound-force V volt 3.5 Variables f Frequency, in MHz ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 7 4 GENERAL Transmission performance depends upon the characteristics of cable, connecting hardware, cords and cross-connect jumpers, the total number of connections, and the care in which they are installed and maintained. This Standard provides minimum cabling and component performance criteria as well as procedures for component and cabling performance validation. 4.1 Backward compatibility and interoperability The requirements in this Standard are for 100 W category 3, 5e, 6, and 6A balanced twisted-pair cabling components. Higher grades of cabling recognize advances in cabling technology such as full-duplex transmission and the operation of high-speed applications, such as IEEE 802.3 10GBASE-T, over up to 100 meters of structured balanced cabling. Higher categories of cabling shall be backward compatible with lower categories of cabling as specified in this Standard. Applications running on lower category cabling shall be supported by higher category cabling. If different category components are to be mixed, then the combination shall meet the transmission requirements of the lowest performing category. See Table 1 for an example matrix of mated component performance representative of backward compatibility. To ensure generic cabling system performance, component requirements are specified to support interoperability when products from different manufacturers are mated. Table 1 - Matrix of backward compatible mated component performance Category of Modular Connecting Hardware Performance Category 31) Category 5e Category 6 Category 6A Modular Plug & Cord Performance Category 3 1) Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 Category 3 Category 5e Category 3 Category 5e Category 5e Category 5e Category 6 Category 3 Category 5e Category 6 Category 6 Category 6A Category 3 Category 5e Category 6 Category 6A 1) Category 3 plug performance requirements not specified and are assumed to be less restrictive than category 5e. NOTE – Category 6A was referred to as augmented category 6 in ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-10. Testing according to the procedures of this Standard is intended to ensure backward compatibility with lower categories. 4.2 Recognized categories The recognized categories of balanced twisted-pair cabling and components are: Category 3: This designation applies to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling and components whose transmission characteristics are specified from 1 to 16 MHz. Category 5e: This designation applies to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling and components whose transmission characteristics are specified from 1 to 100 MHz. Category 6: This designation applies to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling and components whose transmission characteristics are specified from 1 to 250 MHz. Category 6A: This designation applies to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling and components whose transmission characteristics are specified from 1 to 500 MHz. Category 1, 2, 4 and 5 cabling and components are not recognized as part of this Standard and, therefore, their transmission characteristics are not specified. Category 5 transmission characteristics, used in “legacy” cabling installations, are provided for reference in Annex M. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 8 5 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS This clause contains the mechanical performance specifications for 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling and components. 5.1 Channel mechanical performance The mechanical performance of channels is achieved through the use of compliant components. 5.2 Permanent link mechanical performance The mechanical performance of permanent links is achieved through the use of compliant components. 5.3 Horizontal cable mechanical performance Horizontal cable shall consist of four balanced twisted-pairs of 22 AWG to 24 AWG thermoplastic insulated solid conductors enclosed by a thermoplastic jacket. Horizontal cables shall comply with the mechanical performance requirements, testing and test methods in ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2006 for category 3, ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2006 for category 5e, ANSI/ICEA S-102-732-2009 for category 6, and ANSI/ICEA S-102-732-2009 for category 6A. In addition to the applicable requirements of ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2006 and ANSI/ICEA S-102-732-2009, the physical design of category 3, 5e, 6, and 6A horizontal cables shall meet the additional requirements of this clause. 5.3.1 Insulated conductor The diameter of the insulated conductor shall be 1.53 mm (0.060 in) maximum. NOTE - Insulated conductors above 1.22 mm (0.048 in) may not be compatible with all connecting hardware. 5.3.2 Pair assembly The cable shall be restricted to four twisted-pair conductors. 5.3.3 Insulated conductor color code The insulated conductor color code shall be as shown in Table 2. Table 2 – Insulated conductor color code for 4-pair horizontal cables Pair designation1) Color code Abbreviation Pair 1 White-Blue Blue (W-BL) (BL) Pair 2 White-Orange Orange (W-O) (O) Pair 3 White-Green Green (W-G) (G) Pair 4 White-Brown Brown (W-BR) (BR) 1) See clause 5.7.5 for corresponding connecting hardware pair assignments. The conductor insulation is white and a colored marking is added for identification. For cables with tightly twisted-pairs [all pairs less than 38 mm (1.5 in) per twist] the solid colored conductor of the twisted-pair can serve as the marking for the white conductor. A white marking is optional. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 9 5.3.4 Cable diameter The diameter of the completed cable shall be less than or equal to 9.0 mm (0.354 in). NOTE - Larger cable diameter cables may not be compatible with certain designs of modular connecting hardware. For example, the termination caps in some modular outlet designs may not accommodate larger diameter cables. When 4-pair cables with overall diameters of greater than 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) are used, compatibility with connecting hardware should be considered. 5.3.5 Breaking strength The ultimate breaking strength of the cable, measured in accordance with ASTM D4565, shall be 400 N (90 lbf) minimum. 5.3.6 Cold bend radius Twisted-pair cables shall withstand a bend radius of 4x cable diameter for UTP constructions and 8x cable diameter for screened constructions, at a temperature of -20 °C ± 1 °C, without jacket, insulati on, or shield (if applicable) cracking, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4565, Wire and Cable Bending Test. For certain applications (e.g., pre-cabling buildings in cold climate), the use of cables with a lower temperature bending performance of -30 °C ± 1 °C sh ould be considered. 5.3.7 Performance marking Horizontal cables should be marked to designate transmission performance. NOTE - Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required by listing agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building code requirements. 5.3.8 Core wrap The core may be covered with one or more layers of dielectric material. 5.3.9 Core shield (screened only) An electrically continuous shield shall be applied over the core, or core wrap if one is present, and shall comply with the surface transfer impedance requirements of clause 6.4.20. The core shield shall consist of a helical or longitudinal plastic and metal laminated tape, and one or more longitudinal, helical, or braided non-insulated solid tin-coated copper conductor(s) [drain wire(s)] of 26 AWG equivalent or larger that are in contact with the metal side of the tape. 5.3.10 Dielectric strength (screened only) The insulation between each conductor and the core shield shall be capable of withstanding a minimum DC potential of 2.5 kV for 2 seconds or an AC potential of 1.7 kV for 2 seconds in accordance with IEC 60189-1. 5.4 Bundled and hybrid cable mechanical performance Mechanical performance is not specified for bundled and hybrid cables. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 10 5.5 Cord cable mechanical performance 5.5.1 General Cord cable shall consist of four balanced twisted-pairs of 22 AWG to 26 AWG thermoplastic insulated solid or stranded conductors enclosed by a thermoplastic jacket. Cord cables shall comply with the mechanical performance requirements, testing and test methods in ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2006 for category 3, ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2006 for category 5e, ANSI/ICEA S-102-732-2009 for category 6, and ANSI/ICEA S-102-732-2009 for category 6A. Cord cables used for 100 ohm screened cords and cross- connect jumpers shall be enclosed by a shield meeting the requirements of clauses 5.3.9, 5.3.10, and 6.4.20. 5.5.2 Cord cable flex life (screened only) Cables used for 100 W screened cords and screened cross-connect jumpers shall meet the transfer impedance requirements of this document after being subjected to 500 flex cycles. Flex tests shall be performed on a minimum of 1/3 meter (13 in) lengths of un-terminated cables. The cable sample shall be clamped to a rotatable arm and suspended between two 51 mm (2 in) diameter mandrels located to either side of the center of arm rotation and spaced so as to touch but not hold the cable sample. A weight exerting greater than 10 N (2 lbf) shall be attached to the free end of the cable. A flex cycle shall consist of one + 90° rotation around the mandrels, and the cycling rate shall be 10 cycles ± 2 cycles per minute. 5.6 Backbone cable mechanical performance Four-pair and multipair backbone cables are recognized for use in category 3 and 5e backbone cabling. Four-pair horizontal cables are recognized for use in category 6 and 6A backbone cabling. Multipair backbone cable shall consist of 22 AWG to 24 AWG thermoplastic insulated solid conductors that are formed into one or more units of balanced twisted-pairs and shall meet the requirements of this clause. The groups are identified by distinctly colored binders and assembled to form the core. The core shall be covered by a protective sheath. The sheath consists of an overall thermoplastic jacket and may contain an underlying metallic shield and one or more layers of dielectric material applied over the core. Backbone cables shall comply with the mechanical performance requirements, testing and test methods in ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2006 for category 3, ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2006 for category 5e, ANSI/ICEA S-102-732-2009 for category 6, and ANSI/ICEA S-102-732-2009 for category 6A. 5.6.1 Insulated conductor The diameter of the insulated conductor shall be 1.53 mm (0.060 in) maximum. NOTE - Insulated conductors above 1.22 mm (0.048 in) may not be compatible with all connecting hardware. 5.6.2 Pair assembly The pair twist lengths shall be chosen to ensure compliance with the transmission requirements of this Standard. 5.6.3 Insulated conductor color code The twisted-pair insulated conductor color code shall follow the industry standard color code composed of 10 distinct colors to identify 25 pairs (refer to ANSI/ICEA S-80-576 for appropriate colors). For multipair backbone cables with fewer than 25 pairs, colors shall be consistent with the industry standard color code starting from pair 1 up to the number of pairs in the cable. For multipair backbone cables with tightly twisted-pairs [i.e. all pairs less than 38 mm (1.5 in) per twist] the mate conductor may serve as the marking for the white conductor. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 11 5.6.4 Core assembly For multipair backbone cables with more than 25 pairs, the core shall be assembled in units or sub-units of up to 25 pairs. Each unit or sub-unit shall be identified by a color-coded binder. Color coding should be in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-80-576. Binder color-code integrity shall be maintained whenever cables are spliced. 5.6.5 Core shield When an electrically continuous shield is applied over the core wrap, it shall comply with requirements in clause 5.6.9. NOTE - UL 444, ANSI/ICEA S-80-576 and ANSI/ICEA S-84-608 provide additional information regarding shield mechanical criteria. 5.6.6 Jacket The core shall be enclosed by a uniform, continuous thermoplastic jacket. 5.6.7 Performance marking Multipair backbone cables should be marked to designate transmission performance. NOTE - Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required by listing agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building code requirements. 5.6.8 Dielectric strength (screened only) The insulation between each conductor and the core shield, when present, shall be capable of withstanding a minimum DC potential of 5 kV for 3 seconds in accordance with ASTM D4566. 5.6.9 Core shield resistance When a shield is present around the core, the DC resistance of the core shield shall not exceed the value determined using equation (1): R = 62.5/D (1) where: R = maximum core shield resistance in W/km D = outside diameter of the shield in mm This requirement is applicable to outside plant cables or inside building cables having their shields bonded to the shields of outside plant cables at building entrances. The electrical and physical requirements of the shields of inside building cables are found in clauses 5.3.9, 5.3.10, and 6.4.20. 5.7 Connecting hardware mechanical performance 5.7.1 Environmental compatibility Connecting hardware used to terminate to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling shall be functional for continuous use over the temperature range from -10 °C to 60 °C. Connecting hardware shall be protected from physical damage and from direct exposure to moisture and other corrosive elements. This protection may be accomplished by installation indoors or in an appropriate enclosure for the environment. 5.7.2 Mounting Connecting hardware used to terminate to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling should be designed to provide flexibility for mounting on walls, in racks or on other types of distribution frames and standard mounting hardware. Telecommunications outlet/connectors shall be securely mounted at planned locations. Cables intended for future connections shall be covered with a faceplate that identifies the outlet box for telecommunications use. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 12 5.7.3 Mechanical termination density Connecting hardware used to terminate to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling should have a high density to conserve space, but should also be of a size consistent with ease of cable management. 5.7.4 Design Cross-connect hardware used to terminate to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling shall be designed to provide: a) a means to cross-connect cables with cross-connect jumpers or patch cords, b) a means to connect premises equipment to the 100 W UTP network, c) a means to identify circuits for administration in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, d) a means to use standard colors as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A to functionally identify mechanical termination fields, f) a means of handling wire and cable to permit orderly management, g a means of access to monitor or test cabling and premises equipment, and h) a means for protecting exposed terminals, an insulating barrier, such as a cover or a plastic shroud, for protecting terminals from accidental contact with foreign objects that may disturb electrical continuity. Consolidation points and telecommunications outlet/connectors used to terminate to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling shall be designed to provide: a) appropriate mechanical termination means for horizontal cable runs, and b) a means of conductor identification to promote pin-pair practices consistent with clause 5.7.5. Connecting hardware used to terminate to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling shall not result in or contain any transposed pairs (e.g., transposition of pairs 2 and 3) or reversed pairs (also called tip/ring reversals). NOTE - While some network applications require that the transmit and receive pairs be swapped, such application-specific adaptations are accomplished using adapters, work area cords or equipment cords that are beyond the scope of this Standard. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 13 5.7.5 Work area telecommunications outlet/connector Each four-pair horizontal cable shall be terminated in an eight-position modular jack at the work area. The telecommunications outlet/connector shall meet the modular interface requirements specified in IEC 60603-7-1, IEC 60603-7-2, IEC 60603-7-3, IEC 60603-7-4, and IEC 60603-7-5. In addition, the telecommunications outlet/connector shall meet the requirements of clause 5.7 and the terminal marking and mounting requirements specified in ANSI/TIA-570-B. Pin/pair assignments shall be as shown in Figure 1 or, optionally, per Figure 2 if necessary to accommodate certain cabling systems. The colors shown are associated with the horizontal distribution cable shown in Table 2. These figures depict the front view of the telecommunications outlet/connector. NOTE – See Table 3 for an explanation of color codes. Figure 1 - Eight-position modular jack pin/pair assignment (T568A) NOTE – See Table 3 for an explanation of color codes. Figure 2 - Optional eight-position modular jack pin/pair assignment (T568B) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 14 5.7.6 Performance marking Connecting hardware should be marked to designate transmission performance at the discretion of the manufacturer or the approval agency. The markings, if any, shall be visible during installation. It is suggested that such markings consist of: “cat 3” or “ ” for category 3 components “cat 5e” or “ ” for category 5e components “cat 6” or “ ” for category 6 components “cat 6A” or “ ” for category 6A components NOTE - Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required by listing agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building code requirements. 5.7.7 Reliability To assure reliable operation over the usable life of the cabling system, the connecting hardware used to terminate to 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling shall meet all requirements of Annex A. This annex specifies test procedures and performance requirements for contact resistance, transfer impedance (screened only), insulation resistance, durability, environmental conditioning and other tests designed to assure consistently dependable operation. For connecting hardware with 8-position modular connectors, the modular connection shall comply with Level A reliability requirements of IEC 60603-7 series. The shield mating interface shall meet the applicable reliability requirements for connecting hardware as defined by IEC 60603-7 series of Standards. 5.7.8 Shield mating interface (screened only) The shields of shielded 8-position modular connectors (plugs and jacks) shall be designed to ensure shield continuity when mated. The shield mating interface shall conform to the requirements in the IEC 60603-7 series of Standards. Modular jack shields shall not encroach upon the connector opening dimensions defined by IEC 60603-7 with the exception of shield mating contacts internal to the jack. Plug shields shall not extend beyond the plug housing dimensions defined by IEC 60603-7 in areas mating to the jack. 3 5e 6 6A ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 15 5.7.9 Shield continuity (screened only) Effective shielding requires that all cabling components be shielded, meeting the requirements for transfer impedance given in clause 6.8.20 and that all shields be properly bonded. Shielding shall be continuous for the complete channel. Work area cords, cross-connect cords, equipment cords and the equipment connection, while not part of the generic cabling, shall provide shield continuity. Screened telecommunications outlet/connectors shall be labeled or otherwise identified to differentiate them from UTP connectors and indicate the need for screened work area cords. 5.8 Cords and jumpers mechanical performance Cables used to construct work area cords, equipment cords, and patch cords should have stranded conductors. Cables used for cord assemblies shall meet the conductor size and color coding specified in clauses 5.8.1 and 5.8.2, respectively. 5.8.1 Insulated conductor Cables used to construct work area cords, equipment cords, and patch cords terminated with modular plug connectors as specified in IEC 60603-7 should have an insulated conductor diameter in the range of 0.8 mm (0.032 in) to 1 mm (0.039 in) and shall not exceed 1.22 mm (0.048 in). Cables used to construct cross-connect jumpers shall meet the requirements of clause 5.3.1 and the applicable requirements of ANSI/ICEA-S-90-661-2006. NOTE – A special modular plug connector may be required for cables with insulated conductor diameter greater than 1 mm (0.039 in) or less than 0.8 mm (0.032 in). 5.8.2 Insulated conductor color codes The insulated conductor color coding for cord cable and cross-connect jumpers shall comply with Table 3. Table 3 – Insulated conductor color codes for cord cable and cross-connect jumpers Pair designation1) Color code (Abbreviation) Option 1 Color code (Abbreviation) Option 2 Pair 1 White-Blue (W-BL) Blue (BL) Green(G) Red (R) Pair 2 White-Orange (W-O) Orange (O) Black (BK) Yellow (Y) Pair 3 White-Green (W-G) Green (G) Blue (BL) Orange (O) Pair 4 White-Brown (W-BR) Brown (BR) Brown (BR) Slate (S) 1) See clause 5.7.5 for corresponding connecting hardware pair assignments. NOTES, 1 A white marking is optional. 2 Because of their identical pair groupings, patch cords terminated in either T568A or T568B may be used interchangeably, provided that both ends are terminated with the same pin/pair scheme. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 16 6 TRANSMISSION REQUIREMENTS 6.1 General This clause contains the transmission performance specifications for 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling and components. To serve a multi-disturber environment, this Standard specifies transmission parameters as both worst-case pair-to-pair measurements and power sum calculations that approximate multi-disturber effects. Transmission parameters are applicable to channels, permanent links, cables, cords, and connecting hardware. This clause describes the transmission parameters and develops the applicable “generic” equations for each parameter. 6.1.1 Return loss Return loss shall be measured for all pairs of the DUT from 1 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the category using the procedures in Annex C. 6.1.2 Insertion loss Insertion loss shall be measured for all pairs of the DUT from 1 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the category using the procedures in Annex C. 6.1.3 NEXT loss NEXT loss shall be measured for all pair combinations of the DUT from 1 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the category using the procedures in Annex C. 6.1.4 PSNEXT loss PSNEXT loss takes into account the combined crosstalk (statistical) on a receive pair from all near-end disturbers operating simultaneously. PSNEXT loss is calculated in accordance with ASTM D 4566 as a power sum on a selected pair from all other pairs as shown in equation (2) for the case of an n-pair DUT.       -=∑ ¹= -n kii NEXT k ik PSNEXT ,1 10 , 10log10 dB (2) where: n is the total number of pairs under test (DUT). ikNEXT, is the measured NEXT loss, in dB, to pair k from pair i. k is the number of the disturbed pair. i is the number of a disturbing pair. PSNEXT loss shall be calculated for all pairs of the DUT. 6.1.5 FEXT loss FEXT loss shall be measured for all pair combinations of the DUT from 1 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the category using the procedures in Annex C. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 17 6.1.6 ACRF ACRF shall be calculated for all DUT pair combinations by subtracting the insertion loss of the disturbed pair of the DUT from the FEXT loss as shown in equation (3). kikikILFEXTACRF-=., dB (3) where: kIL is the insertion loss of the disturbed pair. k is the number of the disturbed pair in a disturbed DUT. i is the number of a disturbing pair in a disturbing DUT. ki¹. NOTE - ACRF has been referred to as ELFEXT in previous editions of this Standard. 6.1.7 PSACRF PSACRF takes into account the combined crosstalk (statistical) on a receive pair from all far-end disturbers operating simultaneously. PSACRF is calculated as a power sum on a selected pair k from all other pairs as shown in equation (4) for the case of an n-pair DUT. k n kii ikk ILFEXTPSACRF-=∑ ¹=,1 . dB (4) where: n is the total number of pairs under test (DUT). kIL is the insertion loss of the disturbed pair. k is the number of the disturbed pair in a disturbed DUT. i is the number of a disturbing pair in a disturbing DUT. NOTE - PSACRF has been referred to as PSELFEXT in previous editions of this Standard. 6.1.8 TCL Where specified, TCL shall be measured for all pairs of the DUT from 1 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the category using the procedures in Annex C Category 6 channel TCL is provided for information only. NOTES, 1 TCL and LCL parameters have reciprocity. LCL can be determined using a TCL measurement. 2 When achievable, a 50 dB measurement plateau is recommended. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 18 6.1.9 ELTCTL Where specified, TCTL shall be measured for all pairs of the DUT from 1 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the category using the procedures in Annex C ELTCTL shall be calculated for all DUT pairs as shown in equation (5). ELTCTL is specified for the opposite ends of the same pair. ELTCTL between pairs is not specified. DMDUTDUTDUTILTCTLELTCTL_-= (5) where: DMDUTIL_ is the differential mode DUT insertion loss measured in accordance with Annex C. 6.1.10 Coupling attenuation Coupling attenuation is under study. Coupling attenuation shall be measured in accordance with IEC 62153-4-5 or IEC 62153-4-9 for all screened pairs of horizontal cable from 30 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the specified category. NOTE - Measurements are made from 30 MHz to 1000 MHz for all devices under test, but the measurements above the upper frequency of the specified category are for information only. 6.1.11 Propagation delay Propagation delay shall be measured for all pairs of the DUT from 1 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the category using the procedures in Annex C. 6.1.12 Propagation delay skew Propagation delay skew shall be calculated for all pair combinations of the DUT from 1 MHz up to the maximum specified frequency for the category using the procedures in Annex C ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 19 6.1.13 PSANEXT loss PSANEXT loss takes into account the combined alien crosstalk (statistical) on a receive pair from all external near-end disturbers operating simultaneously. PSANEXT loss is calculated as a power sum on a selected pair k from all other pairs as shown in equation (6) for the case of a 4-pair DUT.       -=∑∑ = = -N j i ANEXT k jik PSANEXT 1 4 1 10 ,, 10log10 dB (6) where: N is the total number of disturbing devices under test (DUT). jikANEXT,, is the measured ANEXT loss, in dB, to pair k of the disturbed DUT from pair i in disturbing DUT j. k is the number of the disturbed pair in a disturbed DUT. i is the number of a disturbing pair in a disturbing DUT. j is the number of a disturbing DUT. ANEXT loss shall be measured for all DUT pair combinations and PSANEXT loss shall be calculated for all DUT pairs. DUT ANEXT loss shall be measured in accordance with Annex C. 6.1.14 Average PSANEXT loss Average PSANEXT loss is calculated by averaging the individual PSANEXT loss values, in dB, for all four pairs in the disturbed DUT at each frequency point as shown in equation (7). 4 _ 4 1 ∑ ==k kPSANEXT PSANEXTAVERAGE dB (7) where: kPSANEXT is the magnitude, in dB, of PSANEXT loss as determined by equation (6). ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 20 6.1.15 PSAFEXT loss (connecting hardware only) PSAFEXT loss takes into account the combined alien crosstalk (statistical) on a receive pair from all external far-end disturbers operating simultaneously. PSAFEXT loss is calculated as a power sum on a selected pair from all other pairs as shown in equation (8) for connecting hardware. ∑∑ = = = N j i jikkAFEXTPSAFEXT 1 4 1 ,, dB (8) where: N is the total number of disturbing devices under test (DUT). jikAFEXT,, is the measured AFEXT loss, in dB, to pair k of the disturbed DUT from pair i in disturbing DUT j. k is the number of the disturbed pair in a disturbed DUT. i is the number of a disturbing pair in a disturbing DUT. j is the number of a disturbing DUT. AFEXT loss shall be measured for all connecting hardware pairs and PSAFEXT loss shall be calculated for all connecting hardware pairs. Category 6A connecting hardware AFEXT loss shall be measured in accordance with clause C.4.6 for all frequencies from 1 to 500 MHz. 6.1.16 PSAACRF AFEXT loss is the coupling of crosstalk at the far-end from external DUT pairs into a disturbed pair of the 4-pair DUT under test. PSAACRF is the calculated power sum from all external pairs into the disturbed pair. Annex L provides additional information on PSAACRF and AFEXT loss normalization. PSAACRF for a DUT is determined using equation (9) for the case of a 4-pair DUT. kkkILPSAFEXTPSAACRF-=dB (9) For channels and permanent links, the calculations in equations (10) through (12) shall be used to determine PSAFEXT loss when the disturbed pair has greater insertion loss than the disturbing pair. If ILk > ILij, then:       --+= ji k IL IL jiILkILAFEXTjikAFEXTnorm jik , log10),(,,,, dB (10) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 21 If ILk £ ILij, then: jikAFEXTjikAFEXTnorm,,,,= dB (11) where:       -=∑∑ = = -N j n i AFEXTnorm k jik PSAFEXT 1 1 10 ,, 10log10 dB (12) kPSAACRF is the PSAACRF of disturbed pair k. AFEXTnorm is AFEXT loss, in dB, normalized to the coupled length (the minimum length of the disturbed and disturbing pair) relative to the length of the disturbed pair. kIL is the insertion loss of disturbed pair k. jiIL, is the insertion loss of pair i of disturbing DUT j. N is the total number of disturbing devices under test (DUT). n is the number of pairs in disturbing devices under test j (usually 4). jikAFEXT,, is the measured AFEXT loss, in dB, to pair k of the disturbed DUT from pair i in disturbing DUT j. k is the number of the disturbed pair in a disturbed DUT. i is the number of a disturbing pair in a disturbing DUT. j is the number of a disturbing DUT. ACRF shall be measured for all DUT pair combinations and PSAACRF shall be calculated for all DUT pairs. ACRF shall be measured in accordance with Annex C. 6.1.17 Average PSAACRF Average PSAACRF is calculated by averaging the individual PSAACRF values, in dB, for all four pairs in the disturbed DUT at each frequency point as shown in equation (13). 4 _ 4 1 ∑ ==k kPSAACRF PSAACRFAVERAGE dB (13) where: kPSAACRF is the magnitude, in dB, of PSAACRF as determined by equation (9) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 22 6.2 Channel transmission performance This clause contains the transmission performance specifications for balanced twisted-pair channels. The channel test configuration is illustrated in figure 3. See Annex J for worst case modeling configurations. Figure 3 - Supplemental schematic representation of a channel test configuration 6.2.1 DC loop resistance DC loop resistance for category 3, 5e, 6, and 6A channels shall not exceed 25 W. Refer to TIA TSB-184 for additional information on channel resistance related to guidance on delivering power. 6.2.2 DC resistance unbalance DC resistance shall be measured for all channel conductors. DC resistance unbalance shall be calculated for each pair of the channel in accordance with equation (14) and shall not exceed the greater of 3% or 200 milliohms. DC resistance unbalance is not specified for category 3 channels. %100_ 21 21 ×      + -= RR RR UnbalanceResistance pair (14) where: 1R is the DC resistance of conductor 1. 2R is the DC resistance of conductor 2. 6.2.3 Mutual capacitance Mutual capacitance is not specified for channels. 6.2.4 Capacitance unbalance: pair-to-ground Capacitance unbalance is not specified for channels. Legend Cables and cords Connecting hardware Work area cord .................................. A Telecommunications outlet/ Optional consolidation point cabling .. B connector ..................................... TO Horizontal cabling ..............................C Optional consolidation Patch cord or jumper cable ................D point connector ............................ CP Telecommunications room Horizontal cross-connect or equipment cord ........................... E interconnect ...........................C1, C2 Maximum length B + C ..................................... 90 m (295 ft) A + D + E ............................. 10 m (32.8 ft) Test equipment A B C D E Test equipment CP TO C1 C2 Channel under test ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 23 6.2.5 Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) are not applicable for channels. 6.2.6 Return loss Channel return loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 4 for all specified frequencies. Table 4 - Channel return loss Frequency (MHz) Return loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f < 20 20 £ f £ 100 17 17 – 10log( f /20) Category 6 1 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 40 40 £ f £ 250 19 24-5log( f ) 32-10log( f ) Category 6A 1 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 40 40 £ f < 398.1 398.1 £ f £ 500 19 24-5log( f ) 32-10log( f ) 6 The channel return loss values in Table 5 are provided for information only. Table 5 - Minimum channel return loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 17.0 19.0 19.0 4.00 n/s 17.0 19.0 19.0 8.00 n/s 17.0 19.0 19.0 10.00 n/s 17.0 19.0 19.0 16.00 n/s 17.0 18.0 18.0 20.00 - 17.0 17.5 17.5 25.00 - 16.0 17.0 17.0 31.25 - 15.1 16.5 16.5 62.50 - 12.1 14.0 14.0 100.00 - 10.0 12.0 12.0 200.00 - - 9.0 9.0 250.00 - - 8.0 8.0 300.00 - - - 7.2 400.00 - - - 6.0 500.00 - - - 6.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 24 6.2.7 Insertion loss Channel insertion loss limits are derived from equation (15). ∑∑++=channelcableconnchannelILDossInsertionLossInsertionLossInsertionL dB (15) where: mcablecableossInsertionLossInsertionL100,02.1 ×= dB, (16) mcableossInsertionL100, is the insertion loss of 100m of the appropriate category of cable, see clause 6.4.7, connossInsertionL is the insertion loss of the appropriate category of connecting hardware, see clause 6.8.7, and 0=channelILD dB for category 3 and 5e channels (17) 5.10003.0 fILDchannel×= dB for category 6 channels (18) )25.0091.082.1(03.0 f ffILDchannel ++=dB for category 6A channels (19) where, channelILD is the insertion loss deviation allowance for a channel. NOTES, 1 A 20 % increase in insertion loss is allowed for cord cable. 2 The insertion loss of the channel does not take into consideration the 0.1 dB measurement floor of the connecting hardware insertion loss requirement. 3 The channel insertion loss requirement is derived using the insertion loss contribution of 4 connections. 4 For the purposes of field measurements, calculated channel limits that result in insertion loss values less than 3 dB revert to a requirement of 3 dB maximum (see ANSI/TIA-1152). ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 25 Channel insertion loss shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 6 for all specified frequencies. Table 6 - Channel insertion loss Frequency (MHz) Insertion loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 fff1.04)238.032.2(02.1 ×++ Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 f f ff 04.04)05.0023.0967.1(02.1 ×+++ Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 5.10003.002.04)2.0017.0808.1(02.1 ff f ff ×+×+++ Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 f f ff 02.04)25.00091.082.1(05.1 ×+++ The channel insertion loss values in Table 7 are provided for information only. Table 7 - Maximum channel insertion loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 3.0 2.2 2.1 2.3 4.00 6.5 4.5 4.0 4.2 8.00 9.8 6.3 5.7 5.8 10.00 11.2 7.1 6.3 6.5 16.00 14.9 9.1 8.0 8.2 20.00 - 10.2 9.0 9.2 25.00 - 11.4 10.1 10.2 31.25 - 12.9 11.4 11.5 62.50 - 18.6 16.5 16.4 100.00 - 24.0 21.3 20.9 200.00 - - 31.5 30.1 250.00 - - 35.9 33.9 300.00 - - - 37.4 400.00 - - - 43.7 500.00 - - - 49.3 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 26 6.2.8 NEXT loss Channel NEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 8 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 3 and 5e channel NEXT loss values greater than 60 dB shall revert to a requirement of 60 dB minimum. Calculations that result in category 6 and 6A channel NEXT loss values greater than 65 dB shall revert to a requirement of 65 dB minimum. Table 8 - Channel NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16      -- ×+ -- -20 ))16/log(209.33( 10220 ))16/log(152.23( 10log20 ff Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(2043( 10220 ))100/log(153.35( 10log20 ff Category 6 1 £ f £ 250      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(2054( 10220 ))100/log(153.44( 10log20 ff Category 6A 1 £ f < 330 330 £ f £ 500      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(2054( 10220 ))100/log(153.44( 10log20 ff )330/log(15.2731 f- ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 27 The channel NEXT loss values in Table 9 are provided for information only. Table 9 - Minimum channel NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 39.1 60.0 65.0 65.0 4.00 29.3 53.5 63.0 63.0 8.00 24.3 48.6 58.2 58.2 10.00 22.7 47.0 56.6 56.6 16.00 19.3 43.6 53.2 53.2 20.00 - 42.0 51.6 51.6 25.00 - 40.3 50.0 50.0 31.25 - 38.7 48.4 48.4 62.50 - 33.6 43.4 43.4 100.00 - 30.1 39.9 39.9 200.00 - - 34.8 34.8 250.00 - - 33.1 33.1 300.00 - - - 31.7 400.00 - - - 28.7 500.00 - - - 26.1 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 28 6.2.9 PSNEXT loss Channel PSNEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 10 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 5e channel PSNEXT loss values greater than 57 dB shall revert to a requirement of 57 dB minimum. Calculations that result in category 6 and 6A channel PSNEXT loss values greater than 62 dB shall revert to a requirement of 62 dB minimum. Table 10 - Channel PSNEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSNEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(2040( 10220 ))100/log(153.32( 10log20 ff Category 6 1 £ f £ 250      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(2050( 10220 ))100/log(153.42( 10log20 ff Category 6A 1 £ f < 330 330 £ f £ 500      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(2050( 10220 ))100/log(153.42( 10log20 ff )330/log(43.2628 f- The channel PSNEXT loss values in Table 11 are provided for information only. Table 11 - Minimum channel PSNEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 57.0 62.0 62.0 4.00 n/s 50.5 60.5 60.5 8.00 n/s 45.6 55.6 55.6 10.00 n/s 44.0 54.0 54.0 16.00 n/s 40.6 50.6 50.6 20.00 - 39.0 49.0 49.0 25.00 - 37.3 47.3 47.3 31.25 - 35.7 45.7 45.7 62.50 - 30.6 40.6 40.6 100.00 - 27.1 37.1 37.1 200.00 - - 31.9 31.9 250.00 - - 30.2 30.2 300.00 - - - 28.8 400.00 - - - 25.8 500.00 - - - 23.2 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 29 6.2.10 FEXT loss FEXT loss is not specified for channels. 6.2.11 ACRF Channel ACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 12 for all specified frequencies. Due to measurement considerations, channel ACRF values that correspond to measured channel FEXT loss values of greater than 70 dB are for information only. Table 12 - Channel ACRF Frequency (MHz) ACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.35( 10420 ))100/log(208.23( 10log20 ff Category 6 1 £ f £ 250      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.43( 10420 ))100/log(208.27( 10log20 ff Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.43( 10420 ))100/log(208.27( 10log20 ff The channel ACRF values in Table 13 are provided for information only. Table 13 - Minimum channel ACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 57.4 63.3 63.3 4.00 n/s 45.4 51.2 51.2 8.00 n/s 39.3 45.2 45.2 10.00 n/s 37.4 43.3 43.3 16.00 n/s 33.3 39.2 39.2 20.00 - 31.4 37.2 37.2 25.00 - 29.4 35.3 35.3 31.25 - 27.5 33.4 33.4 62.50 - 21.5 27.3 27.3 100.00 - 17.4 23.3 23.3 200.00 - - 17.2 17.2 250.00 - - 15.3 15.3 300.00 - - - 13.7 400.00 - - - 11.2 500.00 - - - 9.3 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 30 6.2.12 PSFEXT loss PSFEXT loss is not specified for channels. 6.2.13 PSACRF Channel PSACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 14 for all specified frequencies. Table 14 - Channel PSACRF Frequency (MHz) PSACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100        -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.32( 10420 ))100/log(208.20( 10log20 ff Category 6 1 £ f £ 250      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.40( 10420 ))100/log(208.24( 10log20 ff Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.40( 10420 ))100/log(208.24( 10log20 ff The channel PSACRF values in Table 15 are provided for information only. Table 15 - Minimum channel PSACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 54.4 60.3 60.3 4.00 n/s 42.4 48.2 48.2 8.00 n/s 36.3 42.2 42.2 10.00 n/s 34.4 40.3 40.3 16.00 n/s 30.3 36.2 36.2 20.00 - 28.4 34.2 34.2 25.00 - 26.4 32.3 32.3 31.25 - 24.5 30.4 30.4 62.50 - 18.5 24.3 24.3 100.00 - 14.4 20.3 20.3 200.00 - - 14.2 14.2 250.00 - - 12.3 12.3 300.00 - - - 10.7 400.00 - - - 8.2 500.00 - - - 6.3 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 31 6.2.14 TCL Channel TCL shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 16 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 6A channel TCL values greater than 40 dB shall revert to a requirement of 40 dB minimum. Compliance to these requirements is intended to be verified by laboratory measurements. Table 16 - Channel TCL Frequency (MHz) TCL (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 61) 1 £ f £ 250 50 – 15log( f ) Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 50 – 15log( f ) 1) This limit was not specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 or ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-9 and represents expected performance that is provided for information only. The channel TCL values in Table 17 are provided for information only. Table 17 - Minimum channel TCL Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 4.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 8.00 n/s n/s 36.5 36.5 10.00 n/s n/s 35.0 35.0 16.00 n/s n/s 31.9 31.9 20.00 - n/s 30.5 30.5 25.00 - n/s 29.0 29.0 31.25 - n/s 27.6 27.6 62.50 - n/s 23.1 23.1 100.00 - n/s 20.0 20.0 200.00 - - 15.5 15.5 250.00 - - 14.0 14.0 300.00 - - - 12.8 400.00 - - - 11.0 500.00 - - - 9.5 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 32 6.2.15 TCTL TCTL is not specified for channels. 6.2.16 ELTCTL Channel ELTCTL shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 18 for all specified frequencies. Compliance to these requirements is intended to be verified by laboratory measurements. Table 18 - Channel ELTCTL Frequency (MHz) ELTCTL (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 61) 1 £ f £ 30 30 < f £ 250 30 – 20log( f ) n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 30 30 < f £ 500 30 – 20log( f ) n/s 1) This limit was not specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 or ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-9 and represents expected performance that is provided for information only. The channel ELTCTL values in Table 19 are provided for information only. Table 19 - Minimum channel ELTCTL Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s 30.0 30.0 4.00 n/s n/s 18.0 18.0 8.00 n/s n/s 11.9 11.9 10.00 n/s n/s 10.0 10.0 16.00 n/s n/s 5.9 5.9 20.00 - n/s 4.0 4.0 25.00 - n/s 2.0 2.0 31.25 - n/s n/s n/s 62.50 - n/s n/s n/s 100.00 - n/s n/s n/s 200.00 - - n/s n/s 250.00 - - n/s n/s 300.00 - - - n/s 400.00 - - - n/s 500.00 - - - n/s 6.2.17 Coupling attenuation (screened only) Coupling attenuation for channels is under study. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 33 6.2.18 Propagation delay Channel propagation delay shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 20 for all specified frequencies. For field testing channels, it is sufficient to test at 10 MHz only and channel propagation delay at 10 MHz shall not exceed 555 ns. Table 20 - Channel propagation delay Frequency (MHz) Propagation delay (ns) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 )5.24()36534(×++ f Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )5.24()36534(×++ f Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )5.24()36534(×++ f Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 )5.24()36534(×++ f The channel propagation delay values in Table 21 are provided for information only. Table 21 - Maximum channel propagation delay Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (ns) Category 5e (ns) Category 6 (ns) Category 6A (ns) 1.00 580 580 580 580 4.00 562 562 562 562 8.00 557 557 557 557 10.00 555 555 555 555 16.00 553 553 553 553 20.00 - 552 552 552 25.00 - 551 551 551 31.25 - 550 550 550 62.50 - 549 549 549 100.00 - 548 548 548 200.00 - - 547 547 250.00 - - 546 546 300.00 - - - 546 400.00 - - - 546 500.00 - - - 546 6.2.19 Propagation delay skew Channel propagation delay skew shall be less than 50 ns for all frequencies from 1 MHz to the upper frequency limit of the category. For field testing channels, it is sufficient to test at 10 MHz only and channel propagation delay skew at 10 MHz shall not exceed 50 ns. 6.2.20 ANEXT loss ANEXT loss is not specified for channels. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 34 6.2.21 PSANEXT loss Channel PSANEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 22 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 6A channel PSANEXT loss values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 22 - Channel PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSANEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f < 100 100 £ f £ 500 60 - 10log(f /100) 60 - 15log(f /100) 1) 1) If the average insertion loss of all disturbed pairs at 100 MHz, avgMHzIL,100 , is less than 7 dB, subtract:      -× - ×-× 400 1006, ,100 ,1007 400 1007minimum f avgMHzIL avgMHzILf where: f is the frequency in MHz ∑ = = 4 1 ,1004 1 ,100 i iMHzILavgMHzIL and iMHzIL,100 is the insertion loss of a pair i at 100 MHz ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 35 The channel PSANEXT loss values in Table 23 are provided for information only. Table 23 - Minimum channel PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 20.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 66.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 65.1 62.50 - n/s n/s 62.0 100.00 - n/s n/s 60.0 200.00 - - n/s 55.5 250.00 - - n/s 54.0 300.00 - - - 52.8 400.00 - - - 51.0 500.00 - - - 49.5 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 36 6.2.22 Average PSANEXT loss Channel average PSANEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 24 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 6A channel average PSANEXT loss values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 24 - Channel average PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Average PSANEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f < 100 100 £ f £ 500 62.25 - 10log(f /100) 62.25 - 15log(f /100) 1) 1) If the average insertion loss of all disturbed pairs at 100 MHz, avgMHzIL,100 , is less than 7 dB, subtract:      -× - ×-× 400 1006, ,100 ,1007 400 1007minimum f avgMHzIL avgMHzILf where: f is the frequency in MHz ∑ = = 4 1 ,1004 1 ,100 i iMHzILavgMHzIL and iMHzIL,100 is the insertion loss of a pair i at 100 MHz ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 37 The channel average PSANEXT loss values in Table 25 are provided for information only. Table 25 - Minimum channel average PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 20.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 67.0 62.50 - n/s n/s 64.3 100.00 - n/s n/s 62.3 200.00 - - n/s 57.7 250.00 - - n/s 56.3 300.00 - - - 55.1 400.00 - - - 53.2 500.00 - - - 51.8 6.2.23 AFEXT loss AFEXT loss is not specified for channels. 6.2.24 PSAFEXT loss PSAFEXT loss is not specified for channels. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 38 6.2.25 PSAACRF Channel PSAACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 26 for all specified frequencies. Channel PSAACRF shall be for information only when channel PSAFEXT loss is greater than either 72-15log(f/100) dB or 67 dB. Calculations that result in category 6A channel PSAACRF values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 26 - Channel PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) PSAACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 37-20log( f /100) The channel PSAACRF values in Table 27 are provided for information only. Table 27 - Minimum channel PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 65.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 58.9 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 57.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 52.9 20.00 - n/s n/s 51.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 49.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 47.1 62.50 - n/s n/s 41.1 100.00 - n/s n/s 37.0 200.00 - - n/s 31.0 250.00 - - n/s 29.0 300.00 - - - 27.5 400.00 - - - 25.0 500.00 - - - 23.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 39 6.2.26 Average PSAACRF Channel average PSAACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 28 for all specified frequencies. Channel average PSAACRF shall be for information only when channel PSAFEXT loss is greater than either 72-15log(f/100) dB or 67 dB. Calculations that result in category 6A channel average PSAACRF values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 28 - Channel average PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) Average PSAACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 41-20log( f /100) The channel average PSAACRF values in Table 29 are provided for information only. Table 29 - Minimum channel average PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 62.9 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 61.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 56.9 20.00 - n/s n/s 55.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 53.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 51.1 62.50 - n/s n/s 45.1 100.00 - n/s n/s 41.0 200.00 - - n/s 35.0 250.00 - - n/s 33.0 300.00 - - - 31.5 400.00 - - - 29.0 500.00 - - - 27.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 40 6.3 Permanent link transmission performance This clause contains the transmission performance specifications for balanced twisted-pair permanent links. The permanent link test configuration is illustrated in figure 4. See Annex J for worst case modeling configurations. Figure 4 - Supplemental schematic representation of a permanent link test configuration 6.3.1 DC loop resistance DC loop resistance for category 3, 5e, 6, and 6A permanent links shall not exceed 21 W. 6.3.2 DC resistance unbalance DC resistance unbalance is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.3 Mutual capacitance Mutual capacitance is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.4 Capacitance unbalance: pair-to-ground Capacitance unbalance is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.5 Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) are not applicable for permanent links. Legend Cables and cords Connecting hardware Test equipment cord .......................... F Telecommunications outlet/ Optional consolidation point cabling .. B connector ..................................... TO Horizontal cabling .............................. C Optional consolidation point connector ............................ CP Horizontal cross-connect or interconnect ................................. C1 Maximum length B + C .................................... 90 m (295 ft) Test equipment F B C F Test equipment CP TO C1 Permanent link under test ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 41 6.3.6 Return loss Permanent link return loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 30 for all specified frequencies. Table 30 – Permanent link return loss Frequency (MHz) Return loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f < 20 20 £ f £ 100 19 19 – 10log( f /20) Category 6 1 £ f < 3 3 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 40 40 £ f £ 250 21+4log( f /3 ) 21 26-5log( f ) 34-10log( f ) Category 6A 1 £ f < 3 3 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 40 40 £ f < 398.1 398.1 £ f £ 500 21+4log( f /3 ) 21 26-5log( f ) 34-10log( f ) 8 The permanent link return loss values in Table 31 are provided for information only. Table 31 - Minimum permanent link return loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 19.0 19.1 19.1 4.00 n/s 19.0 21.0 21.0 8.00 n/s 19.0 21.0 21.0 10.00 n/s 19.0 21.0 21.0 16.00 n/s 19.0 20.0 20.0 20.00 - 19.0 19.5 19.5 25.00 - 18.0 19.0 19.0 31.25 - 17.1 18.5 18.5 62.50 - 14.1 16.0 16.0 100.00 - 12.0 14.0 14.0 200.00 - - 11.0 11.0 250.00 - - 10.0 10.0 300.00 - - - 9.2 400.00 - - - 8.0 500.00 - - - 8.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 42 6.3.7 Insertion loss Permanent link insertion loss limits are derived from equation (20). ∑∑++=linkpermcableconnlinkpermILDossInsertionLossInsertionLossInsertionL__ dB (20) where: mcablecableossInsertionLossInsertionL100,9.0 ×= dB, (21) mcableossInsertionL100, is the insertion loss of 100m of the appropriate category of cable, see clause 6.4.7, connossInsertionL is the insertion loss of the appropriate category of connecting hardware, see clause 6.8.7, and 0_=linkpermILD dB for category 3 and 5e channels (22) 5.1 _00015.0 fILDlinkperm×= dB for category 6 and 6A channels (23) NOTES, 1 The insertion loss of the permanent link does not take into consideration the 0.1 dB measurement floor of the connecting hardware insertion loss requirement. 2 The permanent link insertion loss requirement is derived using the insertion loss contribution of 3 connections 3 For the purposes of field measurements, calculated permanent link limits that result in insertion loss values less than 3 dB revert to a requirement of 3 dB maximum (see ANSI/TIA-1152). ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 43 Permanent link insertion loss shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 32 for all specified frequencies. Table 32 – Permanent link insertion loss Frequency (MHz) Insertion loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 fff1.03)238.032.2(9.0 ×++ Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 f f ff 04.03)05.0023.0967.1(9.0 ×+++ Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 5.100015.018.00153.0687.1 f f ff ×++×+ Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 5.100015.0225.000819.0698.1 f f ff +++ The permanent link insertion loss values in Table 33 are provided for information only. Table 33 - Maximum permanent link insertion loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 2.6 2.1 1.9 1.9 4.00 5.6 3.9 3.5 3.5 8.00 8.5 5.5 5.0 5.0 10.00 9.7 6.2 5.5 5.5 16.00 13.0 7.9 7.0 7.0 20.00 - 8.9 7.9 7.8 25.00 - 10.0 8.9 8.8 31.25 - 11.2 10.0 9.8 62.50 - 16.2 14.4 14.0 100.00 - 21.0 18.6 18.0 200.00 - - 27.4 26.1 250.00 - - 31.1 29.5 300.00 - - - 32.7 400.00 - - - 38.4 500.00 - - - 43.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 44 6.3.8 NEXT loss Permanent link NEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 34 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 3 and 5e permanent link NEXT loss values greater than 60 dB shall revert to a requirement of 60 dB minimum. Calculations that result in category 6 and 6A permanent link NEXT loss values greater than 65 dB shall revert to a requirement of 65 dB minimum. Table 34 - Permanent link NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16      -- + -- -20 ))16/log(209.33( 1020 ))16/log(152.23( 10log20 ff Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100      -- + -- -20 ))100/log(2043( 1020 ))100/log(153.35( 10log20 ff Category 6 1 £ f £ 250      -- + -- -20 ))100/log(2054( 1020 ))100/log(153.44( 10log20 ff Category 6A 1 £ f < 300 300 £ f £ 500      -- + -- -20 ))100/log(2054( 1020 ))100/log(153.44( 10log20 ff )300/log(13.3334 f- NOTE - Permanent link NEXT loss test limits are more stringent than channel NEXT loss test limits to ensure that permanent links can be extended into compliant channels using additional cabling components that meet the minimum specifications in this Standard. When a consolidation point is present in the permanent link, the modeling predictions of permanent link NEXT loss performance using worst case components show margins that can be below the measurement accuracy for the permanent link. NEXT loss performance can be improved by ensuring at least a 5 m (16.4 ft) distance between the consolidation point and the telecommunications outlet connector. Alternatively, channel testing can be performed with compliant channel cabling components that remain in place. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 45 The permanent link NEXT loss values in Table 35 are provided for information only. Table 35 - Minimum permanent link NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 40.1 60.0 65.0 65.0 4.00 30.7 54.8 64.1 64.1 8.00 25.9 50.0 59.4 59.4 10.00 24.3 48.5 57.8 57.8 16.00 21.0 45.2 54.6 54.6 20.00 - 43.7 53.1 53.1 25.00 - 42.1 51.5 51.5 31.25 - 40.5 50.0 50.0 62.50 - 35.7 45.1 45.1 100.00 - 32.3 41.8 41.8 200.00 - - 36.9 36.9 250.00 - - 35.3 35.3 300.00 - - - 34.0 400.00 - - - 29.9 500.00 - - - 26.7 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 46 6.3.9 PSNEXT loss Permanent link PSNEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 36 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 5e permanent link PSNEXT loss values greater than 57 dB shall revert to a requirement of 57 dB minimum. Calculations that result in category 6 and 6A permanent link PSNEXT loss values greater than 62 dB shall revert to a requirement of 62 dB minimum. Table 36 - Permanent link PSNEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSNEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100      -- + -- -20 ))100/log(2040( 1020 ))100/log(153.32( 10log20 ff Category 6 1 £ f £ 250      -- + -- -20 ))100/log(2050( 1020 ))100/log(153.42( 10log20 ff Category 6A 1 £ f < 300 300 £ f £ 500      -- + -- -20 ))100/log(2050( 1020 ))100/log(153.42( 10log20 ff )300/log(44.344.31 f- NOTE - Permanent link PSNEXT loss test limits are more stringent than channel PSNEXT loss test limits to ensure that permanent links can be extended into compliant channels using additional cabling components that meet the minimum specifications in this Standard. When a consolidation point is present in the permanent link, the modeling predictions of permanent link PSNEXT loss performance using worst case components show margins that can be below the measurement accuracy for the permanent link. PSNEXT loss performance can be improved by ensuring at least a 5 m (16.4 ft) distance between the consolidation point and the telecommunications outlet connector. Alternatively, channel testing can be performed with compliant channel cabling components that remain in place. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 47 The permanent link PSNEXT loss values in Table 37 are provided for information only. Table 37 - Minimum permanent link PSNEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 57.0 62.0 62.0 4.00 n/s 51.8 61.8 61.8 8.00 n/s 47.0 57.0 57.0 10.00 n/s 45.5 55.5 55.5 16.00 n/s 42.2 52.2 52.2 20.00 - 40.7 50.7 50.7 25.00 - 39.1 49.1 49.1 31.25 - 37.5 47.5 47.5 62.50 - 32.7 42.7 42.7 100.00 - 29.3 39.3 39.3 200.00 - - 34.3 34.3 250.00 - - 32.7 32.7 300.00 - - - 31.4 400.00 - - - 27.1 500.00 - - - 23.8 6.3.10 FEXT loss FEXT loss is not specified for permanent links. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 48 6.3.11 ACRF Permanent link ACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 38 for all specified frequencies. Due to measurement considerations, permanent link ACRF values that correspond to measured channel FEXT loss values of greater than 67 dB are for information only. Table 38 - Permanent link ACRF Frequency (MHz) ACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.35( 10320 ))100/log(208.23( 10log20 ff Category 6 1 £ f £ 250        -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.43( 10320 ))100/log(208.27( 10log20 ff Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500        -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.43( 10320 ))100/log(208.27( 10log20 ff The permanent link ACRF values in Table 39 are provided for information only. Table 39 - Minimum permanent link ACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 58.6 64.2 64.2 4.00 n/s 46.6 52.1 52.1 8.00 n/s 40.6 46.1 46.1 10.00 n/s 38.6 44.2 44.2 16.00 n/s 34.5 40.1 40.1 20.00 - 32.6 38.2 38.2 25.00 - 30.7 36.2 36.2 31.25 - 28.7 34.3 34.3 62.50 - 22.7 28.3 28.3 100.00 - 18.6 24.2 24.2 200.00 - - 18.2 18.2 250.00 - - 16.2 16.2 300.00 - - - 14.6 400.00 - - - 12.1 500.00 - - - 10.2 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 49 6.3.12 PSFEXT loss PSFEXT loss is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.13 PSACRF Permanent link PSACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 40 for all specified frequencies. Table 40 - Permanent link PSACRF Frequency (MHz) PSACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.32( 10320 ))100/log(208.20( 10log20 ff Category 6 1 £ f £ 250      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.40( 10320 ))100/log(208.24( 10log20 ff Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500      -- ×+ -- -20 ))100/log(201.40( 10320 ))100/log(208.24( 10log20 ff The permanent link PSACRF values in Table 41 are provided for information only. Table 41 - Minimum permanent link PSACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 55.6 61.2 61.2 4.00 n/s 43.6 49.1 49.1 8.00 n/s 37.5 43.1 43.1 10.00 n/s 35.6 41.2 41.2 16.00 n/s 31.5 37.1 37.1 20.00 - 29.6 35.2 35.2 25.00 - 27.7 33.2 33.2 31.25 - 25.7 31.3 31.3 62.50 - 19.7 25.3 25.3 100.00 - 15.6 21.2 21.2 200.00 - - 15.2 15.2 250.00 - - 13.2 13.2 300.00 - - - 11.6 400.00 - - - 9.1 500.00 - - - 7.2 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 50 6.3.14 TCL TCL is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.15 TCTL TCTL is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.16 ELTCTL ELTCL is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.17 Coupling attenuation (screened only) Coupling attenuation is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.18 Propagation delay Permanent link propagation delay shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 42 for all specified frequencies. For field testing permanent links, it is sufficient to test at 10 MHz only and permanent link propagation delay at 10 MHz shall not exceed 498 ns. Table 42 - Permanent link propagation delay Frequency (MHz) Propagation delay (ns) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 )5.23(36534(9.0 ×+      +× f Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )5.23(36534(9.0 ×+      +× f Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )5.23(36534(9.0 ×+      +× f Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 )5.23(36534(9.0 ×+      +× f ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 51 The permanent link propagation delay values in Table 43 are provided for information only. Table 43 - Maximum permanent link propagation delay Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (ns) Category 5e (ns) Category 6 (ns) Category 6A (ns) 1.00 521 521 521 521 4.00 504 504 504 504 8.00 500 500 500 500 10.00 498 498 498 498 16.00 496 496 496 496 20.00 - 495 495 495 25.00 - 495 495 495 31.25 - 494 494 494 62.50 - 492 492 492 100.00 - 491 491 491 200.00 - - 490 490 250.00 - - 490 490 300.00 - - - 490 400.00 - - - 490 500.00 - - - 490 6.3.19 Propagation delay skew Permanent link propagation delay skew shall be less than 44 ns for all frequencies from 1 MHz to the upper frequency limit of the category. For field testing channels, it is sufficient to test at 10 MHz only and permanent link propagation delay skew at 10 MHz shall not exceed 44 ns. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 52 6.3.20 ANEXT loss ANEXT loss is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.21 PSANEXT loss Permanent link PSANEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 44 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 6A permanent link PSANEXT loss values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 44 – Permanent link PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSANEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f < 100 100 £ f £ 500 60 - 10log(f /100) 60 - 15log(f /100) 1) 1) If the average insertion loss of all disturbed pairs at 100 MHz, avgMHzIL,100 , is less than 7 dB, subtract:      -× - ×-× 400 1006, ,100 ,1007 400 1007minimum f avgMHzIL avgMHzILf where: f is the frequency in MHz ∑ = = 4 1 ,1004 1 ,100 i iMHzILavgMHzIL and iMHzIL,100 is the insertion loss of a pair i at 100 MHz ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 53 The permanent link PSANEXT loss values in Table 45 are provided for information only. Table 45 - Permanent link PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 20.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 66.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 65.1 62.50 - n/s n/s 62.0 100.00 - n/s n/s 60.0 200.00 - - n/s 55.5 250.00 - - n/s 54.0 300.00 - - - 52.8 400.00 - - - 51.0 500.00 - - - 49.5 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 54 6.3.22 Average PSANEXT Loss Permanent link average PSANEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 46 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 6A permanent link average PSANEXT loss values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 46 - Permanent link average PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Average PSANEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f < 100 100 £ f £ 500 62.25 - 10log(f /100) 62.25 - 15log(f /100) 1) 1) If the average insertion loss of all disturbed pairs at 100 MHz, avgMHzIL,100 , is less than 7 dB, subtract:      -× - ×-× 400 1006, ,100 ,1007 400 1007minimum f avgMHzIL avgMHzILf where: f is the frequency in MHz ∑ = = 4 1 ,1004 1 ,100 i iMHzILavgMHzIL and iMHzIL,100 is the insertion loss of a pair i at 100 MHz ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 55 The permanent link average PSANEXT loss values in Table 47 are provided for information only. Table 47 - Minimum permanent link average PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 20.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 67.0 62.50 - n/s n/s 64.3 100.00 - n/s n/s 62.3 200.00 - - n/s 57.7 250.00 - - n/s 56.3 300.00 - - - 55.1 400.00 - - - 53.2 500.00 - - - 51.8 6.3.23 AFEXT loss AFEXT loss is not specified for permanent links. 6.3.24 PSAFEXT loss PSAFEXT loss is not specified for permanent links. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 56 6.3.25 PSAACRF Permanent link PSAACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 48 for all specified frequencies. Permanent link PSAACRF shall be for information only when permanent link PSAFEXT loss is greater than either 72-15log(f/100) dB or 67 dB. Calculations that result in category 6A permanent link PSAACRF values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 48 - Permanent link PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) PSAACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 37.7-20log( f /100) The permanent link PSAACRF values in Table 49 are provided for information only. Table 49 - Minimum permanent link PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 65.7 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 59.6 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 57.7 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 53.6 20.00 - n/s n/s 51.7 25.00 - n/s n/s 49.7 31.25 - n/s n/s 47.8 62.50 - n/s n/s 41.8 100.00 - n/s n/s 37.7 200.00 - - n/s 31.7 250.00 - - n/s 29.7 300.00 - - - 28.2 400.00 - - - 25.7 500.00 - - - 23.7 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 57 6.3.26 Average PSAACRF loss Permanent link average PSAACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 50 for all specified frequencies. Permanent link average PSAACRF shall be for information only when permanent link PSAFEXT loss is greater than either 72-15log(f/100) dB or 67 dB. Calculations that result in category 6A permanent link average PSAACRF values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 50 - Permanent link average PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) Average PSAACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 41.7-20log( f /100) The permanent link average PSAACRF values in Table 51 are provided for information only. Table 51 - Minimum permanent link average PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 63.6 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 61.7 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 57.6 20.00 - n/s n/s 55.7 25.00 - n/s n/s 53.7 31.25 - n/s n/s 51.8 62.50 - n/s n/s 45.8 100.00 - n/s n/s 41.7 200.00 - - n/s 35.7 250.00 - - n/s 33.7 300.00 - - - 32.2 400.00 - - - 29.7 500.00 - - - 27.7 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 58 6.4 Horizontal cable transmission performance 6.4.1 DC resistance DC resistance shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D4566 for all horizontal cable pairs. For all categories of horizontal cable, the resistance of any conductor shall not exceed 9.38 W per 100 m (328 ft) at or corrected to a temperature of 20 °C. 6.4.2 DC resistance unbalance For category 3, 5e, and 6 horizontal cable, the resistance unbalance between the two conductors of any cable pair, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4566, shall not exceed 5% when measured at, or corrected to, a temperature of 20 °C. NOTE – This requirement is equivalent to a 2.5% cable dc resistance unbalance when measured in accordance with IEC 61156-1. For category 6A horizontal cable, the resistance unbalance between the two conductors of any cable pair, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4566, shall not exceed 4% when measured at, or corrected to, a temperature of 20 °C. NOTE – This requirement is equivalent to a 2% cable dc resistance unbalance when measured in accordance with IEC 61156-1. 6.4.3 Mutual capacitance Mutual capacitance shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D4566 for all horizontal cable pairs. The mutual capacitance of a category 3 horizontal cable pair at 1 kHz, measured at or corrected to a temperature of 20 °C, should not exceed 6.6 nF per 100 m (328 ft). The mutual capacitance of a category 5e, 6, or 6A horizontal cable pair at 1 kHz, measured at or corrected to a temperature of 20 °C, should not exceed 5.6 nF per 100 m (328 ft). 6.4.4 Capacitance unbalance: pair-to-ground Capacitance unbalance to ground shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D4566 for all horizontal cable pairs. For all categories of horizontal cable, the capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz, measured shall not exceed 330 pF per 100 m (328 ft) at or corrected to a temperature of 20 °C. 6.4.5 Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) Characteristic impedance shall be measured for all cable pairs. Characteristic impedance is not specified for category 5e, 6, and 6A horizontal cables. Category 3 horizontal cables shall exhibit a characteristic impedance of 100 W ±15% when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4566 Method 3 for all frequencies from 1 to 16 MHz. Characteristic impedance has a specific meaning for an ideal transmission line (i.e., a cable whose geometry is fixed and does not vary along the length of cable). NOTE - Characteristic impedance is commonly derived from swept frequency input impedance measurements using a network analyzer with an s-parameter test set. As a result of structural non-uniformities, the measured input impedance for an electrically long length of cable (greater than 1/8 of a wavelength) fluctuates as a function of frequency. These random fluctuations are superimposed on the curve for characteristic impedance, which asymptotically approaches a fixed value at frequencies above 1 MHz. Characteristic impedance can be derived from these measurements by using a smoothing function over the bandwidth of interest. Fluctuations in input impedance are related to the structural return loss for a cable that is terminated in its own characteristic impedance. The values of structural return loss are dependent upon frequency and cable construction. Structural return loss is not specified for category 5e, 6, and 6A horizontal cables. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 59 Structural return loss shall be measured for all horizontal cable pairs. Category 3 horizontal cable structural return loss shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D 4566 Method 3 for all frequencies from 1 to 16 MHz. Horizontal cable structural return loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 52 for all specified frequencies. Table 52 – Horizontal cable structural return loss Frequency (MHz) Structural return loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 10 10 < f £ 16 12 12-10log(f /10) Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 n/s The horizontal cable structural return loss values in Table 53 are provided for information only. Table 53 - Minimum horizontal cable structural return loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 12.0 n/s n/s n/s 4.00 12.0 n/s n/s n/s 8.00 12.0 n/s n/s n/s 10.00 12.0 n/s n/s n/s 16.00 10.0 n/s n/s n/s 20.00 - n/s n/s n/s 25.00 - n/s n/s n/s 31.25 - n/s n/s n/s 62.50 - n/s n/s n/s 100.00 - n/s n/s n/s 200.00 - - n/s n/s 250.00 - - n/s n/s 300.00 - - - n/s 400.00 - - - n/s 500.00 - - - n/s ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 60 6.4.6 Return loss Horizontal cable return loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 54 for all specified frequencies. Table 54 - Horizontal cable return loss Frequency (MHz) Return loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 20 20 £ f £ 100 20+5log( f ) 25 25-7log( f /20) Category 6 1 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 20 20 £ f £ 250 20+5log( f ) 25 25-7log( f /20) Category 6A 1 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 20 20 £ f £ 500 20+5log( f ) 25 25-7log( f /20) The horizontal cable return loss values in Table 55 are provided for information only. Table 55 - Minimum horizontal cable return loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 20.0 20.0 20.0 4.00 n/s 23.0 23.0 23.0 8.00 n/s 24.5 24.5 24.5 10.00 n/s 25.0 25.0 25.0 16.00 n/s 25.0 25.0 25.0 20.00 - 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.00 - 24.3 24.3 24.3 31.25 - 23.6 23.6 23.6 62.50 - 21.5 21.5 21.5 100.00 - 20.1 20.1 20.1 200.00 - - 18.0 18.0 250.00 - - 17.3 17.3 300.00 - - - 16.8 400.00 - - - 15.9 500.00 - - - 15.2 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 61 6.4.7 Insertion loss Insertion loss shall be measured for all horizontal cable pairs at 20 ± 3°C or corrected to a temperat ure of 20 °C using the correction factors specified in thi s clause. The insertion loss for category 5e, 6, and 6A UTP horizontal cables shall be adjusted at elevated temperatures using a factor of 0.4 % increase per °C from 20 °C to 40 °C and 0.6% increase per °C for te mperatures from 40 °C to 60 °C. The insertion loss for category 5e, 6, and 6A screened horizontal cables shall be adjusted at elevated temperatures using a factor of 0.2% increase per °C from 20 °C to 60 °C. See Annex G for additional information on cable installation in higher temperature environments. Horizontal cable insertion loss shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 56 for all specified frequencies. In addition, category 6 and 6A horizontal cable insertion loss shall also be verified at temperatures of 40 ± 3 °C and 60 ± 3 °C and shall meet the requirements of Table 56 after adjusting for temperature. Table 56 - Horizontal cable insertion loss, for a length of 100m (328 ft) Frequency (MHz) Insertion loss (dB) Category 3 0.772 £ f £ 16 ff×+238.0320.2 Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 f ff 050.0023.0967.1 +×+ Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 f ff 2.0017.0808.1 +×+ Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 f ff 25.00091.082.1 +×+ NOTE - The insertion loss of some category 3 UTP cables, such as those constructed with PVC insulation, exhibits significant temperature dependence. A temperature coefficient of insertion loss of 1.5 % per °C is not uncommon for such cable s. In installations where the cable will be subjected to higher temperatures, a less-temperature dependent cable should be considered. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 62 The horizontal cable insertion loss values in Table 57 are provided for information only. Table 57 - Maximum horizontal cable insertion loss, for a length of 100m (328 ft) Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 0.772 2.2 n/s n/s n/s 1.00 2.6 2.0 2.0 2.1 4.00 5.6 4.1 3.8 3.8 8.00 8.5 5.8 5.3 5.3 10.00 9.7 6.5 6.0 5.9 16.00 13.1 8.2 7.6 7.5 20.00 - 9.3 8.5 8.4 25.00 - 10.4 9.5 9.4 31.25 - 11.7 10.7 10.5 62.50 - 17.0 15.4 15.0 100.00 - 22.0 19.8 19.1 200.00 - - 29.0 27.6 250.00 - - 32.8 31.1 300.00 - - - 34.3 400.00 - - - 40.1 500.00 - - - 45.3 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 63 6.4.8 NEXT loss Horizontal cable NEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 58 for all specified frequencies. Table 58 - Horizontal cable NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB) Category 3 0.772 £ f £ 16 )16/log(152.23 f- Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(153.35 f- Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(153.44 f- Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(153.44 f- The horizontal cable NEXT loss values in Table 59 are provided for information only. Table 59 - Minimum horizontal cable NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 0.772 43.0 n/s n/s n/s 1.00 41.3 65.3 74.3 74.3 4.00 32.3 56.3 65.3 65.3 8.00 27.8 51.8 60.8 60.8 10.00 26.3 50.3 59.3 59.3 16.00 23.2 47.2 56.2 56.2 20.00 - 45.8 54.8 54.8 25.00 - 44.3 53.3 53.3 31.25 - 42.9 51.9 51.9 62.50 - 38.4 47.4 47.4 100.00 - 35.3 44.3 44.3 200.00 - - 39.8 39.8 250.00 - - 38.3 38.3 300.00 - - - 37.1 400.00 - - - 35.3 500.00 - - - 33.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 64 6.4.9 PSNEXT loss Horizontal cable PSNEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 60 for all specified frequencies. Table 60 - Horizontal cable PSNEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSNEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(153.32 f- Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(153.42 f- Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(153.42 f- The horizontal cable PSNEXT loss values in Table 61 are provided for information only. Table 61 - Minimum horizontal cable PSNEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 62.3 72.3 72.3 4.00 n/s 53.3 63.3 63.3 8.00 n/s 48.8 58.8 58.8 10.00 n/s 47.3 57.3 57.3 16.00 n/s 44.2 54.2 54.2 20.00 - 42.8 52.8 52.8 25.00 - 41.3 51.3 51.3 31.25 - 39.9 49.9 49.9 62.50 - 35.4 45.4 45.4 100.00 - 32.3 42.3 42.3 200.00 - - 37.8 37.8 250.00 - - 36.3 36.3 300.00 - - - 35.1 400.00 - - - 33.3 500.00 - - - 31.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 65 6.4.10 FEXT loss FEXT loss is not specified for horizontal cables. 6.4.11 ACRF Horizontal cable ACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 62 for all specified frequencies, for a length of 100 m (328 ft) or longer. Table 62 - Horizontal cable ACRF Frequency (MHz) ACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(208.23 f- Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(208.27 f- Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(208.27 f- The horizontal cable ACRF values in Table 63 are provided for information only. Table 63 - Minimum horizontal cable ACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 63.8 67.8 67.8 4.00 n/s 51.8 55.8 55.8 8.00 n/s 45.7 49.7 49.7 10.00 n/s 43.8 47.8 47.8 16.00 n/s 39.7 43.7 43.7 20.00 - 37.8 41.8 41.8 25.00 - 35.8 39.8 39.8 31.25 - 33.9 37.9 37.9 62.50 - 27.9 31.9 31.9 100.00 - 23.8 27.8 27.8 200.00 - - 21.8 21.8 250.00 - - 19.8 19.8 300.00 - - - 18.3 400.00 - - - 15.8 500.00 - - - 13.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 66 6.4.12 PSFEXT loss PSFEXT loss is not specified for horizontal cable. 6.4.13 PSACRF Horizontal cable PSACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 64 for all specified frequencies. Table 64 - Horizontal cable PSACRF Frequency (MHz) PSACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(208.20 f- Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(208.24 f- Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(208.24 f- The horizontal cable PSACRF values in Table 65 are provided for information only. Table 65 - Minimum horizontal cable PSACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 60.8 64.8 64.8 4.00 n/s 48.8 52.8 52.8 8.00 n/s 42.7 46.7 46.7 10.00 n/s 40.8 44.8 44.8 16.00 n/s 36.7 40.7 40.7 20.00 - 34.8 38.8 38.8 25.00 - 32.8 36.8 36.8 31.25 - 30.9 34.9 34.9 62.50 - 24.9 28.9 28.9 100.00 - 20.8 24.8 24.8 200.00 - - 18.8 18.8 250.00 - - 16.8 16.8 300.00 - - - 15.3 400.00 - - - 12.8 500.00 - - - 10.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 67 6.4.14 TCL Horizontal cable TCL shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 66 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 6 and 6A horizontal cable TCL values greater than 40 dB shall revert to a requirement of 40 dB minimum. Table 66 - Horizontal cable TCL Frequency (MHz) TCL (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 30 – 10log( f /100 ) Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 30 – 10log( f /100 ) The horizontal cable TCL values in Table 67 are provided for information only. Table 67 - Minimum horizontal cable TCL Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 4.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 8.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 10.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 16.00 n/s n/s 38.0 38.0 20.00 - n/s 37.0 37.0 25.00 - n/s 36.0 36.0 31.25 - n/s 35.1 35.1 62.50 - n/s 32.0 32.0 100.00 - n/s 30.0 30.0 200.00 - - 27.0 27.0 250.00 - - 26.0 26.0 300.00 - - - 25.2 400.00 - - - 24.0 500.00 - - - 23.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 68 6.4.15 TCTL TCTL is not specified for horizontal cables. 6.4.16 ELTCTL Horizontal cable ELTCTL shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 68 for all specified frequencies. Table 68 – Horizontal cable ELTCTL Frequency (MHz) ELTCTL (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 30 30 < f £ 250 35 – 20log( f ) n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 30 30 < f £ 500 35 – 20log( f ) n/s The horizontal cable ELTCTL values in Table 69 are provided for information only. Table 69 - Minimum horizontal cable ELTCL Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s 35.0 35.0 4.00 n/s n/s 23.0 23.0 8.00 n/s n/s 16.9 16.9 10.00 n/s n/s 15.0 15.0 16.00 n/s n/s 10.9 10.9 20.00 - n/s 9.0 9.0 25.00 - n/s 7.0 7.0 30.00 n/s 5.5 5.5 31.25 - n/s n/s n/s 62.50 - n/s n/s n/s 100.00 - n/s n/s n/s 200.00 - n/s n/s n/s 250.00 - - n/s n/s 300.00 - - n/s n/s 400.00 - - - n/s 500.00 - - - n/s ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 69 6.4.17 Coupling attenuation (screened only) Coupling attenuation is under study. Horizontal cable coupling attenuation shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 70 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in horizontal cable coupling attenuation values greater than 55 dB shall revert to a requirement of 55 dB minimum. Table 70 - Horizontal cable coupling attenuation Frequency (MHz) Coupling attenuation (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 30 30 £ f £ 100 n/s 55 – 20log( f /100 ) Category 6 1 £ f < 30 30 £ f £ 250 n/s 55 – 20log( f /100 ) Category 6A 1 £ f < 30 30 £ f £ 500 n/s 55 – 20log( f /100 ) The horizontal cable coupling attenuation values in Table 71 are provided for information only. Table 71 - Minimum horizontal cable coupling attenuation Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s n/s 4.00 n/s n/s n/s n/s 8.00 n/s n/s n/s n/s 10.00 n/s n/s n/s n/s 16.00 n/s n/s n/s n/s 20.00 - n/s n/s n/s 25.00 - n/s n/s n/s 30.00 - 55.0 55.0 55.0 31.25 - 55.0 55.0 55.0 62.50 - 55.0 55.0 55.0 100.00 - 55.0 55.0 55.0 200.00 - - 49.0 49.0 250.00 - - 47.0 47.0 300.00 - - - 45.5 400.00 - - - 43.0 500.00 - - - 41.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 70 6.4.18 Propagation delay Horizontal cable propagation delay shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 72 for all specified frequencies for a length of 100 m (328 ft). See Annex H for the derivation of the equations shown in Table 72. Table 72 – Horizontal cable propagation delay Frequency (MHz) Propagation delay (ns/100m) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 )36534( f + Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )36534( f + Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )36534( f + Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 )36534( f + The horizontal cable propagation delay values in Table 73 are provided for information only. Table 73 - Maximum horizontal cable propagation delay Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (ns/100m) Category 5e (ns/100m) Category 6 (ns/100m) Category 6A (ns/100m) 1.00 570 570 570 570 4.00 552 552 552 552 8.00 547 547 547 547 10.00 545 545 545 545 16.00 543 543 543 543 20.00 - 542 542 542 25.00 - 541 541 541 31.25 - 540 540 540 62.50 - 539 539 539 100.00 - 538 538 538 200.00 - - 537 537 250.00 - - 536 536 300.00 - - - 536 400.00 - - - 536 500.00 - - - 536 6.4.19 Propagation delay skew Horizontal cable propagation delay skew shall be less than 45ns/100m at 20 °C, 40 °C, and 60 °C for al l frequencies from 1 MHz to the upper frequency limit of the category. In addition, the propagation delay skew between all pairs shall not vary more than ± 10 ns from the measured value at 20 °C when measured at 40 °C and 60 °C. Compliance shall be d etermined using a minimum 100 m (328 ft) of cable. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 71 6.4.20 Surface transfer impedance (screened only) The surface transfer impedance per unit length of the core shield, measured in accordance with IEC 62153-4-3 (surface transfer impedance triaxial method), shall not exceed the values determined using equation (24). Calculations that result in surface transfer impedance values less than 50 mW/m shall revert to a requirement of 50 mW/m minimum. fZTcable10= mW/m (24) where: ZTcable is surface transfer impedance in mW/m f is the frequency in MHz over the range of 1 MHz to 16 MHz for category 3 cables and 1 MHz to 100 MHz for category 5e, 6, and 6A cables. The values in Table 74 are derived from the above formula and provided for information only. Table 74 - Maximum cable surface transfer impedance Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (mWWWW/m) Category 5e (mWWWW/m) Category 6 (mWWWW/m) Category 6A (mWWWW/m) 1 50 50 50 50 10 100 100 100 100 16 160 160 160 160 20 - 200 200 200 100 - 1,000 1,000 1,000 6.4.21 ANEXT loss ANEXT loss is not specified for horizontal cables. 6.4.22 PSANEXT loss Horizontal cable PSANEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 75 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in PSANEXT loss values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 75 - Horizontal cable PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSANEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 62.5 - 15log(f /100) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 72 The horizontal cable PSANEXT loss values in Table 76 are provided for information only. Table 76 - Minimum horizontal cable PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 20.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 67.0 62.50 - n/s n/s 65.6 100.00 - n/s n/s 62.5 200.00 - - n/s 58.0 250.00 - - n/s 56.5 300.00 - - - 55.3 400.00 - - - 53.5 500.00 - - - 52.0 6.4.23 Average PSANEXT loss Average PSANEXT loss is not specified for horizontal cables. 6.4.24 AFEXT loss AFEXT loss is not specified for horizontal cables. 6.4.25 PSAFEXT loss PSAFEXT loss is not specified for horizontal cables. 6.4.26 PSAACRF Horizontal cable PSAACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 77 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in horizontal cable PSAACRF values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum Table 77 - Horizontal cable PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) PSAACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 38.2-20log( f /100) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 73 The horizontal cable PSAACRF values in Table 78 are provided for information only. Table 78 - Minimum horizontal cable PSAACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 66.2 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 60.1 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 58.2 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 54.1 20.00 - n/s n/s 52.2 25.00 - n/s n/s 50.2 31.25 - n/s n/s 48.3 62.50 - n/s n/s 42.3 100.00 - n/s n/s 38.2 200.00 - - n/s 32.2 250.00 - - n/s 30.2 300.00 - - - 28.7 400.00 - - - 26.2 500.00 - - - 24.2 6.4.27 Average PSAACRF Average PSAACRF is not specified for horizontal cable. 6.5 Bundled and hybrid cable transmission performance Bundled and hybrid cables may be used for horizontal and backbone cabling provided that each cable type is recognized (see clause 4.2 of this Standard) and meets the transmission and color-code specifications for that cable type as given in clause 5.3 and clause 6.4 of this Standard and ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, The individual cables within a bundled cable shall meet the applicable requirements in clause 6.4 of this Standard after bundle formation. NOTES, 1 Hybrid UTP cables (color coded per clause 5.3.3) can be distinguished from multipair UTP backbone cables (color coded per clause 5.6.3) by the color coding scheme and by the transmission requirements. 2 Hybrid cables consisting of optical fiber and copper conductors are sometimes referred to as composite cables. 6.5.1 PSNEXT loss The PSNEXT loss for any disturbed pair and all pairs external to that pair’s jacket within the bundled or hybrid cable shall be 3 dB better than the specified pair-to-pair NEXT loss of that recognized cable type at all of the specified frequencies (or ranges). Calculated PSNEXT loss limit values that exceed 65 dB shall revert to a limit of 65 dB. 6.5.2 PSNEXT loss from internal and external pairs (category 6 cables only) For category 6 bundled and hybrid cables, for all frequencies from 1 MHz to 250 MHz, the total power sum NEXT loss for any disturbed pair from all pairs internal and external to that pair’s jacket within the bundled or hybrid cable shall not exceed the values determined using equation (25). Calculated power sum NEXT loss limit values that exceed 65 dB shall revert to a limit of 65 dB. )100/log(151.41_,__fPSNEXTpairsallhtbridandbundled-³ (25) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 74 6.6 Cord cable Cord cables shall meet the transmission performance requirements specified for horizontal cable in clause 6.4, with the exception of the requirements of this clause. 6.6.1 DC resistance DC resistance shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D4566 for all cord cable pairs. For all categories of cord cable, the resistance of any UTP or screened cord cable conductor shall not exceed 14 W per 100 m (328 ft) at or corrected to a temperature of 20 °C. 6.6.2 Return loss Cord cable return loss, for a length of 100 m (328 ft), shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 79 for all specified frequencies. Table 79 - Cord cable return loss Frequency (MHz) Return loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 20 20 £ f £ 100 20+5log( f ) 25 25-8.6log( f /20) Category 6 1 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 20 20 £ f £ 250 20+5log( f ) 25 25-8.6log( f /20) Category 6A 1 £ f < 10 10 £ f < 20 20 £ f £ 500 20+5log( f ) 25 25-8.6log( f /20) The cord return loss values in Table 80 are provided for information only. Table 80 - Minimum cord cable return loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 20.0 20.0 20.0 4.00 n/s 23.0 23.0 23.0 8.00 n/s 24.5 24.5 24.5 10.00 n/s 25.0 25.0 25.0 16.00 n/s 25.0 25.0 25.0 20.00 - 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.00 - 24.2 24.2 24.2 31.25 - 23.3 23.3 23.3 62.50 - 20.7 20.7 20.7 100.00 - 19.0 19.0 19.0 200.00 - - 16.4 16.4 250.00 - - 15.6 15.6 300.00 - - - 14.9 400.00 - - - 13.8 500.00 - - - 13.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 75 6.6.3 Insertion loss Cord cable insertion loss limits are derived by multiplying the applicable horizontal cable insertion loss requirements in clause 6.4.7 by a factor of 1.2 (the de-rating factor). The de-rating factor is to allow a 20% increase in insertion loss for stranded construction and design differences. An insertion loss de-rating factor of 1.5 for cord cable is allowed with the appropriate length adjustment such that the combined length of equipment cords, patch cords, and work area cords that use 50% insertion loss de-rating (e.g. cables with twisted-pairs having 26 AWG conductors) shall not be greater than 8.0 m (25.7 ft). The maximum insertion loss for UTP cord cables shall be adjusted at elevated temperatures using a factor of 0.4 % increase per °C from 20 °C to 40 °C and 0.6% increase per °C for temperatures from 40 °C to 60 °C. The maximum insertion loss for sc reened cord cables shall be adjusted at elevated temperatures using a factor of 0.2% increase per °C from 20 °C to 60 °C. See Annex G for additional information on cable installation in higher temperature environments. Cord cable insertion loss shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 81 for all specified frequencies. In addition, category 6 and 6A cord cable insertion loss shall also be verified at temperatures of 40 ± 3 °C and 60 ± 3 °C and shall meet the requirements of Table 81 af ter adjusting for temperature. Table 81 - Cord cable insertion loss, for a length of 100m (328 ft) Frequency (MHz) Insertion loss (dB) Category 3 0.772 £ f £ 16 ()ff×+× 238.0320.22.1 Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100       +×+× f ff 050.0023.0967.12.1 Category 6 1 £ f £ 250       +×+× f ff 2.0017.0808.12.1 Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500       +×+× f ff 25.00091.082.12.1 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 76 The cord cable insertion loss values in Table 82 are provided for information only. Table 82 - Maximum cord cable insertion loss, for a length of 100m (328 ft) Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 0.772 2.7 n/s n/s n/s 1.00 3.1 2.4 2.4 2.5 4.00 6.7 4.9 4.5 4.6 8.00 10.2 6.9 6.4 6.4 10.00 11.7 7.8 7.1 7.1 16.00 15.7 9.9 9.1 9.0 20.00 - 11.1 10.2 10.0 25.00 - 12.5 11.4 11.3 31.25 - 14.1 12.8 12.6 62.50 - 20.4 18.5 18.0 100.00 - 26.4 23.8 22.9 200.00 - - 34.8 33.1 250.00 - - 39.4 37.3 300.00 - - - 41.2 400.00 - - - 48.1 500.00 - - - 54.4 6.7 Backbone cable transmission performance Backbone cables shall meet the transmission performance requirements specified for horizontal cable in clause 6.4, with the exception of the requirements of this clause. NOTE – Only four-pair horizontal cables are recognized for use in category 6 and 6A backbone cabling. 6.7.1 Insertion loss Insertion loss for all pairs shall comply with the requirements of clause 6.4.7 with the following exception: due to practical considerations related to the testing of cables with multiple 25-pair bundles, insertion loss testing at elevated temperatures is not required for multipair backbone cables provided that each pair in the binder group exhibits compliant insertion loss performance. 6.7.2 NEXT loss NEXT loss shall be measured for all adjacent 4-pair combinations. Backbone cable NEXT loss shall be measured in accordance with clause C.3.6 and the ASTM D 4566 NEXT loss measurement procedure for all frequencies from 1 MHz up to the maximum frequency specified for the category of the cable under test. To assess performance between adjacent 4-pair units, multipair backbone cables are evaluated in groups (i.e. group 1 = pairs 1 to 4, group 2 = pairs 5 to 8, group 3 = pairs 9 to 12, group 4 = pairs 13 to 16, group 5 = pairs 17 to 20, group 6 = pairs 21 to 24, etc.). Groups are comprised of consecutive pairs, marked per the standard color code. For 25-pair and multiple of 25-pair binder groups, the twenty-fifth pair shall satisfy all other transmission parameters when used within any 4-pair group. NEXT loss shall be measured at 100 meter or longer lengths. In cases where multipair backbone cables consist of more than one 25-pair binder group, NEXT loss shall be determined for each individual 25-pair binder group. There are no NEXT loss requirements between 25-pair groups. The cable shall be tested only as individual 25-pair units. Test fixtures shall provide for consistent common and differential mode impedance matching for the unjacketed twisted-pairs between the cable jacket and the balun terminations. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 77 Backbone cable NEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 83 for all specified frequencies, for a length of 100 m (328 ft) or longer. Table 83 – Backbone cable NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e (pair-to- pair combinations within each category 5e multipair cable 4-pair group) 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(153.35 f- Category 5e (between the 25th pair and all other pairs within the 25-pair binder group) 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(153.35 f- Category 6 (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(153.44 f- Category 6A (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(153.44 f- The backbone cable NEXT loss values in Table 84 are provided for information only. Table 84 - Minimum backbone cable NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (within 4-pair group) (dB) Category 5e (25th to all other pairs) (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 65.3 65.3 74.3 74.3 4.00 n/s 56.3 56.3 65.3 65.3 8.00 n/s 51.8 51.8 60.8 60.8 10.00 n/s 50.3 50.3 59.3 59.3 16.00 n/s 47.2 47.2 56.2 56.2 20.00 - 45.8 45.8 54.8 54.8 25.00 - 44.3 44.3 53.3 53.3 31.25 - 42.9 42.9 51.9 51.9 62.50 - 38.4 38.4 47.4 47.4 100.00 - 35.3 35.3 44.3 44.3 200.00 - - - 39.8 39.8 250.00 - - - 38.3 38.3 300.00 - - - - 37.1 400.00 - - - - 35.3 500.00 - - - - 33.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 78 6.7.3 PSNEXT loss In cases where multipair backbone cables consist of more than one 25-pair binder group, PSNEXT loss shall be determined for each individual 25-pair binder group. There are no PSNEXT loss requirements between 25-pair groups. The cable shall be tested only as individual 25-pair units. Backbone cable PSNEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 85 for all specified frequencies, for a length of 100 m (328 ft) or longer. Table 85 - Backbone cable PSNEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSNEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 )16/log(1523 f- Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(153.32 f- Category 6 (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(153.42 f- Category 6A (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(153.42 f- The backbone cable PSNEXT loss values in Table 86 are provided for information only. Table 86 - Minimum backbone cable PSNEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 41.3 62.3 72.3 72.3 4.00 32.3 53.3 63.3 63.3 8.00 27.8 48.8 58.8 58.8 10.00 26.3 47.3 57.3 57.3 16.00 23.2 44.2 54.2 54.2 20.00 - 42.8 52.8 52.8 25.00 - 41.3 51.3 51.3 31.25 - 39.9 49.9 49.9 62.50 - 35.4 45.4 45.4 100.00 - 32.3 42.3 42.3 200.00 - - 37.8 37.8 250.00 - - 36.3 36.3 300.00 - - - 35.1 400.00 - - - 33.3 500.00 - - - 31.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 79 6.7.4 ACRF FEXT loss shall be measured for all adjacent 4-pair combinations in accordance with the ASTM D4566 FEXT loss measurement procedure and annex C. Backbone cable FEXT loss shall be measured in accordance with clause C.3.8 and the ASTM D 4566 FEXT loss measurement procedure for all frequencies from 1 MHz up to the maximum frequency specified for the category of the cable under test.. To assess performance between adjacent 4-pair units, multipair backbone cables are evaluated in groups (i.e. group 1 = pairs 1 to 4, group 2 = pairs 5 to 8, group 3 = pairs 9 to 12, group 4 = pairs 13 to 16, group 5 = pairs 17 to 20, group 6 = pairs 21 to 24, etc.). Groups are comprised of consecutive pairs, marked per the standard color code. For 25-pair and multiple of 25-pair binder groups, the twenty-fifth pair shall satisfy all other transmission parameters when used within any 4-pair group. ACRF shall be calculated for all backbone cable pair combinations by subtracting the insertion loss of the disturbed pair of the backbone cable from the FEXT loss. In cases where multipair backbone cables consist of more than one 25-pair binder group, ACRF shall be determined for each individual 25-pair binder group. There are no ACRF requirements between 25-pair groups. The cable shall be tested only as individual 25-pair units. Test fixtures shall provide for consistent common and differential mode impedance matching for the unjacketed twisted-pairs between the cable jacket and the balun terminations. NOTE - ACRF has been referred to as ELFEXT in previous editions of this Standard. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 80 Backbone cable ACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 87 for all specified frequencies, for a length of 100 m (328 ft) or longer. Table 87 - Backbone cable ACRF Frequency (MHz) ACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e (pair-to- pair combinations within each category 5e multipair cable 4-pair group) 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(208.23 f- Category 5e (between the 25th pair and all other pairs within the 25-pair binder group) 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(208.23 f- Category 6 (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(208.27 f- Category 6A (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(208.27 f- The backbone cable ACRF values in Table 88 are provided for information only. Table 88 - Minimum backbone cable ACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (within 4-pair group) (dB) Category 5e (25th to all other pairs) (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 63.8 63.8 67.8 67.8 4.00 n/s 51.8 51.8 55.8 55.8 8.00 n/s 45.7 45.7 49.7 49.7 10.00 n/s 43.8 43.8 47.8 47.8 16.00 n/s 39.7 39.7 43.7 43.7 20.00 - 37.8 37.8 41.8 41.8 25.00 - 35.8 35.8 39.8 39.8 31.25 - 33.9 33.9 37.9 37.9 62.50 - 27.9 27.9 31.9 31.9 100.00 - 23.8 23.8 27.8 27.8 200.00 - - - 21.8 21.8 250.00 - - - 19.8 19.8 300.00 - - - - 18.3 400.00 - - - - 15.8 500.00 - - - - 13.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 81 6.7.5 PSACRF In cases where multipair backbone cables consist of more than one 25-pair binder group, PSACRF shall be determined for each individual 25-pair binder group. There are no PSACRF requirements between 25-pair groups. The cable shall be tested only as individual 25-pair units. NOTE - Generally, power sum crosstalk energy is dominated by the coupling between pairs in close proximity and is relatively unaffected by pairs in separate binder groups. Therefore, it is desirable to separate services with different signal levels or services that are susceptible to impulse noise into separate binder groups. See ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 for more information. Backbone cable PSACRF shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 89 for all specified frequencies, for a length of 100 m (328 ft) or longer. Table 89 - Backbone cable PSACRF Frequency (MHz) PSACRF (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(208.20 f- Category 6 (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(208.24 f- Category 6A (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(208.24 f- The backbone cable PSACRF values in Table 90 are provided for information only. Table 90 - Minimum backbone cable PSACRF Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 60.8 64.8 64.8 4.00 n/s 48.8 52.8 52.8 8.00 n/s 42.7 46.7 46.7 10.00 n/s 40.8 44.8 44.8 16.00 n/s 36.7 40.7 40.7 20.00 - 34.8 38.8 38.8 25.00 - 32.8 36.8 36.8 31.25 - 30.9 34.9 34.9 62.50 - 24.9 28.9 28.9 100.00 - 20.8 24.8 24.8 200.00 - - 18.8 18.8 250.00 - - 16.8 16.8 300.00 - - - 15.3 400.00 - - - 12.8 500.00 - - - 10.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 82 6.7.6 Propagation delay Backbone cable propagation delay shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 91 for all specified frequencies for a length of 100 m (328 ft). See Annex H for the derivation of the equations shown in Table 91. Table 91 – Backbone cable propagation delay Frequency (MHz) Propagation Delay (ns/100m) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )36534( f + Category 6 (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 250 )36534( f + Category 6A (4-pair cables only) 1 £ f £ 500 )36534( f + The backbone propagation delay values in Table 92 are provided for information only. Table 92 - Maximum backbone cable propagation delay Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 570 570 570 4.00 n/s 552 552 552 8.00 n/s 547 547 547 10.00 n/s 545 545 545 16.00 n/s 543 543 543 20.00 - 542 542 542 25.00 - 541 541 541 31.25 - 540 540 540 62.50 - 539 539 539 100.00 - 538 538 538 200.00 - - 537 537 250.00 - - 536 536 300.00 - - - 536 400.00 - - - 536 500.00 - - - 536 6.7.7 Propagation delay skew Category 5e, 6, and 6A 4-pair backbone cable propagation delay skew shall meet the requirements for horizontal cables as specified in clause 6.4.19. Category 5e backbone multipair cable propagation delay skew within all sequential 4-pair groups (i.e. group 1 = pairs 1 to 4, group 2 = pairs 5 to 8, group 3 = pairs 9 to 12, group 4 = pairs 13 to 16, group 5 = pairs 17 to 20, group 6 = pairs 21 to 24, etc.) shall meet the requirements for horizontal cables as specified in clause 6.4.19. For 25-pair and multiples of 25-pair binder groups, the 25th pair shall be designed to support the propagation delay and delay requirements when used with any other pair within the binder group. Propagation delay skew is not specified for category 3 backbone cables. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 83 6.8 Connecting hardware transmission performance Compliance to the requirements of this clause shall ensure that properly installed connecting hardware will have minimal effects on cable performance. These requirements are applicable to individual connectors and connector assemblies that include, but are not limited to, telecommunications outlet/connectors, patch panels, consolidation points, transition points, and cross-connect blocks and work area, patch, and equipment cords. NOTE - The residential telecommunications outlet has the same requirements as the telecommunications outlet/connector described in this clause. See ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 for guidance and requirements on connector termination practices, cable management, the use of patch cords or cross-connect jumpers, and the effects of multiple connections. It is desirable that hardware used to terminate cables be of the insulation displacement connection (IDC) type. Connecting hardware for the 100 W balanced twisted-pair cabling system is installed at the following locations: a) main cross-connect, b) intermediate cross-connect, c) horizontal cross-connect, d) horizontal cabling transition points, e) consolidation point, and f) telecommunications outlet/connectors. Typical cross-connect facilities consist of cross-connect jumpers or patch cords and terminal blocks or patch panels that are connected directly to horizontal or backbone cabling. NOTE- This Standard does not address requirements for equipment connectors, media adapters or other devices utilizing passive or active electronic circuitry (i.e., impedance matching transformers, ISDN resistors, MAUs, filters, network interface devices, and protection devices) whose main purpose is to serve a specific application or provide safety compliance. Such cabling adapters and protection devices are regarded as premises equipment that are not considered to be part of the cabling system. Unless otherwise specified, all products with plug and socket connections (e.g. modular jacks and plugs) shall be tested in a mated state. 6.8.1 DC resistance DC resistance shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D4566 at 20 °C ± 3 °C for all connecting hardware cable pairs. NOTE – DC resistance is a separate measurement from contact resistance as specified in Annex A. Whereas DC resistance is measured to determine the connector’s ability of transmit direct current and low frequency signals, contact resistance is measured to determine the reliability and stability of individual electrical connections. Category 3 connecting hardware DC resistance between the input and the output connections of the connecting hardware (not including the cable stub, if any) used to terminate 100 W twisted-pair cabling shall not exceed 0.3 W . Category 5e, 6, and 6A connecting hardware DC resistance between the input and the output connections of the connecting hardware (not including the cable stub, if any) used to terminate 100 W twisted-pair cabling shall not exceed 0.2 W. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 84 6.8.2 DC resistance unbalance DC resistance unbalance shall be calculated as the maximum difference in DC resistance between any two conductors of a connector pair measured in accordance with IEC 60512, Test 2a. Category 3 connecting hardware DC resistance unbalance should not exceed 50 mW. Category 5e, 6 and 6A connecting hardware DC resistance unbalance shall not exceed 50 mW. 6.8.3 Mutual capacitance Mutual capacitance is not specified for connecting hardware. 6.8.4 Capacitance unbalance: pair-to-ground Capacitance unbalance to ground is not specified for connecting hardware. 6.8.5 Characteristic impedance and structural return loss (SRL) Characteristic impedance is not specified for connecting hardware. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 85 6.8.6 Return loss Connecting hardware return loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 93 for all specified frequencies. Table 93 - Connecting hardware return loss Frequency (MHz) Return loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 31.5 31.5 < f £ 100 30 20-20log( f /100) Category 6 1 £ f £ 50 50 < f £ 250 30 24-20log( f /100) Category 6A 1 £ f £ 79 79 < f £ 500 30 28-20log( f /100) The connecting hardware return loss values in Table 94 are provided for information only. Table 94 - Minimum connecting hardware return loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 30.0 30.0 30.0 4.00 n/s 30.0 30.0 30.0 8.00 n/s 30.0 30.0 30.0 10.00 n/s 30.0 30.0 30.0 16.00 n/s 30.0 30.0 30.0 20.00 - 30.0 30.0 30.0 25.00 - 30.0 30.0 30.0 31.25 - 30.0 30.0 30.0 62.50 - 24.1 28.1 30.0 100.00 - 20.0 24.0 28.0 200.00 - - 18.0 22.0 250.00 - - 16.0 20.0 300.00 - - - 18.5 400.00 - - - 16.0 500.00 - - - 14.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 86 6.8.7 Insertion loss Connecting hardware insertion loss shall meet or be less than the values determined using the equations shown in Table 95 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in insertion loss values less than 0.1 dB shall revert to a requirement of 0.1 dB maximum. Table 95 – Connecting hardware insertion loss Frequency (MHz) Insertion loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 f10.0 Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 f04.0 Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 f02.0 Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 f02.0 The connecting hardware insertion loss values in Table 96 are provided for information only. Table 96 - Maximum connecting hardware insertion loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 4.00 0.20 0.10 0.10 0.10 8.00 0.28 0.11 0.10 0.10 10.00 0.32 0.13 0.10 0.10 16.00 0.40 0.16 0.10 0.10 20.00 - 0.18 0.10 0.10 25.00 - 0.20 0.10 0.10 31.25 - 0.22 0.11 0.11 62.50 - 0.32 0.16 0.16 100.00 - 0.40 0.20 0.20 200.00 - - 0.28 0.28 250.00 - - 0.32 0.32 300.00 - - - 0.35 400.00 - - - 0.40 500.00 - - - 0.45 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 87 6.8.8 NEXT loss Connecting hardware NEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 97 for all specified frequencies. Categor y 3 and 5e NEXT loss calculations that result in NEXT loss values greater than 65 dB shall revert to a requirement of 65 dB minimum. Category 6 and 6A NEXT loss calculations that result in NEXT loss values greater than 75 dB shall revert to a requirement of 75 dB minimum. Table 97 – Connecting hardware NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 )16/log(2034 f- Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(2043 f- Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(2054 f- Category 6A 1 £ f £ 250 250 < f £ 500 )100/log(2054 f- )250/log(4004.46 f- The connecting hardware NEXT loss values in Table 98 are provided for information only. Table 98 - Minimum connecting hardware NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 58.1 65.0 75.0 75.0 4.00 46.0 65.0 75.0 75.0 8.00 40.0 64.9 75.0 75.0 10.00 38.1 63.0 74.0 74.0 16.00 34.0 58.9 69.9 69.9 20.00 - 57.0 68.0 68.0 25.00 - 55.0 66.0 66.0 31.25 - 53.1 64.1 64.1 62.50 - 47.1 58.1 58.1 100.00 - 43.0 54.0 54.0 200.00 - - 48.0 48.0 250.00 - - 46.0 46.0 300.00 - - - 42.9 400.00 - - - 37.9 500.00 - - - 34.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 88 6.8.9 PSNEXT loss PSNEXT loss for connecting hardware does not need to be separately verified. The connecting hardware PSNEXT loss values shown in Table 99 are used to derive channel and permanent link PSNEXT loss requirements for all specified frequencies. Table 99 – Connecting hardware PSNEXT loss assumptions Frequency (MHz) PSNEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(2040 f- Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(2050 f- Category 6A 1 £ f £ 250 250 < f £ 500 )100/log(2050 f- )250/log(4004.42 f- ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 89 6.8.10 FEXT loss Connecting hardware FEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 100 for all specified frequencies. Category 5e calculations that result in FEXT loss values greater than 65 dB shall revert to a requirement of 65 dB minimum. Category 6 and 6A calculations that result in FEXT loss values greater than 75 dB shall revert to a requirement of 75 dB minimum. Table 100 - Connecting hardware FEXT loss Frequency (MHz) FEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(201.35 f- Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(201.43 f- Category 6A 1 £ f ≤ 500 )100/log(201.43 f- The connecting hardware FEXT loss values in Table 101 are provided for information only. Table 101 - Minimum connecting hardware FEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 65.0 75.0 75.0 4.00 n/s 63.1 71.1 71.1 8.00 n/s 57.0 65.0 65.0 10.00 n/s 55.1 63.1 63.1 16.00 n/s 51.0 59.0 59.0 20.00 - 49.1 57.1 57.1 25.00 - 47.1 55.1 55.1 31.25 - 45.2 53.2 53.2 62.50 - 39.2 47.2 47.2 100.00 - 35.1 43.1 43.1 200.00 - - 37.1 37.1 250.00 - - 35.1 35.1 300.00 - - - 33.6 400.00 - - - 31.1 500.00 - - - 29.1 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 90 6.8.11 ACRF ACRF is not specified for connecting hardware. 6.8.12 PSFEXT loss PSFEXT loss for connecting hardware does not need to be separately verified. The connecting hardware PSFEXT loss values shown in Table 102 are used to derive channel and permanent link PSACRF requirements for all specified frequencies. Table 102 – Connecting hardware PSFEXT loss assumptions Frequency (MHz) PSFEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 )100/log(201.32 f- Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 )100/log(201.40 f- Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 )100/log(201.40 f- 6.8.13 PSACRF PSACRF is not specified for connecting hardware. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 91 6.8.14 TCL Connecting hardware TCL shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 103 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 6 and 6A connecting hardware TCL values greater than 40 dB shall revert to a requirement of 40 dB minimum. Table 103 - Connecting hardware TCL Frequency (MHz) TCL (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 28 – 20log( f /100 ) Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 28 – 20log( f /100 ) The connecting hardware TCL values in Table 104 are provided for information only. Table 104 - Minimum connecting hardware TCL Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 4.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 8.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 10.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 16.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 20.00 - n/s 40.0 40.0 25.00 - n/s 40.0 40.0 31.25 - n/s 38.1 38.1 62.50 - n/s 32.1 32.1 100.00 - n/s 28.0 28.0 200.00 - - 22.0 22.0 250.00 - - 20.0 20.0 300.00 - - - 18.5 400.00 - - - 16.0 500.00 - - - 14.0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 92 6.8.15 TCTL TCTL shall be measured for all connecting hardware pairs. Connecting hardware TCTL shall be measured in accordance with clause C.4.8 for all frequencies from 1 MHz up to the maximum frequency specified for the category of the connecting hardware under test. Connecting hardware TCTL shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 105 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in category 6 and 6A connecting hardware TCTL values greater than 40 dB shall revert to a requirement of 40 dB minimum. Table 105 - Connecting hardware TCTL Frequency (MHz) TCL (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 28 – 20log( f /100 ) Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 28 – 20log( f /100 ) The connecting hardware TCTL values in Table 106 are provided for information only. Table 106 - Minimum connecting hardware TCTL Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 4.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 8.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 10.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 16.00 n/s n/s 40.0 40.0 20.00 - n/s 40.0 40.0 25.00 - n/s 40.0 40.0 31.25 - n/s 38.1 38.1 62.50 - n/s 32.1 32.1 100.00 - n/s 28.0 28.0 200.00 - n/s 22.0 22.0 250.00 - - 20.0 20.0 300.00 - - - 18.5 400.00 - - - 16.0 500.00 - - - 14.0 6.8.16 ELTCTL ELTCTL is not specified for connecting hardware. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 93 6.8.17 Coupling attenuation (screened only) Coupling attenuation for connecting hardware is under study. 6.8.18 Propagation delay For all categories of connecting hardware, the propagation delay contribution of each installed mated connection is assumed to not exceed 2.5 ns from 1 MHz to the highest referenced frequency. 6.8.19 Propagation delay skew For all categories of connecting hardware, the propagation delay skew of each installed mated connection is assumed to not exceed 1.25 ns from 1 MHz to the highest referenced frequency. 6.8.20 Shield transfer impedance (screened only) The shield transfer impedance of screened connecting hardware, measured in accordance with Annex D shall not exceed the values determined using equations (26) and (27). fZTconn40= from 1 MHz to 4 MHz (26) fZTconn20=from 4 MHz to 100 MHz (27) Where: TconnZ is the transfer impedance of the connecting hardware shield in mW f is the frequency in MHz. The values in Table 107 are derived from equations (26) and (27) and are provided for information only. Table 107 - Maximum connecting hardware shield transfer impedance Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (m WWWW) Category 5e (mWWWW) Category 6 (mWWWW) Category 6A (mWWWW) 1.00 n/s 40 40 40 4.00 n/s 80 80 80 8.00 n/s 160 160 160 10.00 n/s 200 200 200 16.00 n/s 320 320 320 20.00 - 400 400 400 25.00 - 500 500 500 30.00 - 600 600 600 31.25 - 625 625 625 62.50 - 1,250 1,250 1,250 100.00 - 2,000 2,000 2,000 NOTE - The maximum possible transfer impedance slope is 20 dB/decade and is evident when magnetic field coupling is the dominant coupling mode. A slope less than this value indicates a mixture of coupling modes. A slope of 10 dB/decade is characteristic at low frequencies when contact resistance at metallic contact points is the dominant coupling mode. Compliant transfer impedance performance of cables and connecting hardware is not sufficient to ensure proper link and channel transfer impedance. Cable shields shall be terminated to the connecting hardware shields following manufacturer’s instructions. The termination methods are dependent on the ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 94 shield design of both the cable and the connecting hardware. Connecting hardware shall be supplied with instructions on applicable cable shield termination procedures. 6.8.21 ANEXT loss ANEXT loss is not specified for connecting hardware. 6.8.22 PSANEXT loss Connecting hardware PSANEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 108 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in PSANEXT loss values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 108 – Connecting hardware PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSANEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 70.5 - 20log(f /100) The connecting hardware PSANEXT loss values in Table 109 are provided for information only. Table 109 - Minimum connecting hardware PSANEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 20.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 67.0 62.50 - n/s n/s 67.0 100.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 200.00 - - n/s 64.5 250.00 - - n/s 62.5 300.00 - - - 61.0 400.00 - - - 58.5 500.00 - - - 56.5 6.8.23 Average PSANEXT loss Average PSANEXT loss is not specified for connecting hardware. 6.8.24 AFEXT loss AFEXT loss is not specified for connecting hardware. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 95 6.8.25 PSAFEXT loss Connecting hardware PSAFEXT loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 110 for all specified frequencies. Calculations that result in PSANEXT loss values greater than 67 dB shall revert to a requirement of 67 dB minimum. Table 110 – Connecting hardware PSAFEXT loss Frequency (MHz) PSANEXT loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f £ 100 n/s Category 6 1 £ f £ 250 n/s Category 6A 1 £ f £ 500 67 - 20log(f /100) The connecting hardware PSAFEXT loss values in Table 111 are provided for information only. Table 111 - Minimum connecting hardware PSAFEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 4.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 8.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 10.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 16.00 n/s n/s n/s 67.0 20.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 25.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 31.25 - n/s n/s 67.0 62.50 - n/s n/s 67.0 100.00 - n/s n/s 67.0 200.00 - - n/s 61.0 250.00 - - n/s 59.0 300.00 - - - 57.5 400.00 - - - 52.0 500.00 - - - 53.0 6.8.26 PSAACRF PSAACRF is not specified for connecting hardware. 6.8.27 Average PSAACRF Average PSAACRF is not specified for connecting hardware. 6.9 Cords and jumpers transmission performance Modular plugs and other connectors used for 100 W twisted-pair cable assemblies shall meet the requirements specified in clause 6.8. Cables used to construct work area, equipment, and patch cords shall meet the transmission performance requirements for cord cable specified in clause 6.6. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 96 6.9.1 Return loss Return loss shall be measured for all work area, equipment, and patch cord pairs. Work area, equipment, and patch cord return loss shall be measured in accordance with clause C.5.3 for all frequencies from 1 MHz up to the maximum frequency specified for the category of the cable under test. Work area, equipment, and patch cord return loss shall meet or exceed the values determined using the equations shown in Table 112 for all specified frequencies. Table 112 - Work area, equipment, and patch cord return loss Frequency (MHz) Return loss (dB) Category 3 1 £ f £ 16 n/s Category 5e 1 £ f < 25 25 £ f £ 100 24 + 3log(f /25) 24 - 10log(f /25) Category 6 1 £ f < 25 25 £ f £ 250 24 + 3log(f /25) 24 - 10log(f /25) Category 6A 1 £ f < 25 25 £ f £ 250 250 < f £ 500 24 + 3log(f /25) 24 - 10log(f /25) 14 - 15log(f /250) The work area, equipment, and patch cord return loss values in Table 113 are provided for information only. Table 113 - Minimum work area, equipment, and patch cord return loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 19.8 19.8 19.8 4.00 n/s 21.6 21.6 21.6 8.00 n/s 22.5 22.5 22.5 10.00 n/s 22.8 22.8 22.8 16.00 n/s 23.4 23.4 23.4 20.00 - 23.7 23.7 23.7 25.00 - 24.0 24.0 24.0 31.25 - 23.0 23.0 23.0 62.50 - 20.0 20.0 20.0 100.00 - 18.0 18.0 18.0 200.00 - - 15.0 15.0 250.00 - - 14.0 14.0 300.00 - - - 12.8 400.00 - - - 10.9 500.00 - - - 9.5 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 97 6.9.2 NEXT loss NEXT loss shall be measured for all work area, equipment, and patch cord pair combinations. Work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss shall be measured in accordance with clause C.5 for all frequencies from 1 MHz up to the maximum frequency specified for the category of the cable under test. For all frequencies from 1 MHz to the upper limit of each category, work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss shall meet the values determined using equation (28). Calculations that result in NEXT loss values greater than 65 dB shall revert to a requirement of 65 dB minimum. RFEXT connILcablecordNEXT connectorsNEXT cordNEXT -        ×+- + - -³10 2_ 101010log10 (28) where:            ++- + - -=20 _2_ 1020 _ 10log20 connILcablecordILspecconnNEXT specconnNEXT connectorsNEXT (29) 100100,__ hCableLengt mcablecordILcablecordIL ×= (30)      ×- --=cablecordIL ecablehorNEXTcablecordNEXT _46.0 1log10__ (31) specconnNEXT_ is the NEXT loss assigned to the local and remote test jacks. The value for category 6 and category 6A test heads is specified in Table 97. The value for category 5e test heads is 47-20log (f/100) dB. mcablecordIL100,_is the insertion loss of 100 meters of cord cable as specified in Table 81 cablecordNEXT_ is the cable NEXT loss computed from the NEXT loss requirements for 100 meters of horizontal cable, the insertion loss requirements for 100 meters of cord cable, and the length correction formula in ASTM D 4566. cablehorNEXT_ is the NEXT loss of horizontal cable as specified in Table 58 hCableLengt is the length of the cable in the cord in meters connIL is the insertion loss of one connector as specified in Table 95 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 98 RFEXT is the reflected signal cross talk. For category 5e cords RFEXT = 0 dB, and for category 6 and 6A cords RFEXT = 0.5 dB. NOTE - All variables are expressed in dB, except “CableLength”, which is expressed in meters. The work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss values in Table 114, Table 115, and Table 116 are calculated from equation (28) and are provided for information only. Table 114 - Minimum 2 meter work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 65.0 65.0 65.0 4.00 n/s 65.0 65.0 65.0 8.00 n/s 60.6 65.0 65.0 10.00 n/s 58.7 65.0 65.0 16.00 n/s 54.7 62.0 62.0 20.00 - 52.8 60.1 60.1 25.00 - 50.9 58.1 58.2 31.25 - 49.0 56.2 56.3 62.50 - 43.2 50.4 50.4 100.00 - 39.3 46.4 46.4 200.00 - - 40.6 40.7 250.00 - - 38.8 38.9 300.00 - - - 36.2 400.00 - - - 31.9 500.00 - - - 28.4 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 99 Table 115 - Minimum 5 meter work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 65.0 65.0 65.0 4.00 n/s 64.5 65.0 65.0 8.00 n/s 58.6 65.0 65.0 10.00 n/s 56.7 64.5 64.5 16.00 n/s 52.8 60.5 60.5 20.00 - 50.9 58.6 58.7 25.00 - 49.1 56.8 56.8 31.25 - 47.2 54.9 54.9 62.50 - 41.6 49.2 49.2 100.00 - 37.8 45.3 45.4 200.00 - - 39.8 39.9 250.00 - - 38.1 38.1 300.00 - - - 35.9 400.00 - - - 32.1 500.00 - - - 29.0 Table 116 - Minimum 10 meter work area, equipment, and patch cord NEXT loss Frequency (MHz) Category 3 (dB) Category 5e (dB) Category 6 (dB) Category 6A (dB) 1.00 n/s 65.0 65.0 65.0 4.00 n/s 62.5 65.0 65.0 8.00 n/s 56.7 64.8 64.8 10.00 n/s 54.9 62.9 63.0 16.00 n/s 51.0 59.0 59.1 20.00 - 49.2 57.2 57.3 25.00 - 47.4 55.4 55.4 31.25 - 45.6 53.6 53.6 62.50 - 40.2 48.1 48.1 100.00 - 36.7 44.4 44.5 200.00 - - 39.3 39.3 250.00 - - 37.6 37.7 300.00 - - - 35.8 400.00 - - - 32.5 500.00 - - - 29.8 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 100 Annex A (normative) - Reliability testing of connecting hardware A.1 General Connecting hardware reliability is critical to the overall cabling system operation. Changes in contact resistance due to operational and environmental stress can negatively affect the electrical transmission characteristics and performance of the building telecommunications cabling system. Connecting hardware reliability testing shall be accomplished by subjecting the connecting hardware to various mechanical and environmental conditions, measuring parameters such as changes in contact resistance during and after individual test sequences. Connecting hardware often contains a combination of solderless connections and a separable contact interface (jack/plug interface). All connections shall be tested. Each connection that comprises the connecting hardware may be isolated and tested independently or all connections may be tested as an assembly. When tested as an assembly, the total combined change in contact resistance may be used to determine pass and fail criteria in place of isolating individual effects of the various connections. If this method is employed, care should be taken to ensure the use of the most stringent test schedule as the test schedules vary by type of connection. Cable portions used in testing should comply with clauses 29-31 of ASTM D 4566. Refer to local and national standards and codes for safety considerations. A.2 Solderless connections To ensure reliable solderless terminations of balanced twisted pair cable insulated conductors, and to ensure reliable solderless connections between component parts within connecting hardware, solderless connections shall meet the requirements of the applicable standards specified in Table A.1. Table A.1 – Standards for solderless connections Connection type Standard Crimped connection IEC 60352-2 Accessible IDC IEC 60352-3 Non-accessible IDC IEC 60352-4 Press-in connection IEC 60352-5 IPC IEC 60352-6 Spring clamp connection IEC 60352-7 Compression mount connection IEC 60352-8 A typical test schedule for IEC 60352 series of standards is outlined in clause A.5.2 of this Standard. The default criteria and conditions in the relevant standards in Table A.1 apply, except as specified in the remainder of this clause. The maximum initial contact resistance for an insulation displacement connection shall be 2.5 mW and the maximum change in contact resistance during and after conditioning shall be 5 mW from the initial value. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 101 The following test conditions are specified, as detailed by the type test requirements of IEC 60352 series of standards. Vibration test severity: 10 to 500 Hz. Low temperature (LCT): -40 °C (-40 °F). Electrical load and temperature, test current: 1A dc. A.3 Modular plugs and jacks Modular plugs and jacks shall comply with the reliability requirements of the applicable standard specified in Table A.2. Table A.2 – Standards for modular plugs and jacks Category and type Standard Category 3, unscreened IEC 60603-7 Category 3, screened IEC 60603-7-1 Category 5e, unscreened IEC 60603-7-2 Category 5e, screened IEC 60603-7-3 Category 6, unscreened IEC 60603-7-4 Category 6, screened IEC 60603-7-5 Category 6A, unscreened IEC 60603-7-41 Category 6A, screened IEC 60603-7-51 A typical test schedule for IEC 60603-7 series of standards is outlined in clause A.5.3 of this Standard. The default criteria and conditions in the relevant standards in Table A.2 apply, except as specified in the remainder of this clause. The number of mating cycles (insertions and withdrawals) for modular plugs and jacks and the number of conductor re-terminations per solderless connection shall comply with the specifications in Table A.3. Table A.3 – Modular plugs and jacks operations matrix Connecting hardware type Insertion and withdrawal, and conductor re-termination, operations Minimum number of operations Modular plug Insertion / withdrawal with modular jack 750 Cable re-termination 0 Modular jack Insertion / withdrawal with modular plug 750 Cable re-termination 20 1) 1) Unless not intended for re-termination, in which case this value equals 0. Between terminations, the solderless connection should be inspected for debris and extraneous material should be removed. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 102 A.4 Other connecting hardware Examples of other connecting hardware include: 1) cross-connect blocks and plugs 2) pin and socket connectors The reliability of connecting hardware, other than modular plugs and jacks shall be demonstrated by complying with the applicable requirements of the standards specified in Table A.4. The connecting hardware shall be terminated, mounted, and operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for use. A minimum of 100 individual electrical contact paths (e.g. connecting hardware, input to output) shall be tested without failure. The following tests shall be as per the manufacturer’s specification: a) Examination of dimensions and mass b) Insertion and withdrawal force requirements c) Effectiveness of any connector coupling device requirements d) Gauging and gauging continuity requirements e) Arrangement for contact resistance test f) Arrangement for vibration (dynamic stress) test Table A.4 – Standards for other connecting hardware Category and type Standard Category 3, unscreened IEC 60603-7 Clause 6 and Clause 71) Category 3, screened IEC 60603-7-1 Category 5e, unscreened IEC 60603-7-2 Category 5e, screened IEC 60603-7-3 Category 6, unscreened IEC 60603-7-4 Category 6, screened IEC 60603-7-5 Category 6A, unscreened IEC 60603-7-41 Category 6A, screened IEC 60603-7-51 1) Excluding sub-clauses addressing pin and pair grouping assignment, creepage and clearance distances, transmission characteristics, transfer impedance, and test group EP (transmission testing). The default criteria and conditions in the relevant standards in Table A.4 apply, unless otherwise specified in this clause. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 103 The number of mating cycles (insertions and withdrawals) for other connecting hardware and the number of conductor re-terminations per solderless connection shall comply with the specifications in Table A.5. Table A.5 – Other connecting hardware operations matrix Connecting hardware type Insertion and withdrawal, and conductor re-termination, operations Minimum number of operations Other connecting hardware “plug” Insertion / withdrawal operations with “jack” 200 Cable re-termination 0 Other connecting hardware “jack” Insertion / withdrawal operations with “plug” 200 Cable re-termination 20 1) Jumper re-termination 200 1) Unless not intended for re-termination, in which case this value equals 0. Between terminations, the solderless connection should be inspected for debris and extraneous material should be removed. A.5 Informative examples of referenced test schedules A.5.1 General As an example, the reliability of a modular jack with accessible insulation displacement connections is demonstrated by complying with the applicable requirements of both IEC 60352-3 and IEC 60603-7-4. The test schedules described in IEC 60352-3 and IEC 60603-7-4 at the time of this Standard’s publication are outlined in clause A.5.2, as depicted in figure A.1, and clause A.5.3, as depicted in figure A.2. It is advisable to refer to the IEC Standards for updates and revisions. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 104 A.5.2 Non-accessible IDC, IEC 60352-3 This full test schedule is used for qualification purposes where accessible insulation displacement connections have not been demonstrated to conform to all of the requirements in section 2 of IEC 60352-3. Where requirements covering workmanship, tools, termination (materials, dimensions, surface finish, design features), wires (materials, dimensions, surface finish, wire insulation) and connection are conformant, a basic (significantly reduced) test schedule is used for qualification purposes. Figure A.1 - Reference test schedule for non-accessible IDC KEY: Assessment test Conditioning test General examination Transverse extraction force Contact resistance Contact resistance Contact resistance Conductor re-terminations Conductor re-terminations Conductor re-terminations Bending of the wire Vibration plus contact disturbance Corrosion, industrial atmosphere Transverse extraction force Contact resistance Contact resistance Electrical load & temperature Rapid change of temperature Contact resistance Vibration plus contact disturbance Corrosion, industrial atmosphere Contact resistance Climatic sequence Rapid change of temperature Contact resistance Contact resistance Climatic sequence Contact resistance ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 105 A.5.3 Modular plug and jack, IEC 60603-7 series Figure A.2 - Reference test schedule for modular plugs and jacks General examination KEY: Polarization (if applicable)Assessment test Contact resistance Conditioning test Insulation resistance Voltage proof Insertion & withdrawal forces Locking device mechanical operation Vibration with contact disturbance Electrical load & temperature Surge test Connector coupling Mechanical operation Contact resistance Insulation resistance Insulation resistance Rapid change of temperature Flowing mixed gas corrosion Insulation resistance Voltage proof Visual examination Insulation resistance Contact resistance Visual examination Visual examination Contact resistance Mechanical operation Contact resistance Voltage proof Contact resistance Mechanical gauging Visual examination Insulation resistance Continuity gauging & contact disturbance Cyclic damp heat Voltage proof Contact resistance Visual examination Insertion & withdrawal forces Connector coupling Visual Examination Solderability Resistance to soldering heat Voltage Proof ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 106 Annex B (normative) - Measurement requirements B.1 General test configuration This annex describes the requirements by which 4-pair 100 W components and cabling systems are to be measured from 1 MHz to the highest referenced frequency using laboratory equipment. The transmission tests described in this Standard typically require the use of a network analyzer or equivalent, coaxial cables, baluns, UTP test leads, and impedance matching terminations. Network analyzers provide capability to correct for source and load port inaccuracies and measurement errors due to output port gain errors and measurement port sensitivity. In addition, signal leakage from the output port to measurement port can be compensated. Each component of the test setup shall be qualified over the frequency range specified for the category to which the DUT is being evaluated. Equivalent test setups may be used. This annex discusses in detail: Network analyzer requirements Balun requirements Impedance matching termination requirements Other interconnect cabling requirements B.2 Balun requirements Balun transformers are used to convert the unbalanced measurement capability of the network analyzer to the balanced terminals of the cabling interface. Baluns shall be RFI shielded and shall comply with the specifications listed in table B.1 up to the highest referenced frequency for the category of component or cabling system under test. Table B.1 - Test balun performance characteristics Parameter Frequency (MHz) Value Impedance, primary 1) 1 £ f £ 500 50 W unbalanced Impedance, secondary 1 £ f £ 500 100 W balanced Insertion loss 1 £ f £ 500 2.0 dB maximum Return loss, bi-directional 2) 1 £ f < 15 15 £ f £ 500 12 dB minimum 20 dB minimum Return loss, common mode 2) 1 £ f < 15 15 £ f < 400 400 £ f £ 500 15 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 15 dB minimum Power rating 1 £ f £ 500 0.1 watt minimum Longitudinal balance 2) 1 £ f < 100 100 £ f £ 500 60 dB minimum 50 dB minimum Output signal balance 2) 1 £ f £ 500 50 dB minimum Common mode rejection 2) 1 £ f £ 500 50 dB minimum 1) Primary impedance may differ, if necessary, to accommodate analyzer outputs other than 50 W. 2) Measured per ITU-T (formerly CCITT) Recommendation G.117 with the network analyzer calibrated using a 50 W load. For ease of interfacing to test fixtures, the balun should present a pin and socket interface with dimensions as shown in figure B.1. Sockets should be gold plated contact material and compatible with Mill-Max part number 1001-0-15-15-30-27-04-0 shown in figure B.2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Figure B.1 Figure B.2 Example socket description: Mill-Max 1001-0-15-15-30-27 Material=Brass alloy Contact: 30=Standard 4 finger contact Contact material: Beryllium copper Shell plating: 15=10 µ" gold over nickel Contact plating: 27=30 µ" gold over nickel Press fit in 1.45 mm (0.057 in) mounting hole 107 Figure B.1 - Differential test fixture interface pattern Figure B.2 - Example pin and socket dimension Example socket description: 27-04-0 finger contact Contact material: Beryllium copper Shell plating: 15=10 µ" gold over nickel 27=30 µ" gold over nickel Press fit in 1.45 mm (0.057 in) mounting hole ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 108 Figure B.3 depicts the proper test configurations for qualifying test baluns to the requirements of this Standard. Figure B.3 - Measurement configurations for test balun qualification B.3 Ground plane requirements The baluns at the near-end shall be bonded to a ground plane. Any baluns and common mode nodes used at the far-end shall also be bonded to a ground plane. Refer to clause F.6 for further ground plane considerations. A Balun Port Description A-B: 100 Balanced C: 50 Common-Mode D: 50 Unbalanced Return Loss (50:100 ohm) 100 Return Loss (100:50 ohm) Calibration Plane Insertion Loss (2 Units Back-to-Back) 50 50 Longitudinal BalanceCommon-Mode Return Loss Common-Mode Rejection 50 50 D C B A D C B A D CB 50 A D C B 50 A D C B 50 50 50 A D C B A D CB 50 50 50 A D C B 25 50 50 A D C B 25 50 Output Signal Balance 50 50 50 A D C B 50 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 109 B.4 Network analyzer requirements The network analyzer shall provide a sinusoidal reference signal source and receiver in one unit and shall provide the ability to measure amplitude and phase response over a specified frequency range for cabling or cabling components under test. In addition, the performance of the network analyzer shall be specified over the frequency range of interest and the network analyzer shall include functionality to perform two- port and one-port calibrations. B.5 Measurement points and spacing Unless otherwise specified, the minimum number of measurement points within a specified frequency range shall meet the requirements of table B.2. Table B.2 – Minimum number of measurement points DUT length (L) (m) Minimum number of measurement points (/decade of specified frequency range) L ≤ 10 100 10 < L ≤ 20 200 20 < L 300 B.6 Impedance matching terminations Either balun terminations or resistive terminations may be used for the termination of far-end pairs under test and for the termination of the unused near-end and far-end pairs, although resistor terminations are recommended for improved measurement accuracy. For every measurement parameter, all ports of the device under test (both near-end and far-end) shall be terminated as specified (i.e. differential mode (DM) only terminations are required for some tests, while other tests may require differential mode plus common mode (DMCM) terminations at the near-end and DM only terminations at the far-end of the DUT). In all cases, the type of termination shall be consistent between all pairs at each end (i.e. DMCM only terminations are not mixed for the near-end of the DUT or the far-end of the DUT). B.6.1 Balun terminations Baluns used for termination shall comply with the requirements of clause B.2. The common mode termination resistor applied to the common mode port of the balun shall be 50 W ±1 %. B.6.2 Resistor terminations Resistors used for DM terminations shall exhibit impedance of 100 W ± 0.1 % (two times 50 W ± 0.1 %) as shown in figure B.4. The resistors used for common mode (CM) terminations shall include the addition of a common mode 25 W ± 1 % resistor as shown in figure B.4. In this case, the common mode impedance formed by the 25 W resistor in series with the two 50 W resistors in parallel provides for a total common mode impedance of 50 W. 25 W ± 1 % 50 W ± 0.1 % 50 W ± 0.1 % 100 W ± 0. 1 % Differential mode only resistor termination Differential mode plus common mode resistor termination Figure B.4 – Resistor termination networks ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 110 Additionally, 1) Small geometry chip resistors shall be used for the construction of resistor terminations. 2) The two 50 W DM terminating resistors shall be matched to within 0.1 % at DC. 3) The length of connections to impedance terminating resistors shall be minimized (lead lengths of 2 mm (.08 in) or less are recommended). B.6.3 Termination performance at the calibration plane The performance of impedance matching resistor termination networks shall be verified by measuring the return loss of the termination at the calibration plane. For this measurement, a one port calibration is required using a traceable reference load per IEC 60603 series Annex E. The DM return loss of the load termination shall meet or exceed 20-20log(f /500). Calculations that result in DM return loss limit values greater than 40 dB shall revert to a requirement of 40 dB minimum. The CM return loss shall exceed 15 dB. The residual NEXT loss between any two impedance termination networks shall exceed the requirements of equation (B-1). Calculations that result in residual NEXT loss limit values greater than 84 dB shall revert to a requirement of 84 dB minimum. )100/log(2074_fNEXTtermresidual-³ dB (B-1) NOTE - The DM return loss requirement above results in better performance at frequencies below the upper frequency limit for resistor terminations versus balun terminations. It is for this reason that resistor terminations are recommended, even though the performance requirements (as specified here) are essentially the same. B.7 General calibration plane For all measurement configurations, the calibration plane represents the location where calibration devices are connected to the test setup as shown in figure B.5. The calibration plane is defined at the test interface and is the point of connection between the device under test and the fixed portion of the test fixture. Figure B.5 - Calibration plane The calibration plane location can be established based on: 1) Formal definitions of calibration planes for cabling (e.g., reference plane for the channel or permanent link). 2) Proximity to the cabling or cabling component under test to avoid introduction of measurement errors (i.e. from the network analyzer, baluns and interconnect wiring). 3) Convenience of connecting devices to be tested. 4) Minimizing disruption of the transmission performance at the location where devices are connected, particularly to avoid reflections and parasitic crosstalk effects. NOTE – The calibration plane can be at the location of the balun terminals. In this case, the measurement system does not include a segment of twisted pair wires. Rcom Rcom Baluns Calibration plane Network Analyzer Test interface ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 111 There are two commonly used calibration methods: 1) Two-port calibration used for through measurements that involve an output port and a measurement port (insertion loss, NEXT loss, and FEXT loss). 2) One-port calibration used when making one-port (return loss) measurements. In this case, the remote end of the device under test is terminated using a resistive circuit. It is possible to use a two-port calibration for one-port measurements. In this case, one port provides the balun termination at the remote end and its return losses are calibrated out of the measurement. Both one-port and two-port calibrations require reflection calibration that corrects for imperfect source and load impedance of the measurement system, including the near- and far-end measurement ports of the network analyzer, baluns and interconnections up to the location of the reference plane. Reflection calibration typically involves connecting open, short, and load calibration devices at the location of the reference plane. Absolute measurement accuracy is determined by the accuracy of the calibration load. Refer to clause B.7.1.1 for additional information. In addition to the reflection calibration, transmission and isolation calibrations are also required for two-port calibrations. Transmission calibration requires interconnecting the near- and far-end measurement ports at the location of the reference plane with a known reference. The reference may be a short piece of twisted-pair conductors. Isolation calibration is only required if there is significant crosstalk between the near- and far-end measurement ports at the location of the reference plane. If the level of uncompensated crosstalk at this location is near the noise floor of the network analyzer, then the isolation calibration may be omitted. If used, during isolation calibration, the near- and far-end measurement ports should be terminated into 100 W at the location of the reference plane. B.7.1 Calibration references Internal test calibration standards within the instrument shall be adjusted to reflect the characteristics of the actual standards used for calibration as specified by the instrument manufacturer. Typical parameters for a network analyzer using open-short-load-through calibration standards are open circuit capacitance, short circuit inductance, through offset delay and offset Z0. Test facilities should maintain appropriate documentation detailing the calibration procedures and calibration standard values used and the expected accuracy. B.7.1.1 100 WWWW reference load measurement procedure Impedance terminations shall be calibrated against a 50 W coaxial load, traceable to an international reference standard. The calibration reference load shall be equal to the nominal impedance of twisted-pair cabling defined in this Standard, which is 100 W. The reference load(s) for calibration shall be placed in an N-type connector according to IEC 60169-16 (i.e. designed for panel mounting and machined flat on the back side). The load(s) shall be fixed to the flat side of the connector and distributed evenly around the center conductor. One port full calibrations shall utilize the 50 W coaxial calibration reference. The reference load may be compared directly to the 50 W calibration reference. In this case, an additional source of uncertainty is introduced by the network analyzer. Refer to the test equipment manufacturer’s guidelines for additional information on calibration device and network analyzer measurement uncertainty. Another method is to place two 100 W reference loads in parallel. In this case, the uncertainty introduced by the network analyzer is negligible and the accuracy of the two 100 W reference loads in parallel is determined by the accuracy of the 50 W calibration reference. It may be assumed that either method will result in approximately the same uncertainty for a single, 100 W reference load. Care must be used to maintain symmetrical calibration load positioning with reference to the ground connection. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 112 B.7.1.2 100 WWWW reference load return loss requirement The verified return loss of the 100 W reference load shall be >40 dB from 1 MHz to the highest referenced frequency. B.7.2 Typical test equipment performance parameters See ANSI/TIA-1152 for typical test equipment performance parameters. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 113 Annex C (normative) - Cabling and component test procedures C.1 Measurement test setup and apparatus The measurement requirements in this annex, in general, apply to categories 3, 5e, 6, and 6A, up to the upper frequencies of those categories. In some cases, there are specific requirements for specific categories, and those are so noted. The transmission tests described in this annex typically require the use of a network analyzer or equivalent, coaxial cables, baluns, UTP test leads, and impedance matching terminations. Each setup component shall be qualified to a measurement bandwidth of at least 1 to 500 MHz. Test equipment design, calibration and fixturing should be such as to ensure a measurement floor of 20 dB below the required measurement limit. C.1.1 Interconnections between the device under test (DUT) and the calibration plane Twisted-pair test leads, printed circuits or other interconnections may be used between the DUT and the calibration plane. It is necessary to control the characteristics of these interconnections to the best extent possible as they are beyond the calibration plane. These interconnections should be as short as practical and their CM and DM impedances shall be managed to minimize their effects on measurements. The return loss performance of the interconnections shall meet the requirements of table C.1. The insertion loss performance of the interconnections is assumed to be less than 0.1 dB over the frequency range from 1 MHz to 500 MHz. C.1.1.1 Impedance matched test leads When used, twisted-pair test leads shall have 100 nominal characteristic impedance. The twisted-pairs should not exhibit gaps between the conductors insulation. Test leads shall be qualified for DM return loss. There are two different methods to obtain twisted-pair test leads: they may be obtained as individual twisted-pairs, or they may be part of a cable. If CM terminations are required, the test leads shall be placed in an impedance managing system, as described in Annex E. The maximum length of the test leads extending from each end of the device shall be 51 mm (2 in). ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 114 C.1.1.1.1 Individual twisted-pair test leads Twisted-pair test leads may be obtained from discrete twisted-pair stock or removed from jacketed cable. Prior to attachment to the device, the return loss of each twisted-pair shall be tested. For this test, 100 mm (4 in) lengths of twisted-pair shall be used. The test leads shall be DM terminated across each pair with a precision 0.1% 0603 or similar chip resistor as described in clause B.6.2. The resistor shall be attached directly to the conductors of the pair in such a way as to minimize the disturbance of the twisted- pair. Potential disturbances include gaps between the conductor insulation in the twisted-pair, melted insulation, and excess solder. When tested, the test lead shall be attached to the balun or DM test port using the same fixtures as when testing the device. The test leads are then trimmed for attachment to the DUT and the test fixtures. See Annex E for an appropriate test fixture. It is recommended to use the same load for both calibration and termination of the test lead during measurement. C.1.1.1.2 Test leads as part of cables Test leads may also be obtained from a section of twisted-pair cable where the four twisted-pair test leads are maintained in the cable jacket. This method will most often be used with test plugs, cut from the ends of assembled cords, but can also be used with jacks. Prior to attachment to the DUT, the return loss of the cable twisted-pairs (within the cable) shall be tested. For this test, a 100 mm (4 in) length of cable shall be selected. Each twisted-pair of the cable shall be DM terminated across each pair with a precision 0.1% 0603 or similar chip resistor as described in clause B.6.2. The cable shall then be terminated to the device per manufacturer’s instructions and trimmed for attachment to the measurement system. C.1.1.2 Interconnection return loss requirements For connecting hardware return loss measurements, the interconnection shall meet the requirements in table C.1 relative to the calibration resistor specified in annex B. Table C.1 - Interconnection return loss Frequency (MHz) Return loss (dB) 1 £ f < 80 80 £ f £ 500 40 dB 38 – 20log(f /100) dB C.1.2 Calibration methods One-port and two-port calibrations are acceptable for return loss measurements. Two-port calibration and measurement methods, which include compensation for the balun response, shall be used for insertion loss, NEXT loss and FEXT loss measurements. See clause B.7 for more information on calibration methods and types. C.1.2.1 Two-port calibration of the test system A two-port calibration utilizing load, open, and short reference calibration devices shall be specified when calibrating reflections. Transmission calibration requires interconnecting the near- and far-end measurement ports at the location of the reference plane with a known reference. The reference may be a short piece of twisted-pair conductors. Isolation calibration is only required if there is significant crosstalk between the near- and far-end measurement ports at the location of the reference plane. If the level of uncompensated crosstalk at this location is near the noise floor of the network analyzer, then the isolation calibration may be omitted. If isolation calibration is used, the near-end and far-end measurement ports should be terminated into 100 W at the location of the reference plane. C.1.2.2 One-port calibration of the test system If a one-port calibration is used, then load, open, and short calibration references shall be used. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 115 C.2 Testing of cabling C.2.1 Cabling DC resistance DC resistance shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D4566. C.2.2 Return loss of channels and permanent links C.2.2.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link return loss Figure C.1 depicts the typical schematic diagram for testing return loss. Resistor terminations are generally preferred for unused pairs at the far-end because of better return loss performance. See clause B.6.2 for information on resistor terminations. DM terminations are recommended for return loss measurements. The detailed schematic diagram of the balun is shown once in figure C.1. The connection labeled “C” represents the connection to the common mode port, the connection labeled “D” represents the connection to the unbalanced port, and connection labeled “G” represents a connection to the ground plane. Figure C.1 - Laboratory test configuration for return loss ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 116 C.2.2.2 Measurement of channel and permanent link return loss Calibrate in accordance with C.1.2. Measure the S11 parameter with the network analyzer connected to each pair on the near-end. Cable return loss shall be tested in both directions. C.2.3 Insertion loss of channels and permanent links C.2.3.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link insertion loss Figure C.2 depicts the typical schematic diagram for testing insertion loss, FEXT loss, ACRF, and propagation delay. Figure C.2 - Laboratory test configuration for insertion loss, FEXT loss, ACRF, and propagation delay measurements The internal schematic diagram of the balun is shown twice in figure C.2. The connection labeled “C” represents the connection to the common mode port, the connection labeled “D” represents the connection to the unbalanced port, and the connection labeled “G” represents a connection to the ground plane. NOTES, 1 Shields and screens, if any, should be bonded (low inductance connections) to the local and remote measurement grounds. 3 The connection of local and remote grounds through the network analyzer is not expected to have a significant influence on the measured results. The test interfaces shall provide a high quality interface to the calibration reference devices used during two-port and one-port calibration of the network analyzer, as well as provide a convenient connection to the cabling or cabling component under test. C.2.3.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link insertion loss The calibration for channel and permanent link insertion loss shall comply with clause C.1.2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 117 C.2.3.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link insertion loss Measure the S21 parameter with the pair under test connected to the network analyzer at both the near-end and the far-end. It is not necessary to measure cable insertion loss from both ends due to reciprocity. C.2.4 NEXT loss of channels and permanent links C.2.4.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link NEXT loss Figure C.3 depicts the typical schematic diagram for testing NEXT loss. Resistor terminations are generally preferred for unused pairs at the far-end because of better return loss performance. See clause B.6.2 for information on resistor terminations. DMCM terminations shall be used for NEXT loss measurements. The detailed schematic diagram of the balun is shown once in figure C.3. The connection labeled “C” represents the connection to the common mode port, the connection labeled “D” represents the connection to the unbalanced port, and connection labeled “G” represents a connection to the ground plane. . Figure C.3 - Laboratory test configuration for NEXT loss C.2.4.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link NEXT loss The calibration for channel and permanent link NEXT loss shall comply with clause C.1.2. C.2.4.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link NEXT loss Measure the S21 parameter with the network analyzer connected to each of the 6 pair combinations of the four pairs. NEXT loss shall be tested in both directions. C.2.5 FEXT loss of channels and permanent links C.2.5.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss See clause C.2.3.1 for the test configuration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss. DMCM terminations shall be used for all unused pairs. C.2.5.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss The calibration for channel and permanent link FEXT loss shall comply with clause C.1.2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 118 C.2.5.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link FEXT loss Measure the S21 parameter with the network analyzer connected to each of the 12 pair combinations of the four pairs in one direction. C.2.6 Cabling ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss laboratory measurement procedures The method in the following sections is provided to investigate the performance of cabling (channels and permanent links) to the cabling PSANEXT loss and PSAACRF specifications in this Standard. When laboratory testing is used, the procedures in this normative annex shall be followed to ensure consistency. This procedure is intended for use in the laboratory, to evaluate that cabling complies with the PSANEXT loss and PSAACRF requirements, when properly installed. Separate procedures are provided for field testing and for the design verification of components. The elements that affect the cabling PSANEXT loss and PSAACRF result include cable, cords, connectors, and their mounting systems (e.g. pathways, patch panels, faceplates, and mounting boxes). Lengths of cable segments and proximity and density of connectors are among the factors that can affect compliance. Additionally, this procedure can be used to verify that the mathematical models used to derive channel performance from component performance are valid. This procedure is also used to test installation practices, to assure they do not degrade PSANEXT loss and PSAACRF performance. C.2.6.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link ANEXT loss C.2.6.1.1 Termination of pairs During all testing, all pairs of all channels or permanent links that are not being tested, including the unused pairs of the channels under test, should be terminated with both DMCM terminations at both ends. The nodes from the opposite ends should be connected with an appropriate low impedance path. C.2.6.1.2 Cabling construction Cabling shall be constructed to satisfy the following conditions: 1. There shall be a disturbed channel or permanent link of the desired topology. 2. Select the worst alien crosstalk position in the connector hardware mounting system as the disturbed position. Connect that connector to the center cable in the 6-around-1 bundle. 3. There shall be at least 6 disturbing channels or permanent links. If there are fewer than 6 disturbing positions in the connecting hardware mounting system, the additional connectors needed to make 6 disturbers shall be placed in a similar mounting system nearby. If there are more than 6 significant disturbing positions in the connecting hardware mounting system, the disturbing cables in the 6-around-1 bundle shall be connected to the 6 most significant connectors in the connecting hardware mounting system. Any additional cables beside the 6-around-1 bundle shall be routed nearby. See clause C.3.7.1 for assembly of cable bundle. Disturbing and disturbed cabling configurations should be specified at the time of measurement. Refer to Annex J for cabling configurations that were used to develop channel and permanent link limits. Construct the disturbed and disturbing cablings such that the required number of disturbing elements are placed as close as possible to the disturbed elements. Both the cable and the cords shall be touching or shall be in as close proximity as physically possible. For connectors, this shall mean they are mounted in the mounting system, at all the positions where they may significantly disturb the disturbed channel. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 119 It shall be acceptable to have a short length, up to 0.3 m (1.0 ft), of the cable not tightly bundled, for the purpose of connecting it to a connector that is some distance away from the disturbing connector. At the ends of the cabling where the cable is connected to the measurement system, it shall be acceptable, to have up to 0.6 m (2.0 ft) of cable, not in contact, for the purposes of connecting to the measurement system. C.2.6.1.3 Determining number of disturbing components The configuration of mounted connectors that results in worst case ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss shall be used. The number of disturbing channels or permanent links shall be determined by using the larger number from the following: a) the number of cable disturbers is defined in clause C.3.7 as six 4-pair cables or b) the number of connector disturbers determined using the procedure specified in clause C.4.6.5. An example of a configuration is shown in figure C.4. eddd Figure C.4 - Example of a “6-around-1” cable arrangement in a channel Significant connectors may be located in other panels in close proximity and these shall be assessed accordingly. C.2.6.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link ANEXT loss or AFEXT loss Calibrate per clause C.1.2. Disturbing Channel Disturbed Channel ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 120 C.2.6.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link ANEXT loss or AFEXT loss Measure the ANEXT loss of all pairs in the disturbing channels or permanent links to all pairs in the disturbed channel or permanent link as shown in figure C.5. See figure C.16 and clause C.4.6.4 for details on the connection and termination of disturbed and disturbing channels or permanent links to the measurement system. Measure the insertion loss of each pair of the disturbed channel or permanent link, and of each pair of the disturbing channels or permanent links. Measure the AFEXT loss of all pairs in the disturbing channels or permanent links to all pairs in the disturbed channel or permanent link as shown in figure C.6. See figure C.17 and clause C.4.6.4 for details on the connection and termination of disturbed and disturbing channels or permanent links to the measurement system. The power sum shall be calculated for each of the four pairs of the disturbed channel or permanent link, from all of the pairs of all disturbing channels or permanent links. See clause 6.1.16 for information on how to calculate PSAACRF. Figure C.5 - Schematic diagram of cabling ANEXT loss measurements ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 121 Figure C.6 - Schematic diagram of cabling AFEXT loss measurements C.2.7 ACRF and FEXT loss of channels and permanent links C.2.7.1 Test configuration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss The test configuration for channel and permanent link FEXT shall comply with clause C.2.3.1. ACRF is a calculation of the measurements of the FEXT loss and insertion loss. C.2.7.2 Calibration of channel and permanent link FEXT loss The calibration for channel and permanent link FEXT loss shall comply with clause C.1.2. C.2.7.3 Measurement of channel and permanent link FEXT loss Measure all 12 pair combinations for FEXT loss, launching from one end only. It is not necessary to measure FEXT loss from both ends due to reciprocity. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 122 C.2.8 TCL of channels C.2.8.1 Test configuration of channel TCL Figure C.7 depicts the typical schematic diagram for testing TCL. The cabling or DUT pair under test shall be connected to the differential mode balun output terminals. All unused near-end pairs shall be terminated with DMCM resistor terminations (see clause B.6.2) or baluns as shown in figure C.7. All far-end pairs shall be terminated with DMCM resistor terminations (see clause B.6.2). The near-end terminating resistor networks shall be bonded and connected to the measurement ground plane. The far-end resistor networks shall be bonded together. DUT 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 25 W 25 W 25 W 25 W 25 W 25 W Network Analyzer J1 J2 Port 1 Port 2 25 W 50 W 50 W Figure C.7 - Laboratory test configuration for TCL NOTE - For cable TCL measurements, the far-end common mode termination should be connected to ground. . ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 C.2.8.2 Calibration of channel TCL TCL calibration is performed in three steps. STEP 1: The coaxial test leads attached to the network analyzer are calibrated out by performing short, open, load, and through measurements lead through connection is shown in figure Figure STEP 2: The attenuation of the differential signals of the balun is measured by connecting two identical baluns back-to-back with minimal lead length as shown in figure positioned so as to maintain polarity and they are bonded (firmly attached, e.g. clamped) to a ground plane. The measured insertion loss is divided by 2 to approximate the insertion loss of one balun for a differential signal. The calculated insertion loss is recorded as Figure C.9 - Back STEP 3: The insertion loss of the common mode signals of the test balun is measured by connecting the common mode port terminals to the differential output terminals of the balun as shown in figure Notice that the output terminals of the balun are short the coaxial test lead. The outer shield of the coaxial test lead shall be bonded to the ground plane. An example ground bonding is shown in figure 123 Calibration of channel TCL TCL calibration is performed in three steps. STEP 1: The coaxial test leads attached to the network analyzer are calibrated out by performing short, open, load, and through measurements at the point of termination to the balun. An example of the test lead through connection is shown in figure C.8. Figure C.8 - Coaxial lead through calibration The attenuation of the differential signals of the balun is measured by connecting two identical back with minimal lead length as shown in figure C.9. Notice that the baluns are positioned so as to maintain polarity and they are bonded (firmly attached, e.g. clamped) to a ground plane. The measured insertion loss is divided by 2 to approximate the insertion loss of one balun for a lculated insertion loss is recorded as DMbalIL,. Back-to-back balun insertion loss measurement STEP 3: The insertion loss of the common mode signals of the test balun is measured by connecting the the differential output terminals of the balun as shown in figure Notice that the output terminals of the balun are short-circuited and connected to the inner condu the coaxial test lead. The outer shield of the coaxial test lead shall be bonded to the ground plane. An example ground bonding is shown in figure C.11. The measured insertion loss is recorded as STEP 1: The coaxial test leads attached to the network analyzer are calibrated out by performing short, at the point of termination to the balun. An example of the test The attenuation of the differential signals of the balun is measured by connecting two identical that the baluns are positioned so as to maintain polarity and they are bonded (firmly attached, e.g. clamped) to a ground plane. The measured insertion loss is divided by 2 to approximate the insertion loss of one balun for a STEP 3: The insertion loss of the common mode signals of the test balun is measured by connecting the the differential output terminals of the balun as shown in figure C.10. circuited and connected to the inner conductor of the coaxial test lead. The outer shield of the coaxial test lead shall be bonded to the ground plane. An sured insertion loss is recorded as CMbalIL,. Figure Additionally, a correction term for the impedance ratio of the balun transformer converting from 50 the network analyzer to 100W on the DUT is needed. The correction value is 3 dB. Figure C.2.8.3 Measurement of channel TCL An S21 measurement between the differential and common mode ports of the balun is performed. To maintain consistency, port 1 of the network analyzer shall be connected to the differential mode input of the balun, while port 2 of the network analyzer shall be connected to the common mode terminal of the balun. The measured raw balance data is recorded as TCL, corrected to remove the insertion loss of the test setup and to allow for the impedance ratio of the balun, is determined using equation (,,--=CMbalDMbalmeasILILILTCL NOTE - The proximity of the cable under test to ground planes may have an impact upon cable balance measurements. TCL shall be tested in both directions 124 Figure C.10 - Output terminal connection Additionally, a correction term for the impedance ratio of the balun transformer converting from 50 on the DUT is needed. The correction value is 3 dB. Figure C.11 - Outer shield grounding position Measurement of channel TCL An S21 measurement between the differential and common mode ports of the balun is performed. To of the network analyzer shall be connected to the differential mode input of the balun, while port 2 of the network analyzer shall be connected to the common mode terminal of the balun. The measured raw balance data is recorded as measIL . TCL, corrected to remove the insertion loss of the test setup and to allow for the impedance ratio of the balun, is determined using equation (C-1). )3+CM dB The proximity of the cable under test to ground planes may have an impact upon cable TCL shall be tested in both directions. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Additionally, a correction term for the impedance ratio of the balun transformer converting from 50W on An S21 measurement between the differential and common mode ports of the balun is performed. To of the network analyzer shall be connected to the differential mode input of the balun, while port 2 of the network analyzer shall be connected to the common mode terminal of the TCL, corrected to remove the insertion loss of the test setup and to allow for the impedance ratio of the (C-1) The proximity of the cable under test to ground planes may have an impact upon cable ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 125 C.2.9 TCTL of channels C.2.9.1 Test configuration of channel TCTL Figure C.12 depicts the typical schematic diagram for testing TCTL. Two ends of the same cabling or DUT pair shall be connected to the differential outputs of the test baluns. For consistency, the output port of the network analyzer will be referred to as port 1 and the input port will be designated as port 2. Port 1 shall be connected to the differential input of the balun connected to the input end of the pair under test, while port 2 shall be connected to the common mode terminal of the balun connected to the output end of the pair under test. All unused pairs on both ends shall be terminated with DMCM resistor terminations as shown in figure C.12. There shall be a common ground at each end. The grounds of the two ends shall be connected securely to the same ground plane. Refer to Annex F for information on the impact of connecting the common ground at the local and remote ends of the link. 50 WDUT 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 25 W 25 W 25 W 25 W 25 W 25 W Network Analyzer J1 J2 J1 J250 WPort 1 Port 2 Figure C.12 - Laboratory test configuration for TCTL C.2.9.2 Calibration of channel TCTL The calibration of the test hardware for TCTL measurements shall follow the procedure outlined in clause C.4.8 for both baluns being used in the measurement and the calibration values should be recorded as 1.,DMbalIL , 2.,DMbalIL , 1.,CMbalIL , and 2.,CMbalIL . ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 126 C.2.9.3 Measurement of channel TCTL The S12 measurement is performed and the result is recorded as 2measIL . TCTL, corrected to remove the insertion loss of the test setup and corrected for the transformer impedance ratio, is calculated using equation (C-2). )3(2,,1,,2 +--=CMbalDMbalmeasILILILTCTL dB (C-2) TCTL shall be tested in both directions. NOTE - The proximity of a cable under test to ground planes may have an impact upon cable balance measurements. C.3 Cable test procedures This clause describes test and calibration procedures for cables. C.3.1 Cable measurement precautions Mutual capacitance, capacitance unbalance, characteristic impedance, return loss, insertion loss, SRL, NEXT loss, ACRF, TCL, and TCTL measurements and calculations shall be performed on cable samples of 100 m (328 ft) removed from the reel or packaging. The test sample shall be laid out along a non- conducting surface, loosely coiled, or supported in aerial spans, and all pairs shall be terminated according to the specific requirements of this annex. Other test configurations are acceptable if correlation to the reference method has been verified. In case of conflict, the reference method (100 m, off-reel, resistor terminated) shall be used to determine conformance to the minimum requirements of this Standard. It may be desirable to perform measurements on lengths of cable greater than 100 m (328 ft) in order to improve measurement accuracy at frequencies at or below 1 MHz. For example, when measuring insertion loss, it is recommended that the sample length exhibit no less than 3 dB of insertion loss at the lowest frequency tested. More than one length may be required to test a full range of frequencies. Cables tested for insertion loss at elevated temperatures shall be placed inside an air-circulating oven until the cable has stabilized at the reference temperature. No more than 3 m (9 ft) of each cable end should exit the oven for connection to the measurement equipment. C.3.2 Cable measurement configurations The following requirements apply to the test configurations for cable measurements and for other components, assemblies, and test parameters as indicated by reference. For all laboratory and field transmission measurements of screened cables, the cable shield shall be grounded at both ends. Attention should be given to providing low impedance connections from the shield to ground and between grounding points of the two cable ends. C.3.2.1 Configuration for insertion loss, FEXT loss, AFEXT loss, and propagation delay measurements of cable The measurement configurations for cable insertion loss, FEXT loss, AFEXT loss, and propagation delay measurements shall comply with clause C.2.3.1. C.3.2.2 Configuration for TCL measurements of cable The measurement configurations for cable TCL shall comply with clause C.2.8.1. C.3.2.3 Configuration for TCTL measurements of cable The measurement configurations for cable TCTL shall comply with clause C.2.9.1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 127 C.3.3 Calibration of cable measurements The calibration of cable measurements shall comply with clause C.2.2.2. C.3.4 Return loss of cable C.3.4.1 Test configuration of cable return loss The cable return loss measurement configuration shall comply with the requirements of clause C.2.2.1. C.3.4.2 Calibration of cable return loss A one- or two-port calibration, as described in clause C.3.3, may be used to calibrate return loss. C.3.4.3 Measurement of cable return loss Measure the S11 parameter with the network analyzer connected to each pair on the near-end. Cable return loss shall be tested in both directions. C.3.5 Insertion loss of cable C.3.5.1 Test configuration for cable insertion loss The cable insertion loss measurement configuration shall comply with the requirements of clause C.3.2.1. C.3.5.2 Calibration of cable insertion loss A two-port calibration, as described in clause C.1.2 shall be used to calibrate insertion loss. C.3.5.3 Measurement of cable insertion loss Measure the S21 parameter with the pair under test connected to the network analyzer at both the near-end and the far-end. It is not necessary to measure cable insertion loss from both ends due to reciprocity. C.3.6 NEXT loss of cable C.3.6.1 Test configuration for cable NEXT loss The cable NEXT loss measurement configuration shall comply with the requirements of clause C.2.4.1. C.3.6.2 Calibration of cable NEXT loss A two-port calibration, as described in clause C.1.2, shall be used to calibrate NEXT loss. A two-port calibration is required between all six pair combinations at the near-end of the cable test interface if four baluns are used. C.3.6.3 Measurement of cable NEXT loss Measure the S21 parameter with the network analyzer connected to each of the 6 pair combinations in a four pair cable, or each pair combination in a multi-pair cable. Cable NEXT loss shall be tested in both directions. C.3.7 ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss of cable This clause describes a procedure for measuring ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss between pairs of adjacent cables in a 7-cable assembly consisting of cables of the same design. The frequency range is 1 to 500 MHz. In addition to the procedures in this annex, cable should be verified for compliant channel alien crosstalk performance in accordance with clauses C.2.6.3 using short and long channels (see channel configurations 3 and 1 as specified in Annex J). ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 128 C.3.7.1 Test configuration for cable ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss The cable ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss measurement configuration shall comply with the requirements of this clause. Prepare the cables to be tested in the form of an assembly consisting of seven cables. The seven cables shall be maintained in a 6-around-1 parallel configuration throughout the length to be tested as shown in figure C.13. Non-metallic bindings shall be longitudinally spaced no more than 200 mm (8 in) apart for the entire length of cable except for the last 1.0 m (3.3 ft) from each end of the cable bundle. The 6 cables shall not be deformed by the non-metallic bindings. The assembly shall be arranged such that a minimum separation of 100 mm (3.9 in) is maintained between sections of the assembly. The pairs at each end of the assembly shall be terminated with DMCM resistors as described in clause B.6.2. Figure C.13 - 6-around-1 cable test configuration C.3.7.2 Calibration of cable ANEXT loss A two-port calibration, as described in clause C.1.2 shall used to calibrate ANEXT or AFEXT loss. A two-port calibration is required between all pair combinations at the near-end of the cable test interface if four baluns are used. C.3.7.3 Measurement of cable ANEXT loss Measure the S21 parameter with the network analyzer connected to each pair of the disturbed cable and each pair of every disturbing cable. This will result in 96 measurements each for ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss. C.3.7.4 Cable PSAFEXT loss and PSAACRF calculation To calculate PSAFEXT loss from the measured data, power sum the appropriate 24 measurements for each disturbed pair. PSAACRF is calculated in accordance with equation (C-3). kkkILPSAFEXTPSAACRF-= dB (C-3) where k is the disturbed pair. C.3.8 FEXT loss of cable C.3.8.1 Test configuration of cable FEXT loss The cable FEXT loss measurement configuration shall comply with the requirements of clause C.2.5.1. ACRF is a calculation of the measurements of FEXT loss and insertion loss. C.3.8.2 Calibration of cable FEXT loss A two-port calibration, as described in clause C.1.2 shall be used to calibrate FEXT loss. A two-port calibration is required between all 12 pair combinations of the cable if more than two baluns are used. Disturbed Cable ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 129 C.3.8.3 Measurement of cable FEXT loss Cable FEXT loss shall be measured in accordance with clause C.2.5.3. Measure all 12 pair combinations for cable FEXT loss, launching from one end only. It is not necessary to measure cable FEXT loss from both ends due to reciprocity. C.3.9 TCL of cable C.3.9.1 Test configuration of cable TCL The cable TCL measurement configuration shall comply with the requirements of clause C.3.2.2. C.3.9.2 Calibration of cable TCL Cable TCL shall be calibrated in accordance with clause C.2.8.2. C.3.9.3 Measurement of cable TCL Cable TCL shall be measured in accordance with clause C.2.8.3. C.3.10 TCTL of cable C.3.10.1 Test configuration of cable TCTL The cable TCTL measurement configuration shall comply with the requirements of clause C.3.2.3. C.3.10.2 Calibration of cable TCTL The calibration of the test hardware for TCTL measurements shall follow the procedure outlined in clause C.3.9.2 for both baluns being used in the measurement and the calibration values should be recorded as 1.,DMbala , 2.,DMbala , 1.,CMbala , and 2.,CMbala . C.3.10.3 Measurement of cable TCTL Cable TCTL shall be measured in accordance with clause C.2.9.3. C.3.11 Propagation delay of cable C.3.11.1 Test configuration of cable propagation delay The cable propagation delay measurement configuration shall comply with the requirements of clause C.3.2.1. C.3.11.2 Calibration of cable propagation delay A one- or two-port calibration, as described in clause C.3.3, may be used to calibrate propagation delay. C.3.11.3 Measurement of cable propagation delay Measure all 4 pairs for cable propagation delay. It is not necessary to measure cable propagation delay from both ends due to reciprocity. C.4 Connecting hardware test procedures This clause describes test and calibration procedures for connecting hardware. Test equipment design calibration and fixturing should ensure a noise level 30 dB better than the required measurement limit over the frequency range of 1 MHz to the highest specified frequency for the category of connecting hardware being tested. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 130 C.4.1 Connecting hardware measurement configurations The following requirements apply to the test configurations for connecting hardware measurements and for other components, assemblies, and test parameters as indicated by reference. The test methods and setup requirements described herein apply to one (1) or more pairs of twisted-pair conductors. The nature of these tests is such that, when conducted properly, worst case transmission performance may be determined for a specific connector, regardless of the number of pairs that it is capable of terminating. Connecting hardware transmission testing shall be conducted upon products terminated per manufacturer's guidelines and recommended installation methods unless otherwise specified. For connecting hardware with modular interface components (i.e. plug and jack connectors), transmission tests shall be performed in a mated state. Test plug requirements are specified in clause C.4.10. DM only and DMCM resistor terminations are shown in figure B.4. DMCM terminations shall be used on all active pairs under test except when measuring return loss, where DM only resistor terminations are recommended. DMCM resistor terminations shall be used on all inactive pairs and on the opposite ends of active pairs for NEXT loss and FEXT loss testing. DMCM terminations shall be used on inactive pairs for insertion loss testing. Inactive pairs for return loss testing may be terminated with DM or DMCM resistor terminations, or left unterminated. Balun terminations may be used on the far-end of all pairs and the near-end of all inactive pairs provided that their differential mode and common mode return loss performance characteristics meet the minimum performance of the specified resistor networks. Interconnection (including test lead) requirements are specified in clause C.1.1. For the purpose of testing connecting hardware mated performance, the test plug phase reference plane and calibration planes shall be as defined in clause C.4.1.1. Connecting hardware shall be defined as a mated plug and jack, with cable terminated to both. The connector is considered to begin at the point where the sheath of the cable is cut or the point inside the sheath where the cable conductor geometry is no longer maintained. The portion of the cable [typically 12 mm (0.5 in) or less] that is disturbed by the termination shall be considered to be part of the connector under test. Unless otherwise specified for a specific test, the performance of the entire mated connector shall be assessed. For testing screened connecting hardware, a balun ground plane, allowed as an option in Annex B, shall be provided as part of the test setup and apparatus, and the shield of the connecting hardware shall be bonded to the ground plane during the testing of transmission characteristics. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 131 C.4.1.1 Test plug phase reference plane and calibration planes For categories 5e, 6, and 6A, connecting hardware measurements of return loss, insertion loss, NEXT loss, and FEXT loss are conducted by mating connecting hardware with a test plug that complies with clause C.4.10. Certain plug parameters include phase requirements, and certain connecting hardware requirements are based on calculations that involve both test plug and connecting hardware phase data. There are no test plug requirements for category 3 connecting hardware. To maintain a consistent phase reference, a “test plug phase reference plane” must be used, as explained below. The test plug phase reference plane shall be at the tip of the plug where it connects to the jack contacts. This is accomplished with a calibration at the calibration plane plus port extension. The calibration planes should be as close as possible to the test plug phase reference plane as shown in figure C.14. Refer to clause C.1.1 for requirements of the interconnections between each appropriate calibration plane and the DUT. Alternatively, the direct fixture (see clause C.4.9.1) can be calibrated at the tips of the coaxial probes (see figures E.4, E.5, and E.6) using suitable calibration artifacts. Examples are shown in figure C.15. Figure C.14 - Calibration planes, test plug phase reference plane, and port extensions Test plug phase reference plane Calibration plane plug side Calibration plane, direct fixture or jack side Through delay Port extension Port extension ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 132 C.4.1.1.1 Device delay measurements Use these measurement procedures for all test plug measurements, and for jack and direct fixture measurements to be used in de-embedding calculations. The port extension values calculated according to equation (C-5) are applied to each port (for each pair) to align measurement reference planes to the location where contact is made with the jack contacts. For all measurements subsequently used in vector or matrix calculations and/or where phase requirements are specified, the appropriate port extensions shall be applied after calibration to adjust the measurement to the test plug phase reference plane. This may be done by applying the calculated port extensions directly to the network analyzer or by adjusting the phase after measurement using equation (C-4). (deg)... (deg) ___plane)on(calibratiplane)refhase(testplugp phasephase= (sec) (Hz) 360 ... delay frequency ××+ (C-4) C.4.1.1.2 Network analyzer settings for delay measurement The settings of the network analyzer shall be sufficient to achieve a maximum of +/-5 ps of random variation. Recommended settings are as follows: 1 Measurement function is S11 delay 2 Averaging 4x or higher 3 Intermediate frequency bandwidth (IFBW) 300 Hz or less 4 Output power level in the range of –5 dBm to 0 dBm for phase critical measurements C.4.1.1.3 Test plug delay and port extension The procedure for measuring the delay of the test plug is as follows: 1 With the test plug connected to the test baluns, measure the S11 delay for each pair determined with an open circuit at the test plug phase reference plane. 2 Place a short on the test plug. This short shall connect the contacts of the pair under test at the test plug phase reference plane and be no further than 3 mm (0.12 in) from the point of contact with the jack. Measure the S11 delay for each pair shorted in this manner. 3 The delay value for each pair is calculated by averaging the open and short delay measurements over the frequency range of 100 MHz to 500 MHz using linear spacing and a minimum of 100 frequency points. These delay measurements represent round-trip delays. The one-way delay is half of the round trip S11 delay. C.4.1.1.3.1 Calculation of port extension The one-way measured delays (open and short) shall be used to calculate the port extension for each pair as determined by equation (C-5). It is recognized that there is an inherent error in the delay measurements due to the finite length of the short. To correct this error, a correction factor ckshortingjaTD described in clause (C-6) shall be applied for each port extension. ) 4 (ckshortingjashortopenTDTDTDaverageionPortExtens-+= (C-5) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 133 C.4.1.1.3.2 Plug delay correction A recommended procedure for establishing a suitable short delay correction is as follows: 1 Select a plug that can be used for this procedure and is then discarded. Three or more plugs are recommended. 2 Mount the plug rigidly onto a pyramid or other suitable impedance management fixture. 3 Measure the S11 round trip delay of the plug mated to the shorting jack (see clause E.3.2.7.3 of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 for a description of the shorting jack) on all pairs and record these value as Delayround trip plug jack. 4 Without removing the plug from the pyramid, trim the plastic ribs separating the contacts, and solder a wire across all 8 contacts where they make contact with a mating jack. 5 Measure the S11 round trip delay of the plug on each pair and record these values as Delayround trip plug . 6 Subtract 14 ps for pair 3,6 and 5 ps for the other three pairs (1,2 and 4,5 and 7,8) from Delayround trip plug to account for the delay of the short spanning the plug contacts. Record these values as Delayadjusted round trip plug. 7 Determine the difference in round trip delay for each pair of the shorting jack as follows: gundtrippluadjustedrolugjackroundtrippckshortingjaDelayDelayTD-= (C-6) NOTES, 1 The delay measurements are dependent on the proximity to ground planes. The positioning of the interconnections (e.g. twisted-pairs) should remain fixed during all measurements. 2 The measurement accuracy of this method is approximately 20 ps in a round-trip measurement, corresponding to a one-way distance of approximately 2 mm (0.08 in). C.4.1.1.4 Direct fixture delay and port extension The procedure for measuring the delay of the direct fixture is as follows: 1 Insert a short artifact into the direct fixture and measure the S11 delay for each pair of the direct fixture. 2 Subtract 14 ps for pair 3,6 and 5 ps for the other three pairs (1,2 and 4,5 and 7,8) from the measured short delay to account for the delay of the short spanning the coaxial probes. 3 Remove the short artifact, insert an open artifact into the direct fixture and measure the S11 delay for each pair of the direct fixture. 4 The delay value for each pair is calculated by averaging the open and short delay measurements over the frequency range of 100 MHz to 500 MHz using linear spacing and a minimum of 100 frequency points. These delay measurements represent round-trip delays. The one-way delay is half of the round trip S11 delay. Ensure that the extended length of the coaxial probes during the measurement using the open and short artifacts is consistent with the extended length when mated to a test plug. Short and open artifacts shall be compatible with the dimensional requirements of the direct fixture as shown in figures C.19, C.20 , and C.21 . The mating surface of these artifacts to the coaxial probes of the direct fixture shall be the same as the terminated modular plug contact height specified in IEC 60603-7 series (i.e. 5.89 – 6.17 mm). Examples of these are shown in figure C.15. Artifacts can also be created from modular plugs as long as they meet these requirements. NOTE – For calculating port extension, only the open and the short artifacts are necessary. The remaining artifacts can be used for other calibrations. Figure C.15 - Examples of direct fixture short, open, load, and through artifacts NOTES, 1 The direct fixture artifacts shown in figure 2 Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. C.4.1.1.5 Alternative delay procedure for a test plug For each pair, the delay of the test plug may also be determined by measuring the direct fixture delay, mating the test plug to the direct fixture, and then measuring the delay of the assembly (test plug plus direct fixture). Subtract the direct fixture delay from the delay of the assem C.4.2 Return loss measurements Connecting hardware shall be tested in both dire determined by measuring connecting hardware when mated to a test plug qualified per clause When possible, it is recommended to use the same resistor terminations at the far instrument calibration. C.4.3 Insertion loss measurements Connecting hardware insertion loss shall be measured in accordance with the requirements of clause C.3.5. Measure connecting hardware insertion loss with interconnections prepared and controlled in accordance with clause C.1. Connecting hardware shall be measured with at least one test plug in at least one direction. There are no insertion loss requirements for test plugs and the insertion loss contribution of the interconnections at each end of the mat improved accuracy, the insertion loss of the interconnections at each end of the mated connection may be subtracted from the measurement of the DUT. NOTE - Balanced attenuation pads, meeting the requirements of insertion loss, may be used inline with the DUT on both ends provided that they are calibrated out of the measurement. The i 10 dB over the applicable frequency range. C.4.4 NEXT loss measurements The measurement set up shall comply with required per clause C.3.3. For category 3 testing, any plug may be use with the requirements of clause 6.8.8 assure compliance with a range of plugs, as described below. Connecting hardware shall be tested in both directions for NEXT loss using at least one test plug. In addition, connecting hardware NEXT loss on all pair combinations shall be qualified with the full set of 14 test plug limit vectors specified in table to a qualified test plug specified in clause 134 Examples of direct fixture short, open, load, and through artifacts The direct fixture artifacts shown in figure C.15 may be obtained from industry sources. r illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Alternative delay procedure for a test plug For each pair, the delay of the test plug may also be determined by measuring the direct fixture delay, fixture, and then measuring the delay of the assembly (test plug plus direct fixture). Subtract the direct fixture delay from the delay of the assembly to get the test plug delay. Return loss measurements Connecting hardware shall be tested in both directions for return loss. Connecting hardware return loss is determined by measuring connecting hardware when mated to a test plug qualified per clause n possible, it is recommended to use the same resistor terminations at the far-end as were u measurements Connecting hardware insertion loss shall be measured in accordance with the requirements of . Measure connecting hardware insertion loss with interconnections prepared and controlled . Connecting hardware shall be measured with at least one test plug in at least one direction. There are no insertion loss requirements for test plugs and the insertion loss contribution of the interconnections at each end of the mated connection is assumed to be negligible. For improved accuracy, the insertion loss of the interconnections at each end of the mated connection may rom the measurement of the DUT. Balanced attenuation pads, meeting the requirements of clause C.1.2 of insertion loss, may be used inline with the DUT on both ends provided that they are calibrated out of the measurement. The insertion loss of the balanced attenuation pads should frequency range. NEXT loss measurements The measurement set up shall comply with clause B.6 and with clause C.3.2. A two For category 3 testing, any plug may be used, and the results shall comply 6.8.8. For categories 5e, 6, and 6A, a “re-embedding” process is used to range of plugs, as described below. Connecting hardware shall be tested in both directions for NEXT loss using at least one test plug. In addition, connecting hardware NEXT loss on all pair combinations shall be qualified with the full set of 14 g limit vectors specified in table C.2 for category 6 or 6A or table C.3 for category 5e to a qualified test plug specified in clause C.4.10.2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Examples of direct fixture short, open, load, and through artifacts industry sources. r illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. For each pair, the delay of the test plug may also be determined by measuring the direct fixture delay, fixture, and then measuring the delay of the assembly (test plug plus bly to get the test plug delay. ctions for return loss. Connecting hardware return loss is determined by measuring connecting hardware when mated to a test plug qualified per clause C.4.10. end as were used for Connecting hardware insertion loss shall be measured in accordance with the requirements of . Measure connecting hardware insertion loss with interconnections prepared and controlled . Connecting hardware shall be measured with at least one test plug in at least one direction. There are no insertion loss requirements for test plugs and the insertion loss ed connection is assumed to be negligible. For improved accuracy, the insertion loss of the interconnections at each end of the mated connection may with the exception of insertion loss, may be used inline with the DUT on both ends provided that they are calibrated balanced attenuation pads should be 2 to . A two-port calibration is d, and the results shall comply ding” process is used to Connecting hardware shall be tested in both directions for NEXT loss using at least one test plug. In addition, connecting hardware NEXT loss on all pair combinations shall be qualified with the full set of 14 for category 5e when mated ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 135 C.4.4.1 Connecting hardware NEXT loss measurement and calculation of plug limit vector responses in the forward direction 1 Measure the NEXT loss vector (magnitude and phase) for the jack mated to the test plug, in the forward direction (launch signal into the test plug). 2 Correct the phase to the test plug phase reference plane using the delay procedures in clause C.4.1.1.3. 3 Subtract the corrected test plug NEXT loss forward vectors obtained using clause C.4.10.4 from the corrected mated NEXT loss vectors obtained in steps 1 and 2. This will yield de-embedded jack vectors. 4 Add the plug NEXT loss limit vectors in table C.2 to the de-embedded jack vectors obtained in step 3. This yields 14 “re-embedded” mated connecting hardware NEXT loss responses. 5 Pass-fail qualification is determined by comparing the results in step 4 to the corresponding mated connecting hardware requirements. C.4.4.2 Connecting hardware NEXT loss measurement and calculation of plug limit vector responses in the reverse direction 1 Determine the delay of the jack by measuring the test plug delay, mating the test plug to the jack, and measuring the delay of the assembly. Subtract the test plug delay from the delay of the assembly to get the jack delay. 2 Measure the NEXT loss vector (magnitude and phase) for the jack mated to the test plug, in the reverse direction (launch signal into the jack). 3 Correct the phase to the test plug phase reference plane using the results obtained in step 1. 4 Subtract the corrected test plug NEXT loss reverse vectors obtained using clause C.4.10.4 from the corrected mated NEXT loss vectors obtained in steps 2 and 3. This will yield de-embedded jack vectors. 5 Add the plug NEXT loss limit vectors in table C.2 to the de-embedded jack vectors obtained in step 4. This yields 14 “re-embedded” mated connecting hardware NEXT loss responses. 6 Pass-fail qualification is determined by comparing the results in step 5 to the corresponding mated connecting hardware requirements. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 136 C.4.4.3 Determining the plug NEXT loss limit vectors The plug NEXT loss limit vectors for each case are determined by combining the magnitude values and phase values as shown in table C.2 and table C.3 for category 5e. Table C.2 - Category 6A and 6 test plug NEXT loss limit vectors Case # Pair combination Limit Plug NEXT loss limit magnitude (dB) Plug NEXT loss limit phase (degrees)1), 2) Case 1 3,6-4,5 Low 38.1-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 2 3,6-4,5 Central 38.6-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 3 3,6-4,5 Central 39.0-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 4 3,6-4,5 High 39.5-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 5 1,2-3,6 Low 46.5-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 6 1,2-3,6 High 49.5-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 7 3,6-7,8 Low 46.5-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 8 3,6-7,8 High 49.5-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 9 1,2-4,5 Low 57-20log(f /100) +90 Case 10 1,2-4,5 High 70-20log(f /100) -90 Case 11 4,5-7,8 Low 57-20log(f /100) +90 Case 12 4,5-7,8 High 70-20log(f /100) -90 Case 13 1,2-7,8 Low 66-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 14 1,2-7,8 High 66-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase minus 180° 1) Test plug NEXT loss phase is determined by following the procedure in clause C.4.10.4. 2) The reference plane for measuring test plug NEXT loss phase and mated NEXT loss shall be the test plug phase reference plane as described in clause C.4.1.1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 137 Table C.3 - Category 5e test plug NEXT loss limit vectors Case # Pair combination Limit Plug NEXT loss limit magnitude (dB) Plug NEXT loss limit phase (degrees)1), 2) Case 1 3,6-4,5 Low 35.8-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 2 3,6-4,5 Central n/a n/a Case 3 3,6-4,5 Central n/a n/a Case 4 3,6-4,5 High 39.5-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 5 1,2-3,6 Low 42-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 6 1,2-3,6 High 50-20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 7 3,6-7,8 Low 42 -20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 8 3,6-7,8 High 50 -20log(f /100) Test plug NEXT loss phase Case 9 1,2-4,5 Low 50 -20log(f /100) 90° or -90° Case 10 1,2-4,5 High n/a n/a Case 11 4,5-7,8 Low 50 -20log(f /100) 90° or -90° Case 12 4,5-7,8 High n/a n/a Case 13 1,2-7,8 Low 60 -20log(f /100) 90° or -90° Case 14 1.2-7,8 High n/a n/a 1) Test plug NEXT loss phase is determined by following the procedure in clause C.4.10.4. 2) The reference plane for measuring test plug NEXT loss phase and mated NEXT loss shall be the test plug phase reference plane as described in clause C.4.1.1. C.4.4.4 Connecting hardware NEXT loss requirements Verify that the mated response with the qualified test plug meets the requirements of clause 6.8.8 with the exception that pair combination 3,6 - 4,5 shall meet the values in table C.4. The re-embedded response for case 2, case 3, and cases 5 – 14, as specified in table C.2, shall meet the connecting hardware NEXT loss requirements of Table 97 of clause 6.8.8. The re-embedded response for case 1 and case 4, as specified in table C.2, shall meet the requirements of table C.4. Table C.4 - Category 6 and 6A connecting hardware NEXT loss requirements for case 1 and case 4 Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB) 1 £ f £ 250 250 < f £ 5001) 52.5 - 20log(f /100) 44.54 - 40log(f /250) 1) Category 6A only. C.4.5 FEXT loss measurements Test leads shall be connected to both ends of the test sample. The measurement set up shall comply with clause B.6 and with clause C.2.3. A two-port calibration is required per clause C.3.3. Connecting hardware FEXT loss is determined by measuring connecting hardware when mated to a test plug qualified per clause C.4.10.2. Test all 12 pair combinations in at least one direction. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 138 C.4.6 Connecting Hardware ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss measurements This clause describes the reference test procedure for measuring ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss between pairs of connecting hardware of the same design. The frequency range is 1-500 MHz. In addition to the procedures in this clause, the connecting hardware should be verified for compliant channel alien crosstalk performance in accordance with clause 6.2.10 using short and long channels (see channel configurations 3 and 1 as specified in Annex J. C.4.6.1 Measurement outline 1 Network analyzer setup and calibration 2 Measurement floor (including fixturing) determination and measurement 3 Terminate DUTs 4 Measure ANEXT loss 5 Determine region of influence 6 Calculate PSANEXT loss 7 Measure AFEXT loss 8 Determine region of influence 9 Calculate PSAFEXT loss C.4.6.2 Network analyzer and test fixture settings Frequency sweep: 1 MHz to 500 MHz C.4.6.3 Measurement floor The measurement floor includes the effects of the fixturing that is used and the random noise floor of the network analyzer. The measurement floor for the test fixture should be measured with the terminating cables and resistor terminations in place. The fixture/measurement setup, including network analyzer settings, should be designed and positioned such that the desired measurement floor is achieved. The recommended measurement floor is 30 dB better than the connecting hardware PSANEXT loss or PSAFEXT loss requirement, as appropriate. C.4.6.4 DUT setup for ANEXT loss and AFEXT loss measurement Select the worst alien crosstalk position in the connecting hardware mounting system as the disturbed position. The ANEXT loss measurement is performed between two DUTs as shown in figure C.16. The AFEXT loss measurement is performed between two DUTs as shown in figure C.17. Each DUT consists of a mated modular plug and socket combination and shall be mounted in its specified mounting arrangement (e.g. patch panel, TO) according to the manufacturers instructions. Each modular test plug should be of a design known to meet the test plug requirements detailed in clause C.4.10. Cables between the baluns and the DUT should be less than 300 mm (12 in). In case those cables need to be longer than 300 mm (12 in) (e.g. testing large multi-port panels), their insertion loss shall be accounted for. For ANEXT loss measurements, it is recommended that the far-end of each modular plug and socket mated combination be terminated with a minimum of 40 m (131 ft) of cable. For AFEXT loss measurement, it is recommended that the far-end of the disturbing modular plug and socket and near-end of the disturbed modular plug and socket are terminated with a minimum of 40 m (131 ft) of cable. The use of minimum category 6A-rated S/FTP cable (as defined by ISO/IEC 11801, 2nd Ed.) is recommended. However, it is possible to use F/UTP, UTP or other cable types if the recommended measurement floor can be demonstrated. The far-end of each of the terminating cables should be DMCM terminated, with the CM terminations of the four pairs in each cable connected together. The far-end CM terminations of the two cables should not be connected together or to the CM termination of the near-end and should be left floating. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 139 Figure C.16 – Connecting hardware ANEXT loss measurement setup ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 140 Figure C.17 - Connecting hardware AFEXT loss measurement setup ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 141 C.4.6.5 Region of influence The number of disturbing ports to be included in the power sum calculation is dependent on the configuration. Significant connectors may be located in the same or other mounting systems in close proximity and shall be assessed as follows. An example configuration is shown in figure C.18. Figure C.18 - Example connector configurations for alien crosstalk For any given configuration, the determination of which ports to be included can be made based on the ANEXT loss contribution to the disturbed port. If at any frequency point the ANEXT measurement is less than 90-20log(f/100), then the entire ANEXT loss response of that connector combination shall be included in the overall power sum result. Calculations that result in a significance limit greater than 90 dB shall revert to a value of 90 dB. C.4.6.6 PSANEXT loss and PSAFEXT loss calculation For each port, the determination of including the individual ANEXT loss measurements should be made as follows: Let X1 through Xn be the ANEXT loss contribution of all disturbing pairs that are worse than the significance limit. The PSANEXT loss of the disturbed port (DUT) is calculated as shown in equation (8). The PSAFEXT loss of the disturbed port (DUT) is calculated as shown in equation (7). C.4.7 TCL measurements Test set up, calibration, and measurement shall be done per clause C.2.8 except for differences specified in this clause. Test plugs used in connecting hardware TCL testing should comply with the test plug requirements given in clause C.4.10. NOTE - For connecting hardware TCL measurements, the far-end common mode termination should not be connected to ground. Disturbed Connector Disturbed Connector ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 142 C.4.8 TCTL measurements Test set up, calibration, and measurement shall be done per clause C.3.10. In addition, test plugs used in connecting hardware TCTL testing should comply with the test plug requirements given in clause C.4.10. C.4.9 Test plug qualification fixtures The direct fixture (see figure C.19) is used during test plug NEXT loss and FEXT loss measurements and may also be used for test plug return loss measurements. Refer to Annex E for additional information about the direct fixture and other test fixtures used to facilitate impedance control of interconnections for measurement of connecting hardware performance parameters. Impedance controlled measurement fixtures may be used when the use of unjacketed pair leads is necessary between the connecting hardware under test and the calibration plane. C.4.9.1 Direct fixture A direct fixture is specified for measurement of test plug performance. The direct fixture provides for electrical connection of the test plug to measurement equipment with minimal residual effect on the measurement properties of the test plug. The direct fixture is a precision device with properties controlled by design and manufacture. The direct fixture shall conform to the dimensional requirements of figures C.19, C.20 , and C.21 . It is recommended to use the direct fixture as shown in figures E.4, E.5, and E.6. The direct fixture residual NEXT loss, FEXT loss, and return loss shall comply with the requirements of table C.5. Figure C.19 - Direct fixture mating dimensions, top view ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 143 Figure C.20 - Direct fixture mating dimensions, front view Figure C.21 - Direct fixture mating dimensions, side view Dimension tolerances for figures C.19, C.20 , and C.21 are + .025 mm (.001 in). Table C.5 - Direct fixture performance Direct fixture performance parameter Value (dB) Pair-to-pair residual NEXT loss and FEXT loss > 74 – 20log(f /100), 75 dB max. Return loss > 34 – 20log(f /100), 40 dB max. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 144 C.4.9.2 Impedance matched balun interface fixtures See Annex E for impedance matching test fixtures that interface between the connecting hardware under test and the calibration plane. C.4.10 Test plug characterization This clause describes the construction, qualification, and requirements for test plugs for verifying category 5e, 6, and 6A connecting hardware performance. C.4.10.1 Test plug construction For the purposes of this Standard, a modular test plug consists of an assembly that meets the dimensional requirements of IEC 60603-7 with suitable connections from the electrical contacts. The modular test plug for category 6A jack qualification may be PCB based, an example of which is shown in figure C.26, or wire terminated using a suitable modular plug or plug assembly. A test fixture that uses a PCB based modular test plug is shown in clause E.4. NOTE - The direct fixture, as specified in clause C.4.9.1, is compatible with plugs having a contact area ≥ 2.60 mm (0.102 in) as defined by dimension H2 of IEC 60603-7, clause 3.2.2. The reproducibility of connecting hardware NEXT loss measurements can be optimized by: 1 Use of modular plugs with centered NEXT loss and FEXT loss performance. 2 Use of a PCB based modular test plug an example of which is shown in clause C.4.10.8.2. 3 Use of test fixtures having terminations that provide improved isolation and return loss. 4 Minimizing the electrical length of the test plug interconnections as described in clause C.1.1. 5 Improvement of the wire management in the test fixture of any test leads used as part of plug construction and mounting. See clause C.1.1. Test fixtures described in Annex E are designed to provide suitable interface and termination. C.4.10.2 Test plug qualification Test plugs shall be qualified for all requirements of clauses C.4.10.3 (NEXT loss), C.4.10.5 (FEXT loss) and C.4.10.7 (return loss) up to the maximum specified frequency for the category. NEXT loss and FEXT loss, of test plugs shall be measured using the direct fixture or equivalent described in clause C.4.9.1. C.4.10.2.1 Test plug measurement Due to variations that are inherent in terminating cables to modular plugs, the test plug used to qualify connecting hardware performance must be carefully controlled. To measure connecting hardware NEXT loss, test plugs need only be qualified in the near-end test direction, with the cable end of the plug designated as the near-end. Test plugs thus qualified are used to characterize mated connecting hardware performance for both the near-end and far-end measurement orientations. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 145 C.4.10.2.2 Procedure for mating a test plug to the direct fixture 1 Place the test plug into the plug clamp as shown in figure C.22. Figure C.22 - Modular plug placed into the plug clamp NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. 2 Holding the test plug in place, slide the plug clamp onto the clamp block guide pins as shown in figure C.23 NOTE - The spring loaded pin in the clamp block pushes against the test plug and holds it in position against the plug clamp. Figure C.23 - Guiding the plug into position NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. 3 Guide the test plug into position against the coaxial probes making certain that the test plug does not rock in the plug clamp and that it slides vertically onto the coaxial probes. Avoid any side loading on the coaxial probes as they may break if pushed sideways. 4 Secure the plug clamp and the clamp block together using suitable spring clips as shown in figure E.4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 146 C.4.10.3 Test plug NEXT loss requirements The corrected NEXT loss vectors (magnitude and phase) of the test plug in the forward direction shall be within the test plug NEXT loss ranges of table C.6. Test plug NEXT loss requirements apply in the forward direction only. Test plug NEXT loss in the reverse direction shall also be measured so that the data can be used in the reverse direction connecting hardware NEXT loss qualification procedure as described in clause C.4.4.4. Table C.6 - Test plug NEXT loss ranges Pair combination NEXT loss magnitude range (dB) 1) NEXT loss phase range (degrees)2) 3,6-4,5 38.1-20log(f /100) £ NEXT loss £ 39.5-20log(f /100) 5) 50 – 100 MHz: (-90 + 1.5× f /100) ± 1 100 – 500 MHz: (-90 + 1.5× f /100) ± f /100 1,2-3,6 46.5-20log(f /100) £ NEXT loss £ 49.5-20log(f /100) (-90 +1.5 f /100) ± 3× f /100 3,6-7,8 46.5-20log(f /100) £ NEXT loss £ 49.5-20log(f /100) (-90 +1.5× f /100) ± 3× f /100 1,2-4,5 NEXT loss ³ 57-20log(f /100) 4) 90 ± (30× f /100) 3) 4,5-7,8 NEXT loss ³ 57-20log(f /100) 4) 90 ± (30× f /100) 3) 1,2-7,8 NEXT loss ³ 66-20log(f /100) 4) Any phase 1) Magnitude limits apply over the frequency range from 10 MHz to 500 MHz. 2) Phase limits apply over the frequency range from 50 MHz to 500 MHz. 3) When the measured test plug NEXT loss magnitude is greater than 70-20log(f /100) or 70 dB, the phase limit does not apply. 4) When the NEXT loss magnitude limit calculation results in a value greater than 70 dB, the limit shall revert to 70 dB. 5) When the fixture described in Annex E or an equivalent is used, the magnitude high limit for pair combination 36-45, 39.5-20log(f /100), shall be 39.5-20log(f /100) + 0.5(f-300)/200 for the frequency range from 300 MHz to 500 MHz. NOTE – An alternative procedure for qualification of test plug NEXT loss may be used if equivalent results and equivalent or better accuracy can be demonstrated. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 C.4.10.4 Test plug NEXT loss measurement Measure the test plug NEXT loss vectors for all pair combinations in both directions. Use the direct fixture specified in clause C.4.9.1 or equivalent. Correct the plug phase reference plane, as shown in figure example of a measurement setup for test plug NEXT loss is shown in figure Figure C.24 - Example of a measurement setup for test plug NEXT loss 147 Test plug NEXT loss measurement Measure the test plug NEXT loss vectors for all pair combinations in both directions. Use the direct fixture or equivalent. Correct the phase of all NEXT loss measurements to the test plug phase reference plane, as shown in figure C.14, using the procedures in clause example of a measurement setup for test plug NEXT loss is shown in figure C.24. Example of a measurement setup for test plug NEXT loss Measure the test plug NEXT loss vectors for all pair combinations in both directions. Use the direct fixture phase of all NEXT loss measurements to the test , using the procedures in clause C.4.1.1. An Example of a measurement setup for test plug NEXT loss ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 148 C.4.10.5 Test plug FEXT loss requirements The corrected FEXT loss vectors (magnitude and phase) of all 12 pair combinations of the test plug shall be within the test plug FEXT loss ranges of table C.7. Table C.7 - Test plug FEXT loss ranges Pair combination Frequency range (MHz) FEXT loss magnitude range (dB) Phase (degrees) 3,6-4,5 10-500 46-20log(f /100) £ FEXT loss £ 56-20log(f /100) 3) -90 ± (30× f /100) 1), 2) 1,2-3,6 10-500 46-20log(f /100) £ FEXT loss £ 56-20log(f /100) 3) -90 ± (30× f /100) 1), 2) 3,6-7,8 10-500 46-20log(f /100) £ FEXT loss £ 56-20log(f /100) 3) -90 ± (30× f /100) 1), 2) 1,2-4,5 10-500 FEXT loss ³ 55-20log(f /100) 4) any phase 4,5-7,8 10-500 FEXT loss ³ 55-20log(f /100) 4) any phase 1,2-7,8 10-500 FEXT loss ³ 55-20log(f /100) 4) any phase 1) When the measured test plug FEXT loss is greater than 70 dB, the phase requirement does not apply. 2) Phase limits apply over the frequency range from 100 MHz to 500 MHz. 3) When upper limit FEXT loss calculations result in values greater than 70 dB, there shall be no upper limit for FEXT loss. 4) When lower limit FEXT loss calculations result in values greater than 70 dB, the lower limit FEXT shall revert to a limit of 70 dB. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 C.4.10.6 Test plug FEXT loss measurement Measure the test plug FEXT loss vectors for all pair combinations. Use the direct fixture specified in clause C.4.9.1 or equivalent. Correct the phase of all FEXT reference plane, as shown in figure of a measurement setup for test plug FEXT loss is shown in figure Figure C.25 - Example of a measurement setup for 149 Test plug FEXT loss measurement Measure the test plug FEXT loss vectors for all pair combinations. Use the direct fixture specified in or equivalent. Correct the phase of all FEXT loss measurements to the test plug phase reference plane, as shown in figure C.14, using the procedures specified in clause C.4.1.1 of a measurement setup for test plug FEXT loss is shown in figure C.25. Example of a measurement setup for test plug FEXT loss Measure the test plug FEXT loss vectors for all pair combinations. Use the direct fixture specified in loss measurements to the test plug phase C.4.1.1. An example test plug FEXT loss ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 150 C.4.10.7 Test plug return loss requirements The return loss, magnitude and phase, of the test plug shall meet the values specified in table C.8. Table C.8 – Test plug return loss requirements Pair Frequency range (MHz) Return loss magnitude (dB) 2) Return loss phase (degrees) 1) 1,2 10-500 ³ 33.5-20log(f /100) negative phase 3,6 10-500 ³ 33.5-20log(f /100) 3) positive phase 4,5 10-500 ³ 33.5-20log(f /100) negative phase 7,8 10-500 ³ 33.5-20log(f /100) negative phase 1) The phase requirement does not apply when the measured magnitude is greater than 35-20log(f /100). 2) Calculations that result in return loss requirements greater than 40 dB shall revert to a requirement of 40 dB minimum. 3) For category 5e test plugs, the return loss magnitude shall be ³ 30-20log(f /100). The test plug return loss requirements are not intended to reflect the return loss performance properties of plugs terminated at the ends of cords. The transmission properties of modular cords are included in the requirements of clause 6.9.1 describing cord and jumper cord return loss. C.4.10.8 Test plug return loss measurement This clause describes procedures for test plug return loss testing. At least one test plug shall be qualified for connecting hardware return loss testing. Test plug return loss shall be qualified in at least one direction, in the reverse direction per clause C.4.10.8.3 or in the forward direction per clause C.4.10.8.4. C.4.10.8.1 Test plug return loss interconnections and termination The interconnections used to construct the test plug shall be qualified using the procedure in clause C.1.1. The test plug may be terminated with the direct fixture or another suitable reference jack provided that qualified reference load terminations are used. The far-end of the reference jack or direct fixture should be terminated with the calibration reference load resistor terminations. The impedance effects of the reference jack or direct measurement fixture shall be removed using the procedure in clause C.4.10.8.4. C.4.10.8.2 Test plug construction for return loss testing A test plug that uses a PCB substrate may be used. Refer to figure C.26. Figure C.26 - Example of a test plug using a PCB substrate NOTES, 1 Plugs of this type may be obtained from industry sources. Alternative equivalent components may also be used. 2 Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 151 C.4.10.8.3 Test plug return loss reverse direction qualification procedure Test plug return loss may be verified by testing in the reverse direction, with load resistors applied to the interconnections of the test plug and the test plug attached to the test ports through a direct fixture that has been calibrated to the test plug phase reference plane. The test plug reference plane is shown in figure C.14. The calibration procedure is described in clause C.4.1.1. Use precision 0.1% 0603 or similar chip resistors as described in clause B.6.2 for DM terminations. Application of the resistors at the far-end of the test plug shall be done in such a way as to minimize the disturbance of the interconnections. An interconnection length of 12 mm (0.5 in) is suggested. C.4.10.8.4 Test plug return loss forward direction qualification procedure (with matrix de- embedding) The forward direction test plug return loss test procedure is applicable for determination of test plug return loss properties when measured in the forward direction and where a reference jack is used for termination. This procedure relies on the consistency of 3 selected return loss de-embedding reference jacks (reference jacks); one terminated as short, one terminated as open, and one terminated with a DMCM load. The properties of the reference jack are mathematically removed using a matrix de- embedding process. This method assumes that it is difficult or inconvenient to terminate a modular plug with chip resistors directly across its contacts where connection is made with the jack contacts. However, for the following de-embedding method to work, a modular plug must be terminated in this way (return loss reference plug), here done by soldering chip resistors to the modular plug contacts. Since this is a destructive operation, it is obviously not useful for general test plug return loss measurements. An alternative procedure that facilitates connection of chip resistors directly to the contacts of a test plug without soldering, or other destructive technique, may be used and the de-embedding calculations avoided. If this procedure is used, correct the phase of all return loss measurements to the test plug phase reference plane as, shown in figure C.14, using the procedures specified in clause C.4.1.1. C.4.10.8.4.1 Procedure overview Measurement of the return loss vectors (magnitude and phase) of a test plug for each pair involves the following steps: 1 Measure the return loss (S11) of the return loss reference plug mated with each of the open, short, and load reference jacks. 2 Measure the return loss (S11) of the return loss reference plug for each of the cases as follows: a Leave each pair of the return loss reference plug unterminated. b Terminate each pair at the tips of the contacts with a short. c Terminate each pair at the tips of the contacts with a 100 ± 0.1 % chip resistor. 3 Calculate the S-parameters of the reference jack from the measurements of steps 1 and 2 using the return loss reference plug S-parameters (step 2) and the mated S-parameters (step 1) using the matrix method of clause C.4.10.8.4.4. 4 As an alternative to steps 1 - 3, the reference jack vectors provided in table C.9, which have been measured using steps 1 - 3, may be used in the reference jack matrix if the reference jack described in clause C.4.10.8.4.2 is used. 5 Measure the return loss (S11) of a test plug mated with each of the open, short, and load reference jacks. 6 Calculate the S-parameters of this test plug using the result in step 3 or 4 and step 5 using the matrix method of clause C.4.10.8.4.5. C.4.10.8.4.2 Selection of a return loss de This procedure can be applied to any terminating fixture (e.g. jack or the direct fixture). The use of a reference jack is described in this clause. The ideal terminating fixture s loss performance. The reference jack should have minimal length from the test plug phase reference plane to the point where precision termination loads are connected. In addition, a PCB mount type return loss reference jack takes advantage of the consistency of surface mount resistors and dimensionally controlled interconnects (traces) to the loads. An example of a reference jack assembly that satisfies these parameters is Fluke Networks p/n DTX assembly (with OPEN, SHORT and LOAD terminations on each reference jack) and a front view of the reference jack opening. Figure C.27 - Example of suitable return loss de NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Table C.9 defines the nominal S-parameter matrix values of the jack assembly as shown in figure C.2 500 MHz. The S parameters are computed using equation 2fbfakSxx×+×+= where f is the frequency in MHz. Table C.9 - Fluke Networks return loss de NOTE - For purposes of the development of the standard reference jack vectors, S22 is assumed equal to S11. Poly Coef 12 real 12 imag S11 k 0 0 and a 0 -1.778E S22 b 0 0 Poly Coef 12 real 12 imag S12 k 1 0 and a -1.61E-05 -6.44E- S21 b -2.11E-07 0 152 Selection of a return loss de-embedding reference jack This procedure can be applied to any terminating fixture (e.g. jack or the direct fixture). The use of a reference jack is described in this clause. The ideal terminating fixture should have transparent return loss performance. The reference jack should have minimal length from the test plug phase reference plane to the point where precision termination loads are connected. In addition, a PCB mount type return takes advantage of the consistency of surface mount resistors and dimensionally controlled interconnects (traces) to the loads. An example of a reference jack assembly that satisfies these parameters is Fluke Networks p/n DTX-PLCAL. Figure C.27 shows a rear view of a reference jack assembly (with OPEN, SHORT and LOAD terminations on each reference jack) and a front view of the Example of suitable return loss de-embedding reference jack assembly Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. parameter matrix values of the Fluke Networks DTX C.27. The polynomials are defined for all frequencies from 1 The S parameters are computed using equation (C-7). Fluke Networks return loss de-embedding reference jack assembly standard vectors For purposes of the development of the standard reference jack vectors, S22 is assumed 12 imag 36 real 36 imag 45 real 45 imag 78 real 0 0 0 0 0 1.778E-5 1.21E-5 1.61E-4 0 -1.778E-5 0 6.64E-8 -8.18E-8 0 0 0 12 imag 36 real 36 imag 45 real 45 imag 78 real 1 0 1 0 1 -04 -2.51E-05 -6.63E-04 -1.95E-05 -6.21E-04 -1.92E -2.31E-07 0 -1,82E-07 0 -1.97E ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 This procedure can be applied to any terminating fixture (e.g. jack or the direct fixture). The use of a hould have transparent return loss performance. The reference jack should have minimal length from the test plug phase reference plane to the point where precision termination loads are connected. In addition, a PCB mount type return takes advantage of the consistency of surface mount resistors and dimensionally controlled interconnects (traces) to the loads. An example of a reference jack assembly that satisfies shows a rear view of a reference jack assembly (with OPEN, SHORT and LOAD terminations on each reference jack) and a front view of the embedding reference jack assembly Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Fluke Networks DTX-PLCAL reference ined for all frequencies from 1 MHz to (C-7) embedding reference jack assembly standard vectors For purposes of the development of the standard reference jack vectors, S22 is assumed 78 real 78 imag 0 -1.778E-5 0 78 real 78 imag 0 1.92E-05 -6.30E-04 1.97E-07 0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 153 C.4.10.8.4.3 Return loss de-embedding reference jack S-parameters The S-parameters of a reference jack are determined by first mating the reference jack with a return loss reference plug. The S-parameters of this return loss reference plug will be determined destructively after the mated return loss measurements have been obtained. Figure C.28 - Flow chart for return loss de-embedding reference jack S-parameters Measure S11 mated Open, Short, Load Compute S-parameter matrix Compute T-parameter matrix Measure S11 plug Open, Short, Load Compute S-parameter matrix Compute T-parameter matrix Compute inverse T-parameter matrix Compute jack T-parameter matrix Compute jack S-parameter matrix Plug tests Mated plug and jack tests ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 154 C.4.10.8.4.4 Calculation of return loss de-embedding reference jack S-parameters A mated plug and jack can be mathematically represented by two cascaded networks, P (plug) and J (jack) with the output of J terminated with a known impedance R as shown in figure C.29. Measurements can be performed on the network and the input parameter S11 can be recorded with various loads. A method to determine network parameters is to vary the load from the 100 nominal impedance to OPEN and SHORT conditions. Figure C.29 - Representation of a mated connection by two cascaded networks From the three load conditions, the composite scattering parameters can be derived as shown in equations (C-8), (C-9), (C-10), and (C-11). This derivation assumes that forward and reverse transmission parameters S12 and S21 are reciprocal. loadPJSG=11 (C-8) ()() ( )shortopen loadopenshortload PJS G-G G-GG-G = 2 12 (C-9) ()() ( )shortopen loadopenshortload PJS G-G G-GG-G = 2 21 (C-10) () ( )shortopen loadshortopen PJS G-G G-G+G = 2 22 (C-11) After the S-parameters of the mated plug and jack have been measured and calculated, the return loss reference plug S-parameters must be determined. It is necessary to make mated measurements prior to determining the return loss reference plug S-parameters since the return loss reference plug measurement is destructive. The return loss of the reference plug is measured with OPEN, SHORT and LOAD (100 ) impedances connected at the test plug phase reference plane as shown in figures C.30 and C.31. Γin P J Load, R S11 S21 S22 S12 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 155 Figure C.30 - Return loss de-embedding reference plug terminated with LOAD resistors NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Figure C.31 - Return loss test plug calibration and phase reference planes Similar to equations (C-8), (C-9), (C-10), and (C-11), a set of S-parameters for the return loss reference plug can be determined. From the OPEN, SHORT and LOAD measurements, the S-parameters of the return loss reference plug and of the mated plug and jack are given by equations (C-12) and (C-13).    = PP PP P SS SS S 2221 1211 (C-12)    = PJPJ PJ SS SS S PJ PJ 2221 1211 (C-13) In order to extract the S-parameters of the reference jack, the S-parameters must be converted to Transfer Scattering Parameters (T-parameters). The T-parameter matrix of cascaded networks is the product of the individual T-parameter matrices of each individual network as given in equation (C-14). JPPJTTT×= (C-14) The T-parameter matrix of the reference jack is given by equation (C-15). PJPJTTiT×= (C-15) where PTi represents the inverse T-parameter matrix In order to determine the reference jack S-parameters, both the plug and mated plug and jack S-parameters are converted into T-parameters as in equation (C-16) and the inverse T-parameters as in equation (C-17). Test Plug Test Equipment Calibration Plane Test Plug Phase Reference Plane ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 156 21 111 S T = 21 2212 S ST-= 21 1121 S ST= 21 22 S STD-= (C-16) where: )21122211(SSSSS×-×=D T TTi D =2211 T TTi D -=1212 T TTi D -=2121 T TTi D =1122 (C-17) where: )21122211(TTTTT×-×=D Using equation (C-15) the properties of the reference jack are obtained using equation (C-18). ()() ( ) ( )     ++ ++= PJPPJPPJPPJP PJPPJPPJPPJP J TTiTTiTTiTTi TTiTTiTTiTTi T 2222122121221121 2212121121121111 (C-18) where: TiXXP are the plug inverse T-parameters. TXXPJ are the mated plug and jack T-parameters. If required, the jack T-parameters can be converted back into S-parameters using equations (C-19). J J T S 11 121= J J J T TS 11 12 D= J J J T TS 11 2111= J J J T TS 11 1222-= (C-19) where )21122211(JJJJJTTTTT×-×=D (C-20) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 157 C.4.10.8.4.5 Determining the return loss of a test plug Once the T-parameters of the reference jack have been calculated, equations (C-21) and (C-22) can be used to obtain the return loss (S11) of a test plug. Figure C.32 - Flow chart of determination of test plug return loss In order to determine the return loss of a test plug, the mated test plug and reference jack S-parameters are measured and converted to T-parameters as in equation (C-16) to yield PJT then solve for the test plug T-parameters using equations (C-21) and (C-22). JPJPTiTT×= (C-21) ()() ( ) ( )    ++ ++= JPJJPJJPJJPJ JPJJPJJPJJPJ P TiTTiTTiTTiT TiTTiTTiTTiT T 2222122121221121 2212121121121111 (C-22) where TiXXJ are the jack inverse T-parameters. TXXPJ are the mated plug and jack T-parameters. The plug reflection coefficient can be computed per equation (C-23). P P Pplug T TS 11 2111==G (C-23) Measure S11 Open, Short, Load Compute S-parameter matrix Compute T-parameter matrix Jack inverse T-parameter matrix (from previous plug and mated jack measurements). Compute plug T-parameter matrix Compute plug S-parameter matrix Plug test result Mated plug and jack tests ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 158 C.4.11 Category 6A measurement reproducibility The content of this clause is provided for information only. Measurement reproducibility is provided for test plugs and mated connecting hardware. Measurement reproducibility for mated connecting hardware is dependent on the performance of test plugs. C.4.11.1 NEXT loss measurement reproducibility between laboratories The measurement reproducibility of category 6A connecting hardware NEXT loss is primarily limited by the measurement reproducibility and variability of the test plugs. Controlled experiments have demonstrated that the test plug measurement process is reproducible within the noise floor levels indicated in informative table C.10. The variability of test plugs is controlled by the test plug requirements of tables C.6, C.7, and C.8. Table C.10 – Category 6A NEXT loss measurement reproducibility between laboratories Pair combination Frequency range (MHz) Measurement noise floor (dB) Maximum error at the limit Test plug requirement at 100 MHz (dB) Test plug reproducibility (dB) Reproducibility for mated NEXT loss at the test limit (dB) 3,6 - 4,5 10 – 500 66 – 20log(f /100) (38.77) nominal 0.2 3.0 1,2 - 3,6 10 – 500 66 – 20log(f /100) (47.87) nominal 0.5 1.5 3,6 - 7,8 10 – 500 66 – 20log(f /100) (47.87) nominal 0.5 1.5 1,2 - 4,5 10 – 500 68 – 20log(f /100) (57.00) minimum 2.0 1.5 4,5 - 7,8 10 – 500 68 – 20log(f /100) (57.00) minimum 2.0 1.5 1,2 - 7,8 10 – 500 72 – 20log(f /100) (66.00) minimum 3.0 1.5 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 159 C.4.11.2 FEXT loss test plug measurement reproducibility between laboratories The measurement reproducibility of category 6A connecting hardware FEXT loss is primarily limited by the measurement reproducibility and variability of the test plugs. Controlled experiments have demonstrated that the test plug measurement process is reproducible within the noise floor levels indicated in table C.11. Table C.11 – Category 6A FEXT loss measurement reproducibility between laboratories Pair combination Frequency range (MHz) Measurement noise floor (dB) Maximum error at the limit Test plug requirement at 100 MHz (dB) Test plug reproducibility (dB) 3,6-4,5 10 – 500 66 – 20log(f /100) (49.6) nominal 1.0 1,2-3,6 10 – 500 66 – 20log(f /100) (49.6) nominal 1.0 3,6-7,8 10 – 500 66 – 20log(f /100) (49.6) nominal 1.0 1,2-4,5 10 – 500 68 – 20log(f /100) n/a - 4,5-7,8 10 – 500 68 – 20log(f /100) n/a - 1,2-7,8 10 – 500 72 – 20log(f /100) n/a - C.4.11.3 Return loss measurement reproducibility between laboratories Laboratory-to-laboratory measurement accuracy is highly affected by the accuracy of the reference load. The variability as a function of frequency that may be expected in the results at the pass/fail limit for category 6A connecting hardware return loss is in shown in figure C.33. Figure C.33 - Inter-laboratory return loss variability for testing category 6A connecting hardware 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 0 100 200 300 400 500 Frequency in MHzInter-laboratory variability in dB ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 160 C.5 Modular cord test procedures C.5.1 Network analyzer test configuration The network analyzer configuration for modular cord testing is depicted in figure C.34. Four baluns should be used to connect the modular cord under test to the network analyzer and test heads that are qualified in accordance with clause C.5.2. DMCM terminations shall be applied to all pairs on both ends. Balun cases and resistor networks shall be bonded to a ground plane. Interconnections shall be prepared and qualified per clause C.1.1.1. Figure C.34 - Network analyzer configuration C.5.2 Test fixturing for modular cords Modular cord test head NEXT loss, FEXT loss, and return loss requirements are specified in this clause. For the purpose of testing modular cord NEXT, the modular cord test head shall meet all of the requirements of this clause. For the purpose of measuring modular cord return loss, it is sufficient for the test head to meet only the requirements of clause C.5.2.3. The test head used at each end of the test configuration shall be of the same design. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 161 C.5.2.1 Modular cord test head NEXT loss Mated modular cord test head NEXT loss shall be measured for all pair combinations in accordance with clause C.4.4.. For all frequencies from 10 MHz to 500 MHz, modular test head NEXT loss performance shall meet the connecting hardware NEXT loss requirements specified in clause 6.8.8 for categories 6 and 6A, and shall exceed 47-20log(f/100) from 10 to 100 MHz for category 5e. In addition, for categories 6 and 6A, the best case NEXT loss performance of the mated modular cord test head shall be centered for pair combinations 3,6-4,5, 1,2-3,6, and 3,6-7,8 as verified by the following procedure. 1 Measure the mated NEXT loss throughout the frequency range from 10 to 500 MHz for the low and high limit-value virtual test plugs per the procedures in clause C.4.4.4. 2 Determine the minimum margin (dB) to the category 6 or 6A connecting hardware NEXT loss requirements as specified in table C.4 for pair combination 3,6-4,5 and clause 6.8.8 for pair combinations 1,2-3,6 and 3,6-7,8 from 10 to the upper frequency of the category for both the low and high test plug limit vectors. Use the correct table for category 6 or 6A, or category 5e. 3 The difference between these minimum margins for the high and low limit-value test plugs shall be less than 2 dB for the pair combination terminated on pins 3,6 4,5 and 4 dB for the pair combinations terminated on pins 1,2-3,6 and 3,6-7,8. There are no centering requirements for pair combinations 1,2-4,5, 4,5-7,8, or 1,2-7,8. C.5.2.2 Modular cord test head FEXT loss Mated modular cord test head FEXT loss shall be measured for all pair combinations in accordance with clause C.4.5.. For all frequencies from 10 MHz to the upper frequency of the category, modular test head FEXT loss performance shall exceed the values determined using equation (C-24). )100/log(201.48_fFEXTHeadTest-³ dB (C-24) C.5.2.3 Modular cord test head return loss Mated modular cord test head return loss shall be measured for all pair combinations in accordance with clause C.4.2.. For all frequencies from 10 MHz to the upper frequency of the category, modular test head return loss performance shall meet the values determined using table C.12. Table C.12 - Modular cord test head return loss Frequency (MHz) Return loss (dB) 10 £ f < 50 50 £ f £ 500 ³ 35 ³ 29 – 20log(f /100) C.5.3 Modular cord test procedure The pass or fail margin and the frequency at which it occurs shall be reported for each pair combination. NEXT loss requirements are given in clause 6.9.2 and return loss in clause 6.9.1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 162 Annex D (normative) - Connecting hardware transfer impedance test method D.1 Introduction Transfer impedance relates to the shielding efficiency (quality of shielding against influences by electromagnetic fields) of screened cables and connecting hardware. D.2 Purpose and scope This annex describes a test method for connecting hardware transfer impedance. Transfer impedance is not intended for conformance testing of installed cabling. Setup variations that yield equivalent results are also acceptable. D.3 Transfer impedance test method D.3.1 General This clause describes the measurement method used in verifying the shield transfer impedance requirements of 100 W screened connecting hardware contained in clause 6.8.20. The measurement method requires the use of a network analyzer or equivalent, coaxial cables, screened test leads, impedance matching terminations, and a high frequency (HF) sealed case. The setup is qualified to a measurement bandwidth of at least 10 kHz to 100 MHz. Calibration procedures for insertion loss are specified by the manufacturer of the test equipment. Transfer impedance values can be calculated from laboratory shielding insertion loss measurements collected using a HF sealed case (refer to clause D.3.2). The equivalent circuit diagram for the HF sealed case is shown in figure D.1. AC Ri1 R1 1 uc Zt Zcond R I I1 Figure D.1 - Equivalent circuit diagram for HF sealed case Where: Ri1 = Ri2 = characteristic impedance of the network analyzer = 50 W R1 = feeding resistor = 50 W R2 = terminating resistor = 50 W U1 = transmitter voltage (volts) U2 = receiver voltage (volts) Uc = voltage across device under test (volts) Zcond = characteristic impedance of conductors (W) Zt = transfer impedance (W) Ri2 2 2 U2 U ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 163 Under the following assumptions: Zcond is significantly less than R2, and I2 is significantly less than I1, The following equations describe the circuit equation in figure D.1. U1 =I Ri1 1× (D-1) U I Ri2 2 2=× (D-2) U I R Rc i =× +2 2 2( ) (D-3) U Z Ic t =× 1 (D-4) From a substitution operation follows: Z l R R R R U Ut cable i i i= × × + × 1 1 2 2 2 2 1( ) (D-5) Measured shield insertion loss sa , in decibels, is described by the relation:   ×= 1 2log20 U Uas dB (D-6) By applying this relation and entering values for 2R and 2iR , the resultant transfer impedance in ohms is expressed as: Z R U U Rt i i a as s = × × = × × = ×2 1 2 1 2 1 10 100 10 20 20 W (D-7) D.3.2 Test setup and apparatus Equipment list: Network analyzer (50 W characteristic impedance) Coaxial adapters as required to make network analyzer port connections. Sub-miniature type A (SMA) adapters are recommended, however, other adapters may also be acceptable. HF sealed case Rosin core solder Aluminum soldering flux Precision ±1% 50 W metal film resistors EMI/RFI foil shielding tape (adhesive backing optional) Connecting hardware shall be tested with the cable shield construction with which it is designed to be used. If the connecting hardware is designed for several cable shield constructions, it shall be tested with the construction of single foil with drain wire. The diagrams in figure D.2and figure D.3 provide a detailed reference to the dimensional characteristics of the HF sealed case. The HF sealed case shall be constructed from sheet copper or brass of 2 mm (0.08 in) minimum thickness. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 164 Figure D.2 - HF sealed case dimensional characteristics (Dimensions are in mm) NOTE - A coaxial adapter (not shown) is mounted on each end of the HF sealed case at the locations indicated for connection to a network analyzer. A 50 W ± 1% metal film resistor (not shown) is soldered to the center conductor of each adapter inside the HF sealed case in order to match the characteristic impedance of the network analyzer and minimize cable to fixture power loss. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 165 Figure D.3 - HF sealed case covers, fixed and modular ring details (Dimensions are in mm) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 166 D.3.3 Test method D.3.3.1 Connecting hardware and cable preparation Products under test may consist of screened connecting hardware terminated on either end by 75 mm (3 in) lengths of screened cable. Connecting hardware intended to be mated with a shielded modular plug shall be terminated with 75 mm (3 in) of screened patch cable on the mated plug end and 75 mm (3 in) of screened horizontal cable terminated to the insulation displacement contact (IDC) end. 1 The device under test is prepared by designating one end of the connecting hardware (typically, the stranded cable/shielded modular plug end for mated plug/jack connectors) as the ‘input’ end and the opposite end as the ‘output’ end. 2 Strip off 25 mm (1 in) of jacket from the ‘input’ end of the product sample. 3 Carefully peel back the foil, drain wire, and braid (if present) from the input end. Remove any secondary insulator materials (e.g. dielectric wrap) surrounding the twisted-pair conductors. Strip off 15 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from each of the inner conductors. Twist the exposed copper ends together and solder to form a fused conductor core. Snip 7 mm (.25 in) from the tips of the soldered conductor core. 4 Solder the drain wire to the fused conductor core 5 Fold the shielding materials over the soldered conductor core and drain wire. Solder shielding materials to the conductor core such that a 360º solder contact (use aluminum soldering flux if necessary) is present. Foil or braid should not extend beyond the fused conductors. To maintain shield integrity during testing and handling, tightly wrap a piece of heat resistant tape around the unjacketed portion of the screened cable under test (optional). Any metallic tape should not make contact with the connections. 6 Affix a 25 mm (1 in) square or circular segment of EMI/RFI foil tape to the grooved side of the modular ring (reference figure K.5). Punch a hole the diameter of the screened cable under test through the middle of the foil tape. 7 Pass the ‘output’ end of the stripped cable portion through the modular ring and through the hole in the EMI/RFI foil tape (maintain the proper modular ring orientation such that the foil tape and modular ring groove will be in direct contact with the fixed ring upon assembly). 8 Carefully peel back the cable foil, drain wire, and braid (if present) and lay flat against the foil taped modular ring. Trim back excess shielding materials such that there is no interference with the modular ring groove. Solder shielding materials to the foil tape such that a 360º solder contact (use aluminum solder flux if necessary) is present. 9 Strip 15 mm (0.5 in) from the insulation of each of the inner conductors. Twist the exposed copper ends together and solder to form a fused conductor core. This fused core shall not be in contact with the shield or the test fixture on the output end. 10 Insert the prepared sample under test into the main case (the larger of the two HF sealed case enclosures). Fasten the modular ring to the fixed ring using four screws (‘finger-tight’). 11 Solder the conductor core of the ‘input’ side of the sample under test to the 50 W ± 1% terminating resistor located inside the main case. 12 Solder the conductor core of the ‘output’ side of the sample under test to the 50 W ±1% terminating resistor located inside the secondary case (the smaller of the two HF sealed case enclosures). D.3.3.2 Calibration and measurement Perform a ‘through’ normalization calibration on the network analyzer to compensate for the insertion loss of the 50 W coaxial test leads. Connect the transmit coaxial test lead to the input coaxial adapter of the main case and connect the receive coaxial test lead to the output coaxial adapter of the secondary case. Perform a shield insertion loss measurement. Calculate the corresponding transfer impedance from the shielding insertion loss. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 167 D.3.4 Transfer impedance measurement consistency tests D.3.4.1 Test orientation summary Swapping the input and output side of the network analyzer should not change the results by more than 4%. D.3.4.2 AC and DC resistance correlation When connected correctly, the DC resistance (measured with a milli-ohmmeter) of the device under investigation shall correlate to the AC resistance at low frequencies (i.e. 10 kHz) to within ±20%. D.3.4.3 Open shield test The results of performing an open test (shield on the output side left unconnected) should be a flat insertion loss waveform correlating to a transfer impedance of 50 W ± 4%. D.3.4.4 Measurement slope verification The slope of the measured shield insertion loss should be between 18 dB/decade and 20 dB/decade above 10 MHz. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 168 Annex E (informative) - Connecting hardware test fixtures E.1 General An impedance controlled measurement fixture consists of a device designed to provide controlled interconnections to the DUT. The fixture provides an interface that is designed to maintain correct DM and CM impedance of the pairs in the transmission line when they are separated for interfacing between the DUT and the port interfaces of test equipment. The port interfaces of test equipment, which are typically 50 , coaxial ports are further conditioned by the use of balun transformers presenting a 100 balanced port to the DUT. The interface, in addition to providing impedance control of the balanced leads of the DUT, also provides shielding for the pairs to reduce unwanted pair-to-pair couplings. The interface is electrically connected to the balun and instrument ground reference through pin and socket connectors. An example fixture, as shown in figure E.1, provides pin and socket connections to the DUT. Termination adapters which provide DMCM resistor terminations for the inactive ports are provided for making NEXT loss and FEXT loss measurements where the highest accuracy is required. Figure E.1 - Test head assembly with baluns attached ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 169 Calibration standards are provided which use the same materials and positioning. The calibration plane is thereby located at the top (open end) of the sockets of the adapter mounting plate. A mounting plate with socket interfaces connects directly to the test baluns. Two such fixtures will provide 8 test ports for connection to both near and far ends of a four pair DUT. NOTES, 1 The balun interfaces are designed to mate to BH electronics 040-0192 baluns. 2 All test fixture components referenced in this annex may be obtained from industry sources. These test fixtures are provided in kit form including adapter plates, balun mounting plates, baluns and calibration references. Alternative equivalent components may also be used. Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. 3 Future developments of test fixtures are expected. Such fixtures may be used in place of or in addition to those specified and recommended in this Standard, if they meet the relevant requirements specified in this Standard. E.2 Additional components for connection to a network analyzer SMA cables, connectors, 50W SMA terminations, are necessary for interfacing the coaxial ports of the baluns to network analyzer ports. Mounting brackets are recommended for holding the test interface assemblies at convenient positions for attachment to connectors under test. Foil tape with conductive adhesive (3M 5012C or equivalent) may be used for where additional shielding is needed for various components. Figure E.2 - Test head assembly showing shielding between baluns NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 170 Figure E.3 - Balun test fixture assembly ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 E.3 Direct fixture A fixture for direct measurement of modular test plug properties has shielded coaxial probes that make contact with the modular plug contacts as shown in figures crosstalk and return loss compliant with table measurements can be made using this fixture. Figure NOTES, 1 The direct fixture DPMF 2 Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Figure 171 A fixture for direct measurement of modular test plug properties has shielded coaxial probes that make contact with the modular plug contacts as shown in figures E.4 and E.5. The fixture has levels of crosstalk and return loss compliant with table C.5. Insertion loss, NEXT loss, FEXT loss, and return loss measurements can be made using this fixture. Figure E.4 - Plug direct fixture, DPMF-2 view 1 The direct fixture DPMF-2 may be obtained from industry sources. Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Figure E.5 - Plug direct fixture, DPMF-2 view 2 A fixture for direct measurement of modular test plug properties has shielded coaxial probes that make . The fixture has levels of . Insertion loss, NEXT loss, FEXT loss, and return loss Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 172 Figure E.6 - Exploded assembly of the direct fixture ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 E.4 PCB based test plug assembly A PCB (printed circuit based) test plug constructed for mating to the test fixture assembly is shown in figure E.7. The plug consists of three parts, an insert assembly and two cover pieces. The potential advantage of using the PCB based plug shown is that 1) Its properties have been designed to comply with electrical properties of the clause C.4.10. 2) The construction is repeatable and consistent. 3) It is mounted to the test fixture without the use of twisted wire test consistent measurement result. The plug is mounted using an adapter plate as shown in figure with four through connections, one with two opposite DMCM terminations, one with two adjacent DMCM terminations, one with three DMCM terminations, and one with four DMCM terminations. Figure E.8 - TP6A PCB based plug assembly with adapter NOTE - The PCB based plug TP6A assembly with adapter may be obtained from sources. 173 PCB based test plug assembly A PCB (printed circuit based) test plug constructed for mating to the test fixture assembly is shown in . The plug consists of three parts, an insert assembly and two cover pieces. The potential advantage of using the PCB based plug shown is that: Its properties have been designed to comply with electrical properties of the tes n is repeatable and consistent. It is mounted to the test fixture without the use of twisted wire test leads, yielding a more nt measurement result. The plug is mounted using an adapter plate as shown in figure E.8. There are five adapter plates: one h connections, one with two opposite DMCM terminations, one with two adjacent DMCM terminations, one with three DMCM terminations, and one with four DMCM terminations. Figure E.7 - PCB based plug TP6A PCB based plug assembly with adapter The PCB based plug TP6A assembly with adapter may be obtained from A PCB (printed circuit based) test plug constructed for mating to the test fixture assembly is shown in . The plug consists of three parts, an insert assembly and two cover pieces. The potential test plug described in leads, yielding a more There are five adapter plates: one h connections, one with two opposite DMCM terminations, one with two adjacent DMCM terminations, one with three DMCM terminations, and one with four DMCM terminations. The PCB based plug TP6A assembly with adapter may be obtained from industry ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 174 E.5 Connecting hardware measurement configuration Figure E.9 shows an example of a connecting hardware measurement configuration. Figure E.9 - An example of a connecting hardware measurement configuration Calibration plane test plug phase reference plane Port Extension DUT with interconnections ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 E.6 Test fixture calibration A one-port calibration of any of the four ports is accomplished using the open, short, and load calibration standards applied to the test fixture interface. A full two using open, short, and load calibration standards and the back A four-port test fixture interface is shown in figure calibration of 8 ports. The “through” measurements of the back (port-1-near to port-1-far) port arrangement may be applied to the calibration of adjacent 1N etc… (port-1-near to port-2-near, etc…) ports. Figure NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement 175 port calibration of any of the four ports is accomplished using the open, short, and load calibration standards applied to the test fixture interface. A full two-port calibration of any of 8 ports can be obtained using open, short, and load calibration standards and the back-to-back through standard. port test fixture interface is shown in figure E.10. Two of these are required to do a full 2 calibration of 8 ports. The “through” measurements of the back-to-back through for any 1N far) port arrangement may be applied to the calibration of adjacent 1N near, etc…) ports. Figure E.10 - Test fixture interface Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement port calibration of any of the four ports is accomplished using the open, short, and load calibration port calibration of any of 8 ports can be obtained back through standard. . Two of these are required to do a full 2-port back through for any 1N-1F far) port arrangement may be applied to the calibration of adjacent 1N-2N, 1N-3N, Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. The open and short calibration standards are applied directly to the test fixture interface with no intermediary adapters as shown in figures the interface during testing, the calibration plane will be located at the ends of the sockets of the adapter. Figure E.11 - Open calibration standard applied to test interface NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Figure E.12 - Short calibration standard applied to test interface NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. 176 The open and short calibration standards are applied directly to the test fixture interface with no intermediary adapters as shown in figures E.11 and E.12 respectively. When an adapter is attached to the interface during testing, the calibration plane will be located at the ends of the sockets of the adapter. Open calibration standard applied to test interface Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Short calibration standard applied to test interface illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 The open and short calibration standards are applied directly to the test fixture interface with no respectively. When an adapter is attached to the interface during testing, the calibration plane will be located at the ends of the sockets of the adapter. Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 The load and through calibration standards are applied directly to the test fixture interface with no intermediary adapters as shown in figures Figure E.13 - Load calibration standard applied to test interface NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Figure E.14 - Back NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. 177 The load and through calibration standards are applied directly to the test fixture interface with no intermediary adapters as shown in figures E.13 and E.14 respectively. Load calibration standard applied to test interface for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. Back-to-back through standard applied to test interface Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. The load and through calibration standards are applied directly to the test fixture interface with no for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. back through standard applied to test interface Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. When the test plug is attached to the test fixture interface for measurement, the calibration plane will be at the tips of the adapter sockets for all measurements if the back as shown in figure E.15. Figure E.15 NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. When the direct fixture is attached to the test head interface, an adapter is placed in between the direct fixture and the interface as shown in figure under the direct fixture. Figure E.16 - Direct fixture mounted to the test head interface NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. 178 test plug is attached to the test fixture interface for measurement, the calibration plane will be at the tips of the adapter sockets for all measurements if the back-to-back through calibration artifact is used .15 - Test plug attached to the test interface Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. tached to the test head interface, an adapter is placed in between the direct fixture and the interface as shown in figure E.16. The shield plates (not shown) must remain Direct fixture mounted to the test head interface Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 test plug is attached to the test fixture interface for measurement, the calibration plane will be at back through calibration artifact is used Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. tached to the test head interface, an adapter is placed in between the direct . The shield plates (not shown) must remain in position Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 179 E.6.1 Calibration and reference plane location A calibration is performed to establish a reference plane location as shown in figure E.17. Figure E.17 - Calibration reference plane NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 180 Through calibration is performed using a back-to-back through adapter as shown in figure E.18. This method causes a 180 degree phase rotation of all through phase measurements. To avoid physical re- arrangements of the baluns, and the 180 degree phase rotation, it is possible to measure a jumper, based on a full two-port calibration with a zero-length through, use it as the through, and subtract its effects from the measured data. Figure E.18 - Through calibration E.7 Test lead, 100 mm (4 in) twisted-pair return loss measurement on a pyramid The following method is recommended for qualification of test leads when the pyramid interface is used. Perform a one port (open-short-load) calibration of the near-end measurement port. The reference plane of calibration should coincide with the socket-to-twisted-pair lead transition point. Trim the twisted-pair used to construct the test leads to fit into the pyramid slot as shown in figure E.19. The length of twisted- pair from socket to socket is approximately 100 mm (4 in). Attach a precision differential mode resistor termination to the pyramid adapter so that the through connecting pins connect to the near-end of the twisted-pair and the precision chip resistor terminates the far-end. Attach the pyramid assembly with the twisted-pair inserted to the balun mounting plate and measure the test lead return loss. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 181 Figure E.19 - Test setup for twisted-pair return loss measurement NOTE - Photos are for illustrative purposes only and do not constitute an endorsement by TIA. E.8 DUT connections using header PCB assemblies One method to minimize the effects of interconnecting leads is to use dedicated PCB header assemblies to connect between the DUT and the test equipment. These PCB headers contain connections to interface to the test port and also connections to interface to the DUT terminals or IDC slots. Figure E.20 - Method to minimize distance between planes Connections to the network analyzer Header PCB assembly to the jack under test Connections to the network analyzer Header PCB assembly to the plug under test Reference load resistor ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 182 Annex F (informative) - Multiport measurement considerations F.1 Multiport test configuration, general The network analyzer referenced in this Standard supports one port and two port measurements. It injects a signal into one port of a device and measures the response on either that same port, or a second port of the device. In the case of balanced measurements on twisted-pairs, a balun is used to convert the 50 W unbalanced output of the network analyzer to 100 W balanced output. Thus the network analyzer presents to the device under test two balanced ports, which can be configured either as output or input via standard two port switching. The typical cable or connector consists of 4 balanced pairs totaling 8 balanced ports (4 input and 4 output). In order to fully characterize this device for balanced measurements only, a total of 128 separate measurements must be taken (2^8/2). When each of the measurements is made, the remaining ports of the device must be properly terminated in the characteristic impedance of the line to avoid the possibility of reflected signals altering the measurements. It is for this reason that terminations are specified for the inactive pairs of the cabling device under test. F.2 Terminology A port refers to a 100 W balanced twisted-pair input or output. DM terminations consists of 100 W applied across the two terminals of the port with no connection to ground reference. Common mode termination consists of the combination of 100 W differential termination with the addition of 50 W common mode termination to a ground reference. This is accomplished with either balun or resistor terminations as described in annex B. Near-end generally applies to the device port that is connected to the output of the network analyzer, while far-end generally applies to the device ports that are remote from the analyzer connections or are connected to the input of the network analyzer. F.3 Two port measurement of multiport device When a two port measurement is made on a multiport device, the network analyzer calibration compensates for imperfections in the measurement path up to the reference plane of measurement. For near-end crosstalk, the input and output ports are two ports at the near-end of the device. The far-end ports of the device are attached to impedance matching terminations. The far-end ports, not being in the measurement path, are not part of the calibration matrix. Thus, any imperfections that are present at the far-end terminations will cause a measurement error. For this reason the properties of the remote terminations must be assessed. The termination requirements are specified in annex B. Similarly, the terminations attached to the two inactive near-end ports of the device as well as the far-end terminations of the inactive ports must be assessed or measurement errors will result. Insertion loss and FEXT loss measurements only differ in that the measurement path includes the near-end and the far-end of the device. All of the remaining ports must be terminated in an impedance matching termination or measurement errors will result. F.4 Common mode termination Common mode terminations are required for many tests due to the imperfect balance of the transmission path. Imperfect balance may be caused by imperfect balun transformers, unbalanced couplings in connectors and cables, and proximity of conductors to a ground path. If a common mode signal is present on a device, then a common mode termination must be provided or a reflection will occur which will affect the measurement. DM terminations provide no termination for a common mode signal. The common mode signal return path in cabling is typically formed by the inactive pairs of the cabling through stray inductive and capacitive coupling. Thus, ideally, there should be common mode terminations on all ports at both ends of the cabling device. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 183 F.5 Measurement topology The diagrams showing measurement topology typically depict balun connections at the near-end and resistor terminations at the far-end of the device under test. Resistor terminations are preferred for all inactive ports both at the near-end and the far-end. This is due to the better return loss characteristics of a well-matched resistor termination as compared to a balun termination. Setting up and performing a complete test of all device parameters may be difficult, however because excessive plugging and unplugging of the device to the termination resistors is required. Figures F.1 and F.2 depict preferred topologies for specific measurement parameters. Figure F.1 - Preferred topology for NEXT measurement with DM terminations on connecting hardware (may also be used for return loss measurements) Figure F.2 - Preferred topology for FEXT loss and insertion loss measurement on connecting hardware (NEXT loss test with DMCM termination is similar) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 184 F.6 Ground plane considerations Balun cases should always be firmly bonded to a low impedance ground plane. The physical configuration of the ground plane may vary from one test configuration to another, but this does not appear to be critical. When common mode terminations are used, the ground leg is attached to the same ground plane. Test configurations including common mode terminations dictate that the far-end of the device is also terminated to a ground plane. All far-end common mode terminations are attached to this ground plane as well as any far-end balun cases. Unless otherwise specified, the connection between near-end and far-end balun planes is allowed (see figure F.2). In general, the installed cabling system provides no direct current ground path between the near-end and far-end common mode ground nodes. Field testing of installed cabling does not provide direct connection between the far-end and near-end common mode ground nodes. In contrast, the network analyzer provides a short DC path from the near- end to the far-end ground planes via the coaxial cabling. There may be a different propagation path for common mode signals through the cabling device when tested in a laboratory setting versus the installed setting. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 185 Annex G (informative) - Cable installation in higher temperature environments G.1 General Cables may be installed in return air plenums, in ceiling spaces, riser shafts and non air-conditioned buildings such as warehouses and manufacturing plants where the temperature can be significantly higher than 20° C. In order to ensure compliance with the channel insertion loss specified in clause 6.2.7, the horizontal cable distance may need to be reduced below 90 meters depending upon the average temperature of the environment over the length of the cable, the insertion loss margin of the installed cabling, and the insertion loss temperature coefficient of the cable. G.2 Insertion loss Equation (G-1) defines the insertion loss dependence on temperature: ( ) ( )4020121 20 -+-+ = TT ILILT dd (G-1) where: ILT = Measured insertion loss at temperature T IL20 = Insertion loss corrected to 20°C T = Measured temperature in °C The correction factors, δ 1 and δ 2, are shown in table G.1. Table G.1 – Maximum horizontal cable length de-rating factor for different temperatures Temperature (º C) δ1 δ2 UTP 20 ≤ T ≤ 40 40 < T ≤ 60 0.004 0.004 0 0.00248 F/UTP 20 ≤ T ≤ 60 0.002 0 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 186 G.3 Allowance for cable temperature Table G.2 shows the maximum horizontal cable length de-rating at various temperatures assuming a cable insertion loss temperature coefficient specified in clause 6.4.7. Table G.2 – Maximum horizontal cable length de-rating factor for different temperatures Temperature (°C (°F)) Maximum horizontal unscreened cable length Maximum horizontal screened cable length Length de-rating (m) (unscreened) Length de-rating (m) (screened) (m) (m) 20 (68) 90.0 90.0 0 0 25 (77) 89.0 89.5 1.0 0.5 30 (86) 87.0 88.5 3.0 1.5 35 (95) 85.5 87.7 4.5 2.3 40 (104) 84.0 87.0 6.0 3.0 45 (113) 81.7 86.5 8.3 3.5 50 (122) 79.5 85.5 10.5 4.5 55 (131) 77.2 84.7 12.8 5.3 60 (140) 75.0 83.0 15.0 6.0 NOTE - This table assumes that the channel includes 10 meters of patch and equipment cords at 20° C. G.4 Installation example If a cable is installed in an environment where the temperature averaged over the length of the cable can be as high as 40° C, then the maximum horizontal cable distance should be reduced from 90 meters to 84 meters. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 187 Annex H (informative) - Derivation of propagation delay from insertion loss equation H.1 Factoring the insertion loss equation Factoring the insertion loss equation The transmission line complex propagation constant, g, is defined in terms of the distributed transmission line parameters, R, L, G and C, as: ()()b+a=w+w+=g j C j G L j R (H-1) Factoring out the term, LC j w , the expression for g may be written, C j G 1 L j R 1 LC j       w +      w +w=g (H-2) Multiplying out the terms in equation (H-2): C j G L j R LC G R 1 LC j 2 w + w + w -w=g (H-3) At high frequencies, R << wL, and G << wC, dropping the w2 term C j G L j R 1 LC j w + w +w»g (H-4) Since R << wL, and G << wC, we can further approximate equation (H-4), by:     w + w +w»g C 2 j G L 2 j R 1 LC j (H-5) So the approximation for g, explicitly showing a and b becomes:     w + w +w»b+a=g C 2 j G L 2 j R 1 LC j j (H-6) Multiplying out the terms in equation (H-6), we have: LC j C L 2 G L C 2 R j w+   +»b+a=g (H-7) Separating real and imaginary parts in equation (H-7) we have: C L 2 G L C 2 R    +»a (H-8) LC w»b (H-9) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 188 Explicitly writing the expression for the transmission line’s distributed inductance, L, in terms of its external and internal inductance, INT L L L +=¥, where:    w +=+= ¥ ¥¥L R 1 L L L L INT (H-10) Substituting the expression for L given above, into equation (H-8):         +    w + »a ¥ ¥ C L 2 G L R 1 L 2 C R (H-11) Factoring out ¥L , from the denominator of the first part of equation (H-11): C L 2 G L R 1 L 2 C R         +    w + »a ¥ ¥ (H-12) For 1 L R <<      w ¥ ,    w + ¥L R 1 1 may be further approximated by:    w »    w +¥ ¥ L 2 R - 1 L R 1 1 (H-13) Applying this approximation for    w + ¥L R 1 1 in equation (H-12):       +   w »a ¥¥ C L 2 G L 2 R - 1 L 2 C R (H-14) Multiplying out the terms in equation (L-14): ( ) ) 3 ( ) 2 ( ) 1 ( C L 2 G L 4 C R - L 2 C R 3/2 2       + w »a ¥¥ (H-15) In equation (H-15), the value for the loss term, R, in the first term, comes mainly from the skin effect at high frequencies, which has a square root dependence upon the signal frequency: f R µ. In the third term, G is the dielectric dissipation term, dw= tan C G , where tan d is the loss tangent for the dielectric. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 189 Applying these relationships, and using w = 2 p f to equation (H-15): ()()() ( )( ) ( )        dp+ p »a ¥¥ C L 2 tan C f 2 L f 2 4 C f R - L C 2 f R 3/2 2 (H-16) The first term containing R exhibits a root frequency dependence. This is the copper loss term, which is the constant for the first term in the insertion loss equations in Table 56. Noting the root frequency dependence of R, the second term is independent of frequency. It is so small that it may be neglected. The third term, containing G, exhibits a direct frequency dependence. This is the material dissipation loss term, which is the constant for the second term in the insertion loss equations in Table 56. H.2 Developing the phase delay equation The expression for the phase delay is given by: C L Delay == w b (H-17) Substituting, for    w +=+= ¥ ¥¥L R 1 L L L L INT C L R 1 L Delay   +== ¥ ¥ww b (H-18) Applying the approximation for 1 L R <<      w ¥ ,     w + ¥L R 1 may be written as: ¥¥w +»    w + L 2 R 1 L R 1 (H-19) Then the expression for delay may be written:    w += w b ¥ ¥L R 1 L C 2 (H-20) Multiplying out equation (H-20): ¥ ¥w += w b L C 2 R L C (H-21) Writing the expression for delay to indicate the frequency dependent terms: () ( )¥p +¥= w b L C f 2 2 f R L C (H-22) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 190 Since C and ¥L are independent of frequency, the first term in equation (H-22) is a constant. The second term has a f 1 frequency dependence, due to the ratio of () f f R which results in the following expression for delay: Delay = f . k1 Const p += w b 2 6868 (H-23) The units for delay in equation (H-23) are s/100m (seconds/100m), with frequency, f, expressed in MHz. Note that for constant capacitance cables, this approximation for delay holds, independently of wire gauge and cable impedance. If the insertion loss is known, the rate of decrease in delay as a function of frequency is also known. Using the copper loss coefficient for category 5e from Table 56:: MHz f 36 Const ) ns/100m Delay(+= (H-24) Note that K1, for category 5e, is 1967 for f in Hz. By anchoring the delay at f = 1 MHz, to be 570 ns/100m: MHz f 36 534 ) ns/100m Delay(+= (H-25) In these equations, the following terms are defined as: R = Resistance per unit length of cable L = Inductance per unit length of cable ¥L = External inductance per unit length of cable LINT = Internal inductance per unit length of cable G = Conductance per unit length of cable C = Capacitance per unit length of cable a = Insertion loss constant per unit length of cable b = Phase constant per unit length of cable f = Frequency in Hertz f MHz = Frequency in MHz w = 2 p f = radian frequency in radians/second ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 191 Annex I (informative) - Development of channel and component return loss limits I.1 General Return loss is a measure of the reflected signal expressed in decibels (dB). The magnitude of the return loss is affected by the characteristic impedance mismatches between the various components comprising a channel, including the horizontal cable, patch cable and connectors as well as structural impedance variations in the cable. The channel or permanent link return loss is computed by multiplication of transmission matrices for each component in the link using the circuit analysis method. Each component is modeled by its transmission matrix as shown in equation (I-1). ()() ( )( )      l Z l lZl gg gg coshsinh sinhcosh (I-1) where: bagj+=is the complex propagation constant and Z is the complex characteristic impedance. ( )e dBIL log20 =a with: dBIL is the insertion loss of the component per m in dB. e = 2.71828 (base of natural logarithm) cNVP f 6102pb= with: f is the frequency in MHz. c is the speed of light in vacuum 8103 m/s. l is the length of the component in meters. NVP is the nominal velocity of propagation relative to the speed of light. In turn, NVP is related to the propagation delay: cdelayprop NVP × = _ 100 The frequency dependency of delayprop_can be ignored in most simulations. The return loss is computed from the overall transmission matrix    DC BA by: DrefZC BrefZA inZ + + =, and       + - -= refZinZ refZinZ RL log20 , (I-2) with the nominal characteristic impedance W=100refZ . ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 192 I.2 Assumptions I.2.1 Assumptions for the transmission matrix for cable For cable, the specified insertion loss per unit length is given by: 100 3 21 f k fkfk dBIL ++ = (I-3) where 3,2,1 kandkk are the constants in the equation for cable insertion loss. The properties of the characteristic impedance Z include a fitted (average) characteristic impedance fitZ , which is assumed constant along the length of the cable, and a random variation around the fitted characteristic impedance. The fitted characteristic impedance can be represented by:      -+= f j oZfitZ 1055.01 (I-4) with oZ is the asymptotic value of the fitted characteristic impedance. The highest allowed value for oZ can be determined by assuming that contributions to cable return loss from structural variations may be ignored at low frequencies. The return loss of a 100 m cable segment are computed and the value of oZ adjusted so that at the lowest possible frequency the computed return loss matches the return loss specification for cable (the test length is 100 m). The lowest allowed value for oZ is limited by the insertion loss requirements. As a result, it is assumed that the allowed range of asymptotic impedance is symmetrical around 100 W. Pair structural variations may be represented by dividing the cable into many unit interval segments of randomly varying impedance, and performing a Monte-Carlo analysis of the cable return loss. The amplitude of these variations is adjusted so that the overall return loss is approximated. This is rather computation intensive and requires many iterations. A simpler way is to assume that return loss caused by structural variations is uncorrelated with the computed return loss from the cable interfaces. The distributed return loss (DRL, a statistical approximation of structural return loss) is obtained by power sum subtracting the computed interface return loss from the specified return loss and computed interface return loss of cable.      - - - -=10 interfaceRL 1010 cableRL 10log10DRL (I-5) DRL is approximated by:   -= 20 log10 f DRLK100mDRL where: KDRL is a constant. (I-6) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 193 This approximation may be used to represent the contributions from all distributed sources of return loss in cabling for most lengths of cabling. The contribution from DRL over a short length of cable may be approximated using the same formula as that used for scaling NEXT loss per IEC 61156-1. The DRL from all of the cable segments are added together in a power sum manner to obtain the DRL for the whole link. Since the DRL contributions from all cable segments are uncorrelated, the same DRL from the previous cable addition can also be obtained directly by assuming the total length in the length dependency formula and computing the correction only once. The changes caused by the length dependency formula are minimal when the total length of cabling exceeds 30 meters, and therefore one may use the DRL approximation for all practical cabling lengths. The typical value of DRLK is 28 dB for solid core cable and 26 dB for stranded cable. Assuming the total length of solid core cable far exceeds the total length of stranded jumpers and patch cable, one may assume the value DRLK of solid core cable for the entire channel. I.2.2 Assumptions for the transmission matrix for connectors For a connector, the product of the propagation delay constant and length is used. ljllbag+= (I-7) The electrical length connl is obtained from: xf xcNVPconnl 360 f = (I-8) where: xf is the measured phase angle in degrees between the output and input of the connector at a high frequency xf (e.g., 50 MHz) The connector is now modeled as a short transmission line of electrical length connl . The frequency response exhibits a 20 dB/decade slope within the frequency range of interest. The value of the characteristic impedance connZ for the connector is adjusted so that the specified return loss at a certain frequency is matched. Practical values of connl lie between 5 cm and 10 cm. The attenuation constant fckl=a (I-9) where ck is the constant in the connector insertion loss equation. The phase constant xf f xlfpb 180 = (I-10) For the purpose of establishing category 6A permanent link and channel return loss limits, a connecting hardware return loss performance of 26–20log(f/100) is assumed to account for the variability of patch cord connections. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 194 I.3 Return loss modeling results A reasonable worst case channel configuration used to develop the return loss limits is shown in figure I.1. All flexible cable segments are assumed to have a asymptotic fitted characteristic impedance value of 95 W. The solid core cable segments are assumed to have a 105 W asymptotic fitted characteristic impedance. All connecting hardware is assumed to have return loss performance at the return loss limit for connecting hardware. Figure I.1 - Modeling configuration Reflections at the cable interfaces may result from characteristic impedance mismatches between cable segments or from the mismatch between connectors and cable segments. The phase dependencies and potential for in-phase addition of return loss between the different components in the channel are very much dependent on the physical separation of these interfaces from each other. Worst case in-phase addition most likely occurs in the frequency range from 15 to 30 MHz frequency range, where physical distances, typical for patch cords, match ¼ wavelen gths. If distances between connections are multiples of a fixed low value, then it is possible, but unlikely, that the return loss will exceed the pass/fail limits for the channels or permanent links under the following conditions: · In channels that use a cross-connect. · In channels and permanent links which use a consolidation point. In case, a return loss failure occurs in a channel: 1 Verify the operation and calibration of the field tester. 2 Determine the source of major reflections. 3 Reduce the number of connectors in the channel. 4 Select components with better return loss performance. 20 m cable 26 m channel 2 m 2 m 5 m 2 m Cord Cord Cord Connecting Hardware Connecting Hardware Connecting Hardware Connecting Hardware ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 195 Annex J (informative) - Modeling configurations Figure J.1 shows five channel modeling configurations that are used for worst-case analysis. ID Description Channel configuration 1 2 3 4 5 A Work area cord 5 m 2 m 1 m 1 m 1 m TO Telecommunications outlet / connector P P P P P B Consolidation point cabling 5 m 5 m 5 m NP NP CP Consolidation point connector P P P NP NP C Horizontal cabling 85 m 15 m 15 m 15 m 10 m C1 Horizontal cross-connect or interconnect P P P P P D Patch cord or jumper cable 2 m 1 m 1 m 1 m 1 m C2 Horizontal cross-connect or interconnect P P P P NP E Telecommunications room equipment cord 3 m 2 m 2 m 2 m NP NP = Not present in this channel model P = Present in this channel model Figure J.1 - Channel configuration Similarly, figure J.2 shows four permanent link modeling configurations that are used for worst-case analysis. ID Description Permanent link configuration 1 2 3 4 TO Telecommunications outlet / connector P P P P B Consolidation point cabling 5 m 5 m NP NP CP Consolidation point connector P P NP NP C Horizontal cabling 85 m 15 m 15 m 10 m C1 Horizontal cross-connect or interconnect P P P P NP = Not present in this permanent link model P = Present in this permanent link model Figure J.2 - Permanent link configuration ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 196 Annex K (informative) - Additional information on channel and permanent link NEXT loss limits K.1 General This annex describes the reflected FEXT contribution to overall measured NEXT loss, and provides guidelines to avoid conditions that may cause a NEXT loss failure from this phenomenon. NEXT loss is a measure of the unwanted signal coupling from a transmitter at the near-end into neighboring pairs measured at the near-end. The magnitude of the measured NEXT loss is affected by the NEXT loss, FEXT loss, insertion loss, and return loss properties of the components comprising a channel or permanent link. The model used in this standard to compute NEXT loss limits for cabling from the properties of the components is simplified and does not take into account all potential disturbers and reflection paths. The model has generally been conservative, in that computations based on a more detailed model result in the potential for tighter specifications. However, for category 6, and in particular at high frequencies, the FEXT loss and return loss properties increase in significance. When FEXT loss properties in connecting hardware and/or ACRF properties of cable are close to minimum specified requirements, failures in NEXT performance testing on cabling assemblies can occur. K.2 Reflected FEXT contributions to measured NEXT loss This source of indirect NEXT is caused by FEXT in the cabling components between a source of a reflection and the near-end. Two pairs are shown in figure K.1 for simplicity. The signal applied to one pair causes NEXT in an adjacent pair. In addition, the same test signal causes reflections throughout the cabling on the stimulus pair. These reflected signals couple through FEXT into the same pair as the NEXT and, thereby, are a source of indirect NEXT . Figure K.1 - Principle of reflected FEXT effects adding to NEXT Equipment connector Rest of cabling normal reflected FEXT ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 197 A similar indirect NEXT contribution is through FEXT from the stimulus pair to the disturbed pair, and reflections causing the signals return with the NEXT loss (this path is not shown in figure K.1). The magnitude of reflected FEXT is affected by: 1 The magnitude of major reflections, which generally occur at connecting hardware termination points (where mismatches between the impedance of the connector and the characteristic impedance of adjacent cable segments contribute to reflections). 2 The length of cable segments. Generally, reflections further away from the near-end are attenuated and insignificant. However, near-end reflections remain significant. 3 The magnitude of FEXT loss in connecting hardware and magnitude of ACRF in cable. K.3 Guidelines for determining the impact of reflected FEXT effects Reflected FEXT effects can affect pass/fail conditions of channel and permanent link NEXT loss under the following conditions: 1 The cable and/or connecting hardware NEXT loss is close to minimally required values. This condition is generally detected by NEXT loss showing low margin relative to the pass/fail requirements of the channel or permanent link. 2 Major reflections occur near the beginning of the link. This condition is generally detected by return loss performance close to channel or permanent link pass fail limits, most often in the 10 MHz to 30 MHz frequency range. 3 The cable segments near the beginning of the link are short (a few meters). 4 The connector FEXT loss and/or cable ACRF is close to minimally required component values. This condition is generally found by observing the ACRF property of the channel or permanent link. A significant impact of reflected FEXT is generally avoided when the ACRF of the channel or permanent link exceeds the pass/fail limits by at least 5 dB. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 198 Annex L (informative) - PSAACRF and AFEXT loss normalization L.1 General This annex provides additional information on the derivation of PSAACRF related to AFEXT loss normalization. It specifically addresses conditions where disturbed and disturbing channel or permanent links have different lengths. Unlike the parameters that apply to the internal transmission parameters and PSANEXT loss, the PSAACRF properties are affected by the length of disturbed and disturbing channels or permanent links. NOTE - PSAACRF, as defined in this Standard is equivalent to the PSAELFEXT computation, as defined in IEEE Std 802.3an™. L.2 Coupled length The alien FEXT loss, AFEXTk,i,,j, coupling from the 4 pairs of a disturbing channel or permanent link j with pairs 1 through 4 to a pair k of a disturbed channel or permanent link is shown in figure L.1. Figure L.1 - Unequal lengths of disturbing and disturbed channels or permanent links In case the disturbed permanent link or channel k, is longer than the disturbing permanent link or channel j, then the AFEXT loss noise coupling only occurs over the length of disturbing permanent link or channel j. Normally the signal strengths applied to each permanent link or channel (shown in figure L.1 at the right side) have equal magnitudes. A worst case condition occurs when both the disturbed and disturbing permanent links or channels terminate at the same location (on the left side of figure L.1). This is commonly the case for a patch panel in an equipment room. At the location where the disturbed and disturbing permanent links or channels are joined in a cable bundle, the source signal strength is nominal for the disturbing FEXT loss noise and lower by the nominal minus attenuated signal for a worst case condition where the signal source is at the location where the disturbing permanent links or channels joins the cable bundle. This relative loss of signal equals the difference of the insertion ILk loss of pair k of the disturbed permanent links or channels and the insertion loss ILi,j of disturbing permanent link or channel j. Adjustment is only applied when the disturbed permanent link or channel is longer than the disturbing permanent link or channel. This adjustment is referred to as AFEXT loss normalization. ILk ILi,j AFEXTk,i,j Disturbed channel or permanent link Disturbing channel or permanent link j Coupling length ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 199 L.3 AFEXT loss normalization Normalization includes the adjustment for signal strengths that can be applied to the coupled permanent links or channels for different lengths of disturbed and disturbing permanent links or channels. AACRF of the coupled permanent link or channel is determined using equations (L-1) and (L-2) with reference to figure L.2. Figure L.2 - AACRF for the coupled permanent link or channel ),min(,_jiklengthcouplingILILIL= dB (L-1) For the example shown in figure L.2, jilengthcouplingILIL,_=and the AACRF of the coupled permanent link or channel is given by equation (L-2). jijikjikILAFEXTAACRF,,,,,-= dB (L-2) Figure L.3 - AACRF normalized for the length of the disturbed permanent link or channel AACRF of the coupled permanent link or channel is then scaled to the length of the disturbed permanent link or channel using equations (L-3) to (L-7) with reference to figure L.3.       -= disturbing disturbed jikjiknorm Length LengthAACRFAACRFlog10,,,,, dB (L-3) ( ) ( )       --=- disturbing disturbed jijikkjiknorm Length LengthILAFEXTILAFEXTlog10,,,,,, dB (L-4) - ILi,j - ILk Disturbing length Disturbed length dB dB AFEXTk,i,j 0 dB 0 dB - ILk - ILk - ILi,j) dB - (ILk 0 dB dB d B 0 dB Disturbing length Disturbed length AFEXTnorm,k,i,j ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 200 The ratio of lengths can be approximated by using the ratio of insertion losses. Since the ratio does not change significantly over frequency, it is recommended to use the insertion loss values at 250 MHz. ( )       --+= ji k jikjikjiknorm IL ILILILAFEXTAFEXT , ,,,,,,log10 dB (L-5)       -=∑∑ = = -N j n i AFEXTnorm knorm jik PSAFEXT 1 1 10 , ,, 10log10 dB (L-6) k N j n i AFEXTnorm k ILPSAACRF jiK -      -=∑∑ = = - 1 1 10 ,, 10log10 dB (L-7) NOTE - The computation using equation (L-7) is equivalent to the computation of PSAACRF specified in TIA TSB-155 and the computation of PSAELFEXT in IEEE Std 802.3an™. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 201 Annex M (informative) - Category 5 channel parameters Category 5 has been superseded by category 5e and is no longer recognized by this Standard. The use of category 5e or better cabling is recommended for all new installations characterized for operation over the frequency range of 1 to 100 MHz. Table M.1 provides reference performance values for legacy category 5 channels. Table M.1 - Category 5 channel parameters Parameter Frequency (MHz) Channel performance Insertion loss 1 ≤ f ≤ 100 ≤ f f ff 04.0405.0023.0967.102.1 ×+      ++ dB NEXT loss3) 1 ≤ f ≤ 100 ≥       ×+-       --      -- 20 100 log2040 20 772.0 log1564 10210log20 ff dB Return loss 1 ≤ f < 20 20 ≤ f ≤ 100 ≥ 15 dB ≥   - 20 log2015 f dB ELFEXT1) 1 ≤ f ≤ 100 ≥   - 100 log2017 f dB PSELFEXT2) 1 ≤ f ≤ 100 ≥   - 100 log204.14 f dB Propagation delay 10 ≤ 555 ns Delay skew 10 ≤ 50 ns 1) ELFEXT is referred to as ACRF in other sections of this Standard. 2) PSELFEXT is referred to as PSACRF in other sections of this Standard. 3) Calculations that result in NEXT loss values greater than 60 dB revert to 60 dB. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 202 The category 5 channel parameter values in table M.2 are provided for information only. Table M.2 – Category 5 channel performance at key frequencies Frequency (MHz) Insertion Loss (dB) NEXT loss (dB) Return loss (dB) ELFEXT (dB) PSELFEXT (dB) 1.00 3.0 60.0 15.0 57.0 54.4 4.00 4.5 50.6 15.0 45.0 42.4 8.00 6.3 45.6 15.0 38.9 36.3 16.00 9.1 40.6 15.0 32.9 30.3 20.00 10.2 39.0 15.0 31.0 28.4 25.00 11.4 37.4 14.0 29.0 26.4 31.25 12.9 35.7 13.1 27.1 24.5 62.50 18.6 30.6 10.1 21.1 18.5 100.00 24.0 27.1 8.0 17.0 14.4 ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 203 Annex N (informative) - Bibliography This annex contains information on the documents that are related to or have been referenced in this document. Many of the documents are in print and are distributed and maintained by national or international standards organizations. These documents can be obtained through contact with the associated standards body or designated representatives. The applicable electrical code in the United States is the National Electrical Code. ANSI/IEEE C 62.11, Metal Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power Circuits ANSI X3.166-1990, ANSI Standard for Token Ring FDDI Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PMD) 23 ASTM B539-90, Measuring Contact Resistance of Electrical Connections (Static Contacts) Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Washington D.C., "The Code of Federal Regulations, FCC 47 CFR 68 Federal Telecommunications Recommendation 1090-1997, “COMMERCIAL BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD”, 11 August 1997, by National Communications System (NCS). IEEE 802.3-1990 (also known as ANSI/IEEE Std 802.3-1990 or ISO 8802-3: 1990(E), Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications IEEE 802.4, Standard for Local Area Network Token Passing Bus Access Method, Physical Layer Specification IEEE 802.5-1992 (also known as ANSI/IEEE Std 802.5-1992), Token Ring Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications IEEE 802.7, (also known as) Recommended Practices for Broadband Local Area Networks NEMA-250-1985, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) NQ-EIA/IS-AH, Cable for LAN Twisted-pair Data Communications-Detail Specification for Type 8, Undercarpet Cable, September 1988 Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers, Inc., Document #IPS-SP-001, Flexible RF Coaxial Dropcable Specification TIA/EIA TSB-31-B, FCC 47 CFR 68, Rationale and Measurement Guidelines UL 444 UL Standard for Safety Communications Cables The organizations listed below can be contacted to obtain reference information. ANSI www.ansi.org ASTM www.astm.org BICSI www.bicsi.org CENELEC www.cenelec.eu CSA www.csa.ca ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 204 FCC www.fcc.gov ICEA www.icea.net IEC www.iec.ch IEEE www.ieee.org Global Engineering Documents www.global.ihs.com Telcordia Technologies (formerly Bellcore) www.telcordia.com TIA www.tiaonline.org UL www.ul.com